Home

CubeSuite Ver.1.40 Integrated Development Environment User`s

1. This option specifies the maximum size of data allocated to the sdata or sbss section Specification format Interpretation when omitted All data is allocated to the sdata section or sbss section However static variables with a const modifier are allocated to the const section Detailed description This option allocates data of less than num bytes to the sdata or sbss section Data specified the sdata or sbss section by the pragma section directive is allocated to that section regardless of the size This option is not applicable for arrays of incomplete types arrays whose size is indeterminate within the file Specify 0 to 65535 as num An abort error will occur if a value outside the range is specified An error will occur if num is omitted The yardstick for the value to be specified as num can be output by the Xsdata_info option If a different option is specified for each file a code of a different method of placing and referencing variables may be generated and an error or warning may be output during linking This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Size threshold of sdata sbss section allocation Bytes in the Output Code category Example of use To allocate data of less than 16 bytes to the sdata or sbss section describe as gt cx CF3746 Xsdata 16 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 359 of
2. Compile strictly Select whether to process as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard according to ANSI and output an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard Standards This corresponds to the Xansi option of the cx command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xansi Processes as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard and outputs an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard No Compatibility with the conventional C language specifications is conferred and processing continues after warning is output R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 207 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Character Encoding The detailed information on character encoding is displayed and the configuration can be changed Character encoding Select the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the source file This corresponds to the Xcharacter_set option of the cx command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction SJIS None Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS EUC Xcharacter_set euc_jp Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as EUC UF T 8 Xcharacter_set utf8 Interprets the Japanese
3. Description of each category 1 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output ROMized load Select whether to module file This corresponds output the ROMized load module file to the Xno_romize option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Outputs the ROMized load module file No Xno_romize Does not output the ROMized load module file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 184 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output Non ROMized Select whether to output the load module file before ROMization processing load module file This corresponds to the Xlink output option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output ROMized load module file property is selected Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Outputs the load module file before ROMization process ing The file is output under the file name specified in the Out put file name property in the Output File category from the Link Options tab with string NonROMize added Does not output the load module file before ROMization processing 2 Input File The detailed information on input files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Use standard Select whether to use the standard ROMization area reservation code file rompcrt
4. R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 272 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Build Debug category Use this category to configure general setting relating to building and debugging Figure A 41 Option Dialog Box General Build Debug Category LL General Startup and E sit Display General Build Debug Hel ee Enable Rapid Build Font and Color External Tools When preserving an edited source file when the rapid build was made effective a build begins a build and is performed concurrently with edit lien Gy pene When doing a rapid build ll recommend to preserve a 0 Others it briskly by Ctrl S after edit of one file User Information 2 Observe registered files changing 3 gt Enable Break Sound 4 lnitialize Settings Function buttons Initialize All Settings Cancel Apply The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Enable Rapid Build Enables the rapid build N feature default B Does not use the rapid build feature Note This feature automatically begins a build when the source file being edited is saved Enabling this feature makes it possible to perform builds while editing source files If this feature is used we recommend saving frequently after e
5. Xsfg_size_tidata This option specifies the size of tidata section Specification format Xsfg size tidata num Interpretation when omitted The frequency of variable use is calculated limiting the size of variables allocated to the tidata section to 128 bytes Detailed description This option calculates the frequency of variable use limiting the size of variables allocated to the tidata section to num bytes Specify 0 to 256 as num An error will occur if a value outside the range is specified An error will occur if num is omitted The tidata section is 256 bytes by default It is internally divided into the tidata byte section maximum 128 bytes by default and tidata word section tidata section tidata byte section tidata word section Variables are selected until the total size of the tidata byte and tidata word sections reaches 256 bytes However the selection is stopped when the size of the tidata byte section reaches the specified size or 256 bytes If the value smaller than the size of the tidata byte section it is assumed that the tidata and tidata byte sections have the same size Therefore the size of the tidata word section in this case is 0 This option is valid only when the Xsfg_opt option is specified If the Xsfg_opt option is not specified this option will be ignored This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Si
6. 2 Folder location area Select the folder to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from The folder selected by default differs depending on the area that this dialog box is called from a Add File dialog box The folder has been set to the area that this dialog box is called from is selected When the area has been blank or the path which does not exist has been set the project folder is selected by default b Path Edit dialog box and Property panel The project folder is selected Function buttons Make New Folder Creates a new folder directly below the root of the selected folder The default folder name is New Folder Sets the designated folder path to the area that this dialog box is called from Closes this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 278 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the boot area load module file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 44 Specify Boot Area Load Module File Dialog Box Specify Boot Area Load Module File 0 Look ir 20 D m My Recent Documents 4 th ttetrort les of type Boot area load module file Inf we Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the follo
7. R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 149 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before build processing before build processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before build processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Specify the command to be executed after build processing Commands executed after build processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after build pro
8. R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 338 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xchar This option specifies signed for char type Specification format Xchar string Interpretation when omitted To handle char type that does not have signed as signed describe as Detailed description This option specifies whether char type that does not have signed is handled as signed or unsigned The items that can be specified as string are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified An error will occur if string is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Sign of char in the C Language category Example of use To handle char type that does not have signed as signed describe as gt cx CF3746 Xchar sSigned main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 339 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xenum_type This option specifies which integer type the enumeration type handles Specification format Xenum_type string Interpretation when omitted The enumeration type is handled as signed int Detailed description This option specifies which integer type the enumeration type handles The items that can be specified as string are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified au
9. The output file is not generated The excess of the size is output to the standard error output This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Force linking against error in the Others category Example of use To output a warning and continue link processing when the internal ROM RAM overflows describe as scx CF3746 xXtorce Jaink main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 462 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Entry point address specification The entry point address specification option is as follows Xentry_address Xentry_address This option specifies the entry point address Specification format Xentry_address symbol Interpretation when omitted The entry point address value for the load module file to be generated is determined according to the following rules If symbol __ start exists it is used If start does not exist the start address of the text attribute section that is allocated to the lowest address area in the load module file to be generated is used If the text attribute section does not exist 0 is used Detailed description This option regards the value of symbol symbol as the entry point address value it is used when hex conversion is performed for the load module file to be generated An error will occur if symbol does not exist An error wi
10. pragma interrupt interrupt request name function name allocation method interrupt interrupt function derfinition ce __ interrupt function derfinition After conversion for CX L pragma interrupt interrupt request name function name allocation method Function definition PAR pragma interrupt interrupt request name function name allocation method multi Function definition ots pragma interrupt NO VECT function name Function definition Note that with CA850 the user needed to code an ei instruction inside multiplex interrupt functions but CX now automatically generates an ei instruction in the function prologue This must be changed manually by the user Additionally in define statements interrupt and multi_interrupt in macro definitions cannot be converted so the user must do this manually k RTOS supported functions No conversion is performed because CA850 and CX use the same RTOS supported function format R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 565 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE l Coding format using embedded function instructions No conversion is performed because CA850 and CX embedded function instructions are upward compatible m Structure packing function No conversion is performed because CA850 and CX use the same structure packing function format n Calls to __rcopy function The ROMization processing of CA850 and CX differs For thi
11. If file is omitted the file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the load module file name with the extension replaced by map The link map file to be output differs depending on whether the Xno_romize option is specified as follows When the Xno_romize option is specified The link map file is output after link processing When the Xno_romize option is not specified The link map file is output after ROMization processing Example of use To output link map file smp1 map after link processing describe as gt cx CF3746 Xmap smp map main c Xno_romize To output link map file smp2 map after ROMization processing describe as gt cx CF3746 Xmap smp map main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 373 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xentry_address This option specifies the entry point address Specification format Xentry_ address symbol Interpretation when omitted The entry point address value for the load module file to be generated is determined according to the following rules If symbol __ start exists it is used If start does not exist the start address of the text attribute section that is allocated to the lowest address area in the load module file to be generated is used If the text attribute section does not exist 0 is used Detailed description This option regards the value of
12. B sample Projecti a TE uPD7OF 3506 E Build sample inl Rebuild sample Pin Configur Code Genere al Clean sample 4 C4850 Build 2s YES0E2M Sin St Open Folder with Explorer a Program Ane k Add y OB Frogram G File Save Project and CubeSuite as Package Rename Property Remark Ifthe build of the included source file is not run after editing the header file and running the build update the file dependencies see 2 3 8 Update file dependencies R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 77 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 2 Runa build of all files A build of all build target files is run hereafter referred to as rebuild The cross reference file is deleted Running a rebuild is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project See 2 15 4 Change the file build target project 1 When running a rebuild of the entire project Click on the toolbar 2 When running a rebuild of the active project Select the project and then select Rebuild active project from the context menu Figure 2 103 Rebuild active project Item al E sample Project gs JPE uPDFOFS50 Build sample A Fin Contig Cit rebuild sone Code Genera e CoE 4 C4850 Build ce VESOEZM 5i Open Folder with Explorer a Program Ana IHF OB Program a l File hi FE Save Project and CubeSuite as Package Add Ei ak Rename 2 16
13. CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 3 Link options The types and explanations for options of the link phase are shown below Table B 6 Link Options Version help display This option displays the version information of the cx specification P This option displays the descriptions of the cx options Output file This option specifies the output file name specification SS P Xtemp_path This option specifies the temporary folder Source debugging control pp This option specifies the library file to be used during linking Link directive file Xlink_directive This option specifies the link directive file specification Force linking to Xforce_link This option continues link processing when the internal ROM RAM continue overflows Entry point address Xentry_address This option specifies the entry point address specification This option outputs information for source debugging Library link control Link map file output This option outputs the link map file specification Generating object Xrelinkable_ object This option generates the relocatable object module file module file control Control checking for This option checks whether the specified register mode is mixed mixing register rae l i p Xregmode_info This option outputs detailed information when different register modes are mixed Specify checking for Xcommon This option checks for mixing of the device common object
14. CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 6 Specifying multiple options This section describes the operation when two or more options are specified at the same time a Priority The following options disable other options All options will be invalid Since execution is terminated at preprocessing options related to the following processing will be invalid S Since execution is terminated at code generation processing options related to the following processing will be invalid Since execution is terminated at assemble processing options related to the following processing will be invalid If an item other than table is specified as the parameter the Xword_case option will be invalid Xhex_only Options other than Hex output options will be invalid Among hex output options Xhex will be invalid If T is specified as the parameter the Xhex_fill option will be invalid The Xhex_section Xhex_symtab and Xhex_null options will be invalid If options are specified by the following combinations the option specified last will be valid with displaying a warning P S c D U When their symbol names are same Onothing Odefault Osize Ospeed Xstartup Xno_startup Depending on the order of specified options the following options will be invalid Oitem that is specified before Onothing Odefault or Osize OitemN or Xpro_epi_runtime that is specified befo
15. EL Code Generator Design Tool AS CX Build Tool che VESOE2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool jh File H Startup c_ Hash c die jink_Flash dir Page 59 of 577 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Set the build options for the flash area project Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel The settings for the build options are made in the Flash Correspondence category Select Yes in the Use boot flash re linking property The Load module file type property and Branch table address property will be displayed Figure 2 75 Flash Correspondence Category in Flash Area 2E bo Tes hl Load module file type Flash area load module file 4flash Boot area load module file name _boottDefaultbuildtboot_NonKOMize imf Branch table address Hex 200000 Select Flash area load module file Xflash in the Load module file type property The Boot area load module file name property will be displayed Specify the load module file for the boot area Caution Specify the load module file before ROMization processing in this property An error will occur if the load module file after ROMization processing is specified Specify the start address of the branch table same as the address specified in the boot area project in the B
16. How to open Description of each area Function buttons R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 241 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile cat egory Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category and Additional library paths in the Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Compile Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category and Far Jump file names in the Output Code category From the Assemble Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Link Options tab Additional library paths in the Library category From the Individual Compile Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category Description of each area 1 Path edit area Edit or add the path or file name including the path a Path One path per one line Edit or add the path or file name including the path by directly entering it The path or file name including the path can be designated in multiple lines Designate the path or file name including the path at a line By de
17. JP uPDFOFS515 Microcontroller A CX Build Tool ae Y8S0E2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a Q File H Startup el common c c_ corel c c_ core2 c aam stackPE1 asm asm stackPE2 asm dir multi dir Remark To use other than the standard startup routine add the file to the Startup node see 2 3 1 Set a startup routine 3 Set build options Select each core file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel Select the corresponding core number Core n Xmulti pen in the Target core number property in the Multi Core category n number of cores on the target CPU Figure 2 82 Target core number Property The icon of the file specifying the core number changes to an icon with the core number added R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 65 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 83 Project for Multi Core After Setting Build Options Project Tree s amp MultiCore Project FE uPO7OF3515 Microcontroller A CX Build Tool es YESOEZM Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool 5 A File si Startup cH core cC all stackPE1 asm all stackPE2 asm dit retinal 4 Run a build of the project Run a build to generate the load module file for multi core Figure 2 84 Project for Multi Core After Running Build Project Tree UPD7OF 3515 Microcontrollers A CX Buil
18. ROMize Options tab 184 Q q Create library key 541 R r Create library key 542 r Source convert option 561 ra Create library key 543 Rapid build 75 78 Rebuild 75 78 ru Create library key 544 Runa build 75 S S Compile option 330 Save As dialog box 285 Segment Select dialog box 259 Set assemble options 43 Set compile options 38 Set create library options 53 Set hex output options 50 Set link options 46 Set ROMize options 48 Simultaneous build 81 Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box 279 Specify Far Jump File dialog box 281 Specify ROMization Area Reservation Code File dialog box 283 Symbol information file 97 511 System Include Path Order dialog box 244 T t Create library key 545 t Source convert option 562 Tag jump 231 Page 571 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX C INDEX Text Edit dialog box 239 U U Assemble option 437 U Compile option 333 V V Assemble option 426 V Compile option 314 V Create library key 536 v Create library option 548 V Link option 451 V Source convert option 556 X x Create library key 546 Xalign_fill Compile option 383 Xalign_fill Link option 475 Xansi Compile option 337 Xasm_far_jump Assemble option 441 Xasm_far_jump Compi
19. This option deletes the assembler symbol definition by the D option Specification format Uname name Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option deletes the definition of assembler symbol name by the D option An error will occur if name is omitted This option cannot delete the definition by describing SET name def This option can be specified more than once This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Macro undefinition in the Preprocess category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Macro undefinition in the Preprocess category Example of use To delete the definition of assembler symbol test by the D option describe as gt cx CF3746 Utest main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 437 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE This option specifies the folder to search include files Specification format Ipath path Interpretation when omitted The include file is searched from the standard include file folder Detailed description This option specifies the folder to search include files that are read by assembler control instruction INCLUDE BINCLUDE as path Include files are searched according to the following sequence 1 Path specified by the I option 2 Folder with source file 3 Folder of original C source
20. Up to 256 items can be specified Output folder Specify the folder which the load module to be generated is output If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the o option of the cx command Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 247 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 142 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output file name Specify the file name of the load module to be generated The extension other than Imf cannot be specified If the extension is omitted Imf is automatically added If the target is a multi core CPU the load module for the common module and the load module for core n are generated and the final load module is then generated based on those n number of cores of the target CPU Load module for the common module input string without the extension _cmn mf Load module for the core n input string withou
21. Xsymbol_file Xsymbol_ file This option uses a symbol information file Specification format Xsymbol file file Interpretation when omitted A symbol information file is not read Detailed description This option reads symbol information file file describing the variable allocation section and uses the information while compiling See B 1 4 Symbol information file for details An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Using symbol information file in the Symbol Information category Example of use To read symbol information file symbol and use the information while compiling describe as gt cx CF3746 Xsymbol file symbol sfg main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 342 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Japanese Chinese character control The Japanese Chinese character control option is as follows Xcharacter_set Xcharacter_set This option specifies the Japanese Chinese character code Specification format Xcharacter_ set code Interpretation when omitted The Japanese character code is handled as SuJIS Detailed description This option specifies the character code to be used for Japanese Chinese comments and character strings in the source file The items that ca
22. lt xAvomize check off Xhex lt Xhex only Xhex format Xhex fill Xhex section Xhex block size Xh hex offset Khex null xXhex symtab Xhex rom less To generate library files for each of the subprograms specify this option at the same time as the c option and create an object module file Caution Do not create a library file for object module files created with different Xmulti options specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Build Settings tab Target core number in the Multi Core category Example of use To generate a program for core 1 describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 407 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xmulti_link This option specifies the linking of multi core subprograms Specification format Interpretation when omitted It will not be treated the linking of multi core subprograms Detailed description This option links each generated subprograms when generating a multi core program When this option is specified each subprogram library file and object module file are input the addresses between the subprogram are resolved and the multi core program is generated At this time the startup routine and libraries supporting multi core will be linked Additionally ROMization processing and generation of a hex file will be performed at the same time An
23. txt is displayed by default Remark If any extension is not designated the one selected in the File type area will be added Also if the extension different from the one selected in the File type area is designated the one selected in the File type area will be added for example if you designate aaa txt as the file name and select C source file c as the file type the file is named as aaa txt c 3 File location area Designate the location to be created the file by directly entering its path or selecting from the Refer button The path of the project folder is displayed by default a Button Refer Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box If a folder is selected the path will be added in the text box Remarks 1 If the text box is blank it is assumed that the project folder is designated 2 Ifthe relative path is designated the reference point of the path is the project folder Remark Up to 259 characters path and file name combined can be specified in the File name area and File loca tion area When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown on the File name area in the tooltip The file name including the path is too long Make it The file name with the path is more than 259 characters within 259 characters The specified path contains a folder that does not exist The path contains a folder that does not exist The file name or path name is invalid
24. 399 Xhex_fill Hex output option 502 Xhex_format Compile option 398 Xhex_format Hex output option 501 Xhex_null Compile option 403 Xhex_null Hex output option 506 Xhex_only Compile option 397 Xhex_only Hex output option 500 Xhex_rom_less Compile option 405 Xhex_rom_less Hex output option 508 Xhex_section Compile option 400 Xhex_section Hex output option 503 Xignore_address_ error Compile option 380 Xignore_address _ error Link option 471 Xinline_strcpy Compile option 348 Xkeep_access_size Compile option 324 Xlink_check_off Compile option 382 Xlink_check_off Link option 473 Xlink_directive Compile option 372 Xlink_directive Link option 461 Xlink_option Link option 488 Xlink_output Compile option 322 Xlink_output Link option 481 Xlk_option Compile option 423 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 572 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX C INDEX Xmap Compile option 373 Xmap Link option 464 Xmulti Assemble option 443 Xmulti Compile option 406 Xmulti Link option 482 Xmulti_link Compile option 408 Xmulti_link Link option 484 Xmultiple_symbol Compile option 381 Xmultiple_symbol Link option 472 Xno_cube_suite_info Compile option 411 Xno_romize Compile option 389 Xno_romize R
25. 4 global_ const int module xx1_ symbol 5 5 6 4 11 func static UL 12 5 13 4 14 D develop tp xx 2 c 15 sub2 7 file static int module xx2 8 5 9 4 10 D develop tp xx 2 c AL tune static UL 12 4 113 4 A14 tp yor 1c 15 main 7 file static int module xxl1 8 4 9 4 10 tp xx_1 c 4 global_ const int module xx2_ symbol 5 4 6 4 7 static module xxl symbol 8 1 9 2 10 tp xx 1 6 4 si_ data 5 1 6 4 4 si_bss 5 1 6 4 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 97 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 4 se data 5 1 6 4 4 se bss 5 1 6 4 4 struct_xx2_sub2 5S 1 6 24 11 func static unused UC 12 0 13 4 14 D develop tp xx 2 c 15 sub2 4 struct_xx2 unused 5 0 6 24 4 global_ const int module xxl1_unusedsymbol 5 0 6 4 3 sidata Size_32512bytes 3 sedata Size_32768bytes 3 sdata Size_65536bytes 16 Function Information 2 FunctionName StartAddress FunctionByteSize ReferenceCount StackByteSize FileName 17 subl 18 0200000210 19 24 120 2 21 0 a2a tep xx iLe 17 sub2 18 0x00000080 19 174 20 2 121 0 122 De Ep xx 2 0 17 untisedfiunc2 18 0X0000012E 19 12 120 0 21 0 22 Dz tp xx 2 0 17 main 18 0x0000013A 19 214 120 0 21 0 22 ACD Vac 17 unusedfuncl 18 0x00000228 119 12 120 0 21 0 422 tp sx_1 c I
26. Add New Category Adds a category node directly below the File node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Set selected project as Active Sets the selected project to the active project Project Save Project and CubeSuite as Saves a set of the CubeSuite and the project by copying them in a folder Package This menu le abaya ceabod Rename You can rename the selected project Property Displays the selected project s property on the Property panel R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 127 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 When the Subproject node is selected Build active project Runs a build of the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Runs a rebuild of the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Runs a clean of the active project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the subproject file of the selected subproject with Explorer Displays the cascading menu to add subprojec
27. C OD D me o lt S C D CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Integrated Development Environment User s Manual Build for CX Compiler Target Device V850 Microcontroller All information contained in these materials including products and product specifications represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corp without notice Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corp through various means including the Renesas Electronics Corp website http www renesas com Renesas Electronics www renesas com Rev 1 00 Oct2010 8 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is
28. Default Segment name number of set items How to change Edit by the Segment Select dialog box which appears when clicking the button Function buttons Symbol Toggles the Symbol list area and Symbol detail area between visible and hidden Generate A link directive file named project name dir is generated based on the specified memory segments sections and symbol allocation information and then added to the project The link directive file is generated in the project folder The link directive file that has been generated is also shown on the project tree under the File node The generated link directive file will be a build target If a link directive file has already been registered to the project then the file will be removed from the build target Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 256 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Object File Select dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the object file among object files and library files added to the project and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 32 Object File Select Dialog Box Object File Select Object tile list Object File Section man obi const data _ crte obij bss slshem obi Const uzer lib Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function bu
29. Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information Select whether to generate the debug information It is possible to perform source debugging with the debugger by outputting information for source debugging to the output file This corresponds to the g option of the cx command Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes g Generates the debug information Does not generate the debug information 2 Preprocess The detailed information on preprocessing is displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during assembling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder The specified include path is searched with higher priority than the standard include file folder of CX The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CX is searched This cor
30. Enter the macro definition in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line You can specify up to 256 characters per line up to 256 lines The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value If you click the OK button the entered macro definitions are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 41 Macro definition Property After Setting Macros E Preprocess Additional include paths mill Ta Lie i LAT Macro definitron TEST 1 TIME 10 Macro undehritionl U To change the macro definitions you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Macro definition property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 5 Reduce the code size perform prologue epilogue runtime calls It is possible to reduce the code size by performing a part of prologue epilogue processing of the function based on runtime library function calls Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To perform prologue epilogue processing of the function based on runtime library function calls select Yes in the Use prologue epilogue library property in the Output Code category Figure 2 42 Use prologue epilogue library Property El Optimization D etads Sort external var
31. Select whether to check the peripheral allocation error of the internal ROM for the rompsec section and duplicate addresses of the input file and output file This corresponds to the Xromize_check_off option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Ignore all Xromize_check_off rom_less a ddress Yes Ignore location error around internal ROM Xromize_check_off rom_less Yes Ignore overlapping address Xromize_check_off address Does not check the peripheral allocation error of the internal ROM and duplicate addresses Does not check the peripheral allocation error of the internal ROM for the rompsec section Specify this item when the ROM less mode is used Does not check the duplicate addresses of the input file and output file Checks the peripheral allocation error of the internal ROM and duplicate addresses R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 187 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Hex Output Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the Hex output phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Output File 2 Hex Format 3 Symbol Table Others 3 4 i S A NAN Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure A 9 Property Panel Hex Output Options Tab Property A Le Property El Output File Output folder for hes
32. Specification format Xlank direclive file Interpretation when omitted The default link directive file is used Detailed description This option performs linking according to the link directive in link directive file file dir is recommended as the extension of file An error will occur if file is omitted If this option is specified more than once the option specified last will be valid and the option specified first will be ignored See CubeSuite Coding for CX Compiler for details about the link directive file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Using link directive file in the Input File category Example of use To perform linking according to the link directive in link directive file link dir describe as Sox CF2746 Xlink directive lank diry Main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 461 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Force linking to continue The option forces linking to continue is as follows Xforce_link Xforce_link This option continues link processing when the internal ROM RAM overflows Specification format Interpretation when omitted An error is output and link processing is completed when the internal ROM RAM overflows Detailed description This option outputs a warning and continues link processing when the internal ROM RAM overflows
33. The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Build Mode Settings Description of each area 1 Selected build mode area This area displays the build mode selected in the Build mode list area a Button Apply to All Set the build mode of the main project and all subprojects of the currently opened project to the currently displayed build mode 2 Build mode list area This area displays all build modes that exist in the currently opening project main project and subproject in a list The current build modes of all projects are same the build mode is selected by default If they are not same DefaultBuild will be selected The build mode that exists only in part of the main project and subproject is shown with the mark Note that the DefaultBuild is the default build mode and is always displayed at the top R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 265 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Button Duplicate Duplicates the selected build mode The Character String Input dialog box opens And the build mode is duplicated with the name entered in the dialog box and added to the main project and all the subprojects in the currently opening project When the build mode with mark does not exist in the main project or subproject and duplicate the build mode
34. This menu is always disabled You can rename the selected subproject Property Displays the selected subproject s property on the Property panel 3 When the Build tool node is selected Build Project Runs a build the selected project main project or subproject A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Runs a rebuild the selected project main project or subproject A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 128 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Clean Project Runs a clean of the selected project main project or subproject A clean ofa subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Set to Default Build Option for Sets the current build options as the standard for the project When a subproject is Project added its setting is not made When the build option that is different from the standard option is set its property is displayed in boldface Set Link Order Opens the Link Order dialog box to display object module files and library files to and set their link orders Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Output Makefile Informat
35. To perform inline expansion of standard library functions strcpy strcmp memcpy and memset calls describe as scx CF3746 Xinline_strcpy main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 348 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xpro_epi_runtime This option specifies whether or not to perform prologue epilogue processing of the function through runtime library Calls Specification format Xpro_epi_ runtime on off Interpretation when omitted Prologue epilogue processing of the function through runtime library calls is performed However processing through runtime library calls is not performed when the Ospeed option is specified Detailed description This option specifies whether or not to perform prologue epilogue processing of the function through runtime library calls If on is specified prologue epilogue processing of the function is performed through runtime library calls If on or off is omitted it is assumed that on has been specified An abort error will occur if other than on or off is specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Use prologue epilogue library in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Use prologue epilogue library in the Optimization Details category Example of use To perform prologue e
36. c C source file Header file h inc Header file Assemble file asm s Assembler source file Link directive file dir dr Link directive file Symbol information file sfg Symbol information file Library file lib a Library file Object module file obj o Object module file Text file txt Text format All Files All the formats default Function buttons Button Function Open Adds the designated file to the project Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 276 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select the folder and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 43 Browse For Folder Dialog Box Browse For Folder 1 Select the Folder to add File Desktop My Documents ry My Computer l l l i a My Network Places o Recycle Bin Unused Desktop Shorkcuts 2 E work gt sample Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Add File dialog box click the Refer button in the File location area Inthe Path Edit dialog box click the Browse button in the path edit area On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab In
37. is selected in the Output code of switch statement property and the cx command automatically selects if else Xswitch ifelse or Binary search Xswitch binary the setting of this property will be disabled set to 2 bytes Default 2 bytes None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction 2 bytes None Generates one 2 byte branch table per case label in a switch statement 4 bytes Xword_case Generates one 4 byte branch table per case label in a switch statement Select this item when a compile error occurs because the switch statement is long R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 159 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Size threshold of sdata Specify the upper limit size of the data length allocated to the sdata sbss sections sbss section Data specified the sdata or sbss section by the pragma section directive is allocated to that allocation Bytes section regardless of the size This corresponds to the Xsdata option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box 0 to 65535 decimal number Specify the upper limit size bytes for allocating const attribute data and character string literals to the const section Size threshold of sconst section allocation Bytes This corresponds to the Xsconst option of the cx command Default 32767 How to change Directly enter in the text box 0 to 32767 decimal number S
38. jr _int_flash0 handler body public int flasho _int_flash0 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 524 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE g Method for manipulating The method for manipulating on the command line is shown below Remark See 2 12 Prepare for Implementing Boot Flash Relink Function for the method manipulating in CubeSuite lt 1 gt Generate the load module file for the boot area Create startup routine for the boot area cstartN_b obj gt cx CF3746 cstartN b asm Link startup routine cstartN_b obj and link directive file directive _b dir to generate load module file for the boot area boot Imf The start address of the branch table for the flash area is regarded as 0x300 ROMization processing is also performed by default SOx CF3746 Xstartup cstartN b obj boot asm Xlink output boot lmf Xflash_ext_table 0x300 Xlink directive directive b dir oromp_b 1lmf If ROMization processing is not performed specify as follows scx CF3746 Xstartup cstartn b obj boot asm xno romize oboot lmf Xflash ext_table 0x300 Xlink_directive directive_b dir lt 2 gt Generate the load module file for the flash area Create startup routine for the flash area cstartN_f obj gt cx CF3746 cstartN f asm Link startup routine cstartN_f obj and link directive file directive_f dir to generate load module file for the flash area flash Imf At this time
39. mixing of device module file to be generated and the device specified by the C common objects option sdata sbss Xsdata_info This option outputs information that can be used as a yardstick for information output the parameter of the Xsdata option to the standard output specification 2 pass mode link Xtwo_pass_link This option performs linking in the 2 pass mode specification Relocation Xignore_address_error This option continues link processing if an illegality is found during resolution error relocation processing when linking processing control Symbol multiple Xmultiple_ symbol This option outputs an error message for all multi defined external definition error symbols output specification R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 449 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link time check Xlink_check_off This option suppresses checking when linking suppress specification Filling value Xalign_fill This option specifies the filling value of align holes specification Library file rescan Xrescan This option rescans the library file specified by the I option specification Debug information Xstrip This option generates the load module file from which the debug section output information line number information and global pointer table have suppress been removed specification Boot flash re link Xflash_ext_table This option specifies the start address value of the bran
40. Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Error message file name Specify the error message file name The extension can be freely specified The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName err has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected Default ProjectName err How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 259 characters 10 Warning Message The detailed information on warning messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed Displayed warning Specify the warning message number to be displayed regardless of the warning level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 02042 02107 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 02222 02554 02699 02782 If the same number is specified in the Undisplayed warning message property and this property the number specified in this property takes precedence This corresponds to the Xwarning option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character St
41. Files which have different types C source file and assembler source file or object module file and the like can be mixed Therefore two or more files with the same name even if they are in different folders cannot be specified When two or more files are specified even if there is an error in one file processing of the remaining files will continue if processing is possible The generated object module file is not deleted after linking R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 306 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 The examples of operations on the command line are shown below Remark See B 1 3 Option for details about each option a b c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 307 of 577 Performing all phases from compilation to linking at once lt 1 gt file1 c file2 asm and file3 obj are read and then load module file a lmf is generated Hex file a hex is also generated gt cx CF3746 filel c file2 asm file3 obj Performing phases from compilation to assembly and linking separately lt 1 gt file1 c and file2 asm are read and then object module file file1 obj and file2 obj are generated gt cx CF3746 c filel c file2 asm lt 2 gt file1 obj file2 obj and file3 obj are linked and then load module file a lmf is generated Hex file a hex is also generated gt cx CF3746 filel obj file2 obj file3 obj Performing compilation assembly and
42. How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node and then select Output Makefile Information File from the context menu Description of each area 1 Save in area Specify the folder for outputting the Makefile information file The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Save in and Save as type R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 263 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Specify the Makefile information file name to be output Makefile txt is displayed by default 4 Save as type area Designate the type of the Makefile information file to be output Text file txt Text format default All files All the formats Function buttons Saves the Makefile information file as the designated name R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 264 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Figure A 36 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode i 1 BuildModez Apply to sll Build mode list DefaultB uild BuildMode L Function buttons
43. Object File Select dialog box This dialog box is used to select the object file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Segment Select dialog box This dialog box is used to select the segment and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Link Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer files to be input to the linker and configure these link orders Output Makefile Information File dialog box This dialog box is used to output a text file described information for creat ing a Makefile Build Mode Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to add and delete build modes and configure the current build mode in batch Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to do build rebuild and clean process in batch with the build mode that the project has Go to the Location dialog box This dialog box is used to move the caret to the designated location Progress Status dialog box This dialog box is used to show how the process has been progressed Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment Add Existing File dialog box This dialog box is used to select existing files to add to the project R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 114 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Window Panel Dialog Box Name Function Description Browse For Folder dialog box This dialog box is used to select the folder and set it to the area that t
44. Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 202 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Level of optimization Select the level of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the O option of the cx command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Default Performs optimization that debugging is not affected Optimization optimization of expressions and register allocation and Odefault the like Code Size Performs optimization with the object size precedence Precedence Regards reducing the ROM RAM capacity as important Osize and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Speed Performs optimization with the execution speed Precedence precedence Ospeed Regards shortening the execution speed as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Debug Performs optimization with the debug precedence Precedence Regards debugging as important and suppresses alll Onothing optimization including default optimization Detail Setting The properties are added in the Optimization Details category The optimization items selected in the category has the precedence for the optimization 3 Optimization Details The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Maximum number of Specify the maximum number of times to expand the l
45. Outputs the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file No Does not output the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file 9 Symbol Information The detailed information on the symbol information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Using symbol Select the name of the symbol information file to be used during a build information file The effective symbol information file to be added to the project is searched and used This corresponds to the Xsymbol_ file option of the cx command Default The name of the symbol information file that is added to the project How to change Changes not allowed 10 Assemble List The detailed information on the assemble list is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 162 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the Xprn_path option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xprn_path Outputs the assemble list file Does not output the assemble list file Output folder for Specify the folder which the assemble list file is output assemble list file The assemble list file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn If a relative path is specified the reference point of the p
46. ROMize Options tab Hex output phase Hex Output Options tab Create library phase Create Library Options tab 2 11 2 Set build options at the file level You can individually set compile and assemble options for each source file added to the project 1 When setting compile options for a C source file Select the C source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel Select Yes in the Set individual compile option property in the Build category The Figure 2 65 Message Dialog Box will open Figure 2 64 Set individual compile option Property El Build Figure 2 65 Message Dialog Box Question Q0 703001 Are You sure you want to set the curent compile options to the individual compile options Click Yes in the dialog box The Individual Compile Options tab will be displayed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 54 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 66 Property Panel Individual Compile Options Tab Property c_ main c Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information El Optimization Level of optimization El Optimization D etads Sort external variables Perform inline expansion of strcpy strempy memcpy memset Use prologueepilogue library Prohibit the operation that changes memory access size Perform inline expansion of library Yes g Default Optimization O default No No Yeg No Yeg Prepro
47. Size of sidata section Specify the upper size variables allocated to the sidata section This corresponds to the Xsfg_size_sidata option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xsfg_opt in the Output optimized allocation information property is selected Default 32512 decimal number How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 0 to 32512 decimal number Size of sedata section Specify the upper size variables allocated to the sedata section This corresponds to the Xsig_size_sedata option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xsfg_opt in the Output optimized allocation information property is selected Default 32768 decimal number How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction O to 32768 decimal number R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 178 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Size of sdata section Specify the upper size variables allocated to the sdata section This corresponds to the Xsfg_size_sdata option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xsfg_opt in the Output optimized allocation information property is selected Default 65536 decimal number How to change Directly enter in the text box 0 to 65536 decimal number 7 Others Other detailed information on linking is displayed and the configuration can be changed Entry sy
48. The contents of the output file can be controlled by specifying the Xpreprocess option If this option and the Xchar option are specified at the same time the Xchar option will be invalid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output preprocessed source file in the Output File category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output preprocessed source file in the Output File category Example of use To execute only preprocessing for the input file and output the results to file main i describe as gt cx CF3746 P main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 329 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE S This option does not execute processing after assembling Specification format Interpretation when omitted Processing is continued after assembling Detailed description This option does not execute processing after assembling The assembler source file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by asm The output file name can be specified by specifying this option and the o option Example of use To output assembler source file main asm without executing any processing after the assembling describe as gt cx CF3746 S main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 330 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFER
49. The following The file name with the invalid path is designated characters cannot be used lt gt The following characters cannot be used for the file name and folder name 2 lt gt Function buttons Creates the file with the entered file name adds it to the project and opens with the Editor panel And then closes this dialog box Does not create a file and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 234 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Folder And File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project The folder is added as a category Figure A 24 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file c Header file h 1ric Assemble file asm s Link directive file dir dr Symbol mtormation file stg Library file lib a Object module file obj o 1 Text file txt 2 Subfalder level to search AE The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it on the Project Tree panel Description of each area 1 File type area Select the type of the file to be added to the project You can
50. This dialog box is used to show how the process has been progressed when the time consuming process is taken place This dialog box automatically closes when the process in progress Is done Figure A 39 Progress Status Dialog Box Progress Status Loading project 1 i J 2 BERR RRR R RRR RRR RR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open This dialog box automatically opens when a message is output while the time consuming process is in progress Description of each area 1 Message display area This area displays messages output while process is in progress edit not allowed 2 Progress bar The progress bar shows the current progress of the process in progress with the bar length When the process is 100 done the bar gets to the right end this dialog box automatically closed Function buttons Cancel Cancels the process in progress and closes this dialog box Note that this button will be disabled if the process termination is impossible R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 270 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Option dialog box This dialog box is used to configure the CubeSuite environment All settings made via this dialog box are saved as preferences for the current user Figure A 40 Option Dialog Box a St
51. This is created by the user Preprocessed file jNote 1 File which the execution result of preprocessing for the input file is output This is an ASCII image file This file is output when the P option is specified Assembler source file Assembly language file which generated from C source file by compilation Source file which described in assembly language This is created by the user Header file free File which is referred by source files This file is described in C language or assembly language This is created by the user The extension is free but the following is recommended include directive h include control instruction inc Note2 sfghole IO File which specifies the section to which a variable defined in the C source file is allocated Symbol information file This file is output when the Xsfg option is specified Object module file objNote 1 I O ELF format file including machine language information relocation information relating to machine language allocation addresses and symbol information Note 2 prnNote 1 Assemble list file List file which has information of the assemble result This file is output when the Xprn_path option is specified Link directive file free File which memory map information when linking is described This is created by the user The extension is free but dir is recommended Library file Load module file mfNote 1 I O ELF format f
52. describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex only sample hex a lmf R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 397 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_ format This option specifies the format of the hex file to be output Specification format Xhex format format Interpretation when omitted The format of the hex file to be output is regarded as the Intel expanded hex format 32 bit address It is the same result as when the Xhex_format i option is specified Detailed description This option specifies the format of the hex file to be output The items that can be specified as format are shown below Intel expanded hex format up to 1 MB Intel expanded hex format 32 bit address up to 4 GB Motorola S type hex format 32 bit address up to 4 GB Motorola S type hex format standard address up to 16 MB Expanded Tektronix hex format up to 4 GB An error will occur if format is omitted Example of use To regard the format of the hex file to be output as the Motorola S type hex format standard address describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex format S main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 398 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_fill This option specifies fill processing of the hex file Specification format Xhex fill Xhex fill value Xhex fill value start size Xhex fill st
53. gt CX CF3746 Xword switch main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 354 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xr This option specifies the register that external variables are allocated Specification format Xrnum sym Interpretation when omitted Variables are allocated to registers optimally in the whole program Detailed description This option allocates external variable sym to register rnum Specify the register that is vacated by specifying the Xreg_mode option as num The items that can be specified as num are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified Register Mode Register That Can Be Specified num Working Registers Registers for Register Variables 15 to 19 20 to 24 32 Specify the external variable name variable name is described in C language as sym A volatile variable variable using address operator aggregate array variable having internal linkage and peripheral I O register cannot be specified An abort error will occur if these variables are specified If sym does not exist it will be ignored An error will occur if num or sym is omitted This option can be specified for the external variable with the size of 8 bytes In this case only an even number can be specified as num An error will occur if an odd number is specified If the default value is set when declaring sym rnum is not initialized a
54. macro EDOM will not be set in global variable errno Error processing function matherrf matherr will not be enabled Detailed description At the location of the call to library function sqrtf a call to each library function is always generated Use this option to generate a library function call instruction without expanding to the instruction directly regardless of whether the conditions under Interpretation when omitted are met This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Perform inline expansion of library in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Perform inline expansion of library in the Optimization Details category Example of use At the location of the call to library function sartf a call to each library function is always generated gt CX CF3746 Xcall lib main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 350 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Generated code control The generated code control options are as follows Xpack Xpass_ source Xswitch Xword case Xr Xreg_mode Xsdata Xsconst Xfloat V850E2V3 Xfar_jump Xdiv V850E2V3 Xpack This option performs the structure packing Specification format Xpack num Interpretation when omitted The structure packing is not performed Detail
55. symbols that are unresolved through the link sequence of the library can be prevented This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Rescan library files in the Others category Example of use To rescan library file libtest1 lib and libtest2 lib describe as gt cx CF3746 Xrescan main obj ltestl ltest2 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 476 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Debug information section output suppress specification The debug information section output suppress specification option is as follows Xstrip Xstrip This option generates the load module file from which the debug information line number information and global pointer table have been removed Specification format xstrip Interpretation when omitted If the debug information line number information and global pointer table exist in the load module file to be generated they are not removed Detailed description This option generates the load module file from which the debug information line number information and global pointer table have been removed This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Delete debug information in the Debug Information category Example of use To generate the load module file from which the debug information line n
56. then all these files are saved 2 Displaying execution results The execution results of the build output messages of the build tool are displayed in each tab on the Output panel Build rebuild or batch build gt All Messages tab and Build Tool tab Rapid build gt Rapid Build tab Figure 2 99 Build Execution Results Build Rebuild or Batch Build Start build all Thursday September 4 009 3 34 41 PI Start buildtsample DetaultBuild gt sreystart asn gt sre main c Build endedt Error 0 Warning 0 Endedt Success l Projects Failed 0 Projects Thursday September 4 z009 3 34 43 PH EOF All Messages A Rapid Build Build Tool R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 75 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 100 Build Execution Results Rapid Build SEO main cl gt LefaultBuildi sample hex EOF Build Tool Remarks 1 The text in the Rapid Build tab becomes dimmed 2 When a file name or line number can be obtained from the output messages if you double click on the message you can jump to the relevant line in the file 3 Ifyou press the F1 key when the cursor is on a line displaying the warning or error message you can display the help related to that line s message Files generated by the build tool appear under the Build tool generated files node on the Project Tree panel Figure 2 101 Build Tool Generated File
57. 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xsfg_opt This option outputs the optimum allocation information Specification format Interpretation when omitted Allocation information is output with variables are sorted in the order starting from highest use frequency Detailed description Variables are sorted in the order starting from highest use frequency for each section and the optimum allocation information is output so that they can be allocated within the sizes of the tidata byte tidata word sidata sedata and sdata sections The size of each section can be specified by the Xsfg_size_tidata Xsfg_size_tidata_byte Xsfg_size_sidata Xsfg_size_sedata and Xsfg_size_sdata options When these option are not specified the size of each section are shown below This option is valid only when the Xsfg option is specified If the Xsfg option is not specified this option will be ignored This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Output optimized allocation information in the Symbol Information category Example of use To sort variables in the order starting from highest use frequency for each section and output the optimum allocation information describe as Cx CF3746 Xsfg opt Xsfg main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 413 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE
58. 0x55 gt CX CF3746 Xhex fill 0x55 0x1000 0x2000 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 399 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_section This option converts the codes in the specified section in hex format and outputs them Specification format Xhex_section section section Interpretation when omitted All sections which have the section type other than NOBITS and section attribute A are converted in hex format and output them Detailed description This option converts the codes in section section in hex format and outputs them An error will occur if section does not exist An error will occur if section is omitted This option can not be specified together with the Xhex_fill option Example of use To convert the codes in section sec in hex format and output them describe as gt CX CF3746 Xhex section sec main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 400 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_block_size This option specifies the maximum length of the block Specification format Xhex block _size num Interpretation when omitted The default value defined for each hex format is regards as the maximum block length Detailed description This option regards the value specified for num as the maximum block length or in the case of the Intel expanded hex form
59. 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 http www renesas com 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation All rights reserved Colophon 1 0 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CENESAS Renesas Electronics Corporation R20UT0261EJ0100
60. 26 relocation is a branch to an odd address The result of PC relative relocation is outside the allowed bounds symbol no symbol The result of other than PC relative relocation is outside the allowed bounds symbol no symbol The value of address calculation judged as an illegality is not assigned to the unresolved external reference judged as an error and the original value remains Example of use To output a warning and continue link processing if the result of address calculation of an unresolved external reference is illegal during relocation processing when linking describe as gt CX CF3746 Xignore address error main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 380 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xmultiple_symbol This option outputs an error message for all multi defined external symbols Specification format Xmultiple symbol Interpretation when omitted An error message is output for the first multi defined external symbol and link processing is stopped Detailed description This option outputs an error message for all multi defined external symbols and file names and stops link processing Example of use To output an error message for all multi defined external symbols and stop link processing describe as gt CX CF3746 Xmultiple symbol main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 381 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 AP
61. 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations CubeSuite has a function that a build is started automatically when one of the following events occurs hereafter referred to as rapid build When the C source file assembler source file header file link directive file symbol information file object module file or library file that has been added to the project is updated When a build target file has been added to or removed from the project When the link order of object module files and library files has changed When the properties of the build tool or build target files are changed If a rapid build is enabled it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operations To enable disable a rapid build select Rapid Build from the Build menu A rapid build is enabled by default R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 78 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 104 Rapid Build Item When Rapid Build Is Valid Gq Build Project F7 Ep Rebuild Project Shift F7 4 Update Dependencies Build sample Rebuild sample Clean sample Update Dependencies of sample Build Mode Settings Batch Build Build Option List Figure 2 105 Rapid Build Item When Rapid Build Is Invalid Build Project F7 Ge Rebuild Project Shift F7 Update Dependencies E Build sample t Rebuild sample a Clean sample my Update Dependencies of sample ra Pe Ly Build Mode
62. 4 1 Intel expanded hex format 101 3 4 2 Motorola S type hex format 106 3 4 3 Expanded Textronix hex format 109 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 114 A 1 Description 114 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 302 B 1 cx 302 B 1 1 I O files 305 B 1 2 Method for manipulating 306 B 1 3 Option 309 B 1 4 Symbol information file 511 B 1 5 Optimization function 514 B 1 6 Boot flash re link function 517 B 1 7 Cautions 526 B 2 Librarian 533 B 2 1 I O files 533 B 2 2 Method for manipulating 534 B 2 3 Key Option 535 B 3 Source Converter 552 B 3 1 I O files 552 B 3 2 Method for manipulating 553 B 3 3 Option 555 B 3 4 Conversion Specification 563 APPENDIX C INDEX 570 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 1 GENERAL This chapter explains the overview of the build tool CX 1 1 Overview The build tool CX is comprised of components provided by CubeSuite It enables various types of information to be configured via a GUI tool enabling you to generate the load module file ROMization load module file hex file and user library file from your source files according to your objectives CX described by this manual consists of the following commands CX Librarian Source Converter The process flow of CX is shown below Figure 1 1 Process Flow of CX C source fie C gt C D Assembler source file CA850 CA850 C source file gt
63. 57 2 12 3 Set the flash area project 59 2 13 Allocate Variables to Optimum Section 61 2 14 Create a Multi Core Load Module 65 2 15 Make Settings for Build Operations 67 2 15 1 Set the link order of files 67 2 15 2 Change the file build order of subprojects 68 2 15 3 Display a list of build options 68 2 15 4 Change the file build target project 69 2 15 5 Adda build mode 70 2 15 6 Change the build mode 71 2 15 7 Delete a build mode 73 2 15 8 Set the current build options as the standard for the project 74 2 16 Runa Build 75 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files 77 2 16 2 Runa build of all files 78 2 16 3 Run a build in parallel with other operations 78 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes 80 2 16 5 Compile assemble link multiple files simultaneously 81 2 16 6 Compile assemble individual files 82 2 16 7 Stop running a build 83 2 16 8 Save the build results to a file 84 2 16 9 Delete intermediate files and generated files 85 2 17 Output Information to Create a Makefile 86 2 18 Using Stack Usage Tracer 88 2 18 1 Starting and exiting 88 2 18 2 Check the call relationship 89 2 18 3 Check the stack information 89 2 18 4 Check unknown functions 90 2 18 5 Change the frame size 90 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 92 3 1 Assemble List File 92 3 2 Link Map File 94 3 3 Symbol Information File 97 3 4 Hex File 100 3
64. 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Macro undefinition Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the U option of the cx command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 3 Character Encoding The detailed information on character encoding is displayed and the configuration can be changed Character encoding Select the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the source file This corresponds to the Xcharacter_set option of the cx command Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction SJIS None Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS EUC Xcharacte
65. A Le Property El Debug I nformabon Add debug information es g El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths U Sistem mclude paths System mclude patha 0 Macro definition Macro detinition U Macro undetinitian Macro undefinition O Character Encocdng Output Code Assemble List Others Add debug informabon Species whether to generate the debug information Such information i generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option comresponds t A RoMize Opti A Hex Output T ka Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab Caution This tab is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected 2 6 1 Add an include path Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel The include path setting is made with the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 45 Additional include paths Property Macro detinition Macro definition 0 Macro undetinitian Macro undetinitian 0 If you click the button the Path Edit dialog box will open R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 43 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 46 Path
66. APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE System Include Path Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer the system include paths specified for the compiler and set their specified sequence Figure A 29 System Include Path Order Dialog Box system Include Path Order The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile cate gory and System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category From the Compile Options tab System include paths in the Preprocess category From the Assemble Options tab System include paths in the Preprocess category Description of each area 1 Path list display area This area displays the list of the system include paths specified for the compiler a Path This area displays the list of the system include paths in the specified sequence for the compiler The default order is the order that the files are registered to the project By changing the display order of the paths you can set the specified order of the paths to the compiler To change the display order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the path names Remarks 1 Move the mouse cursor over a file name to display a tooltip with t
67. AW When the attribute of the parent segment is All enable AWX All enable AWX How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Executable AX Sets a section that occupies a memory and enables to execute This item is not displayed when the attribute of the parent segment is Read only R Read only A Sets a section that occupies a memory Read Write AW Sets a section that occupies a memory and enables to write This item is displayed only when the attribute of the parent segment is Read Write RW or All enable RWX GP with 1 Sets a section assigned within a memory range instruction AWG that enables it to occupy a memory write to it and reference it using a global pointer gp and 16 bit displacement This item is displayed only when the attribute of the parent segment is Read Write RW or All enable RWX All enable AWX Sets a section that occupies a memory and enables to write and execute This item is displayed only when the attribute of the parent segment is All enable RWX Start address Specify the start address to allocate the section If this field is blank the section is allocated in the behind of the previous section by the linker How to change Directly enter in the text box 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF hexadecimal number R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 252 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Hole size Specify the hole size between se
68. B COMMAND REFERENCE The following example is equivalent to the example above gt cx CF3746 Xpreprocess comment Xpreprocess line P main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 336 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE C language control The C language control options are as follows Xansi Xchar Xenum_type Xdef_var Xansi This option processes as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard Specification format Xansi Interpretation when omitted Compatibility with the conventional C language specifications is conferred and processing continues after warning is Output Detailed description This option processes as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standardN and outputs an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard When this option is specified macro name _ STDC __ is defined as the macro that the value is 1 Processing when compiling in strict adherence to the language specification is as follows Bit fields An error will occur if a type other than an int type is specified in a bit field If this option is not specified a warning will be output and specifying a type other than an int type will be enabled line number An error will occur If this option is not specified line number will be handled in the same way as line line number Argument of function for which
69. C D Assembler source file CX w o CX Object module file Compiler Assembler T B Linker Load module file Librarian Symbol file generator User library file ROMization processor Object converter Standard library file etc ROMization load module file Hex file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 11 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 Features The features of the build tool CX are shown below Optimization function You can generate efficient load module files by performing optimizations such as prioritizing code size or execution speed when compiling Support for 8 byte types double and long long CX treats double as an 8 byte type It also supports the long long type signed unsigned specified by C99 Smart correction function If you want to correct a specific function you can replace just the processing in that function without changing the contents of any other functions code or addresses Remark See CubeSuite Coding for CX Compiler for details about the smart correction function Linking continues after error If there is a memory overflow error if CX can recover then it will continue linking and display information about low memory R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 12 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the build procedure using CubeSuite and about the m
70. CORE MULTI CMN When this option is specified the section name is automatically converted during assembling unless the section name is explicitly specified in the source That is the suffix corresponding to type pen or cmn is added after the default section name In each object module file the section defined in the file and the section of information indicating correspondence of type is output Specifying this option affects the following options Implicitly enabled options xno startup Xno stdlib Xno romize Xrelinkable object R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 443 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Ignored options l L Xstartup Xmap Xno_romize Xrompcrt Xrompsec_ start Xrompsec data Xrompsec_text xXrompsec only Kromize check off xXhex Anex only Xhex format Xhex fill xXhex section xXhex block size Xhex offset Xhex null Xhex_symtab Xhex rom_less To generate library files for each of the subprograms specify this option at the same time as the c option and create an object module file Caution Do not create a library file for object module files created with different Xmulti options specified Example of use To generate a program for core 1 describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 444 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error output control The
71. Cancels the settings of the encoding and newline code and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 247 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Directive File Generation dialog box This dialog box is used to generate a link directive file based on the specified memory segments sections and symbol allocation information Figure A 31 Link Directive File Generation Dialog Box Link Directive File Generation Segment Section list Segment Section detail Memon Mame Start Address EndAddess O Segment i Internal ROM OxO0000000 Os0007 ttt Attribute Read only A Start address HEX Masiniuinn memor HEX 2 pro epi runtime Hole size ex F test Filing value HEX 1 Non Mapping Ox00080000 0x01 FFFfff Alignment value H 2 B DataFlash 002000000 002007 FFF a2 CONST Cg const Non Mapping OxO02008000 O fecF5ttt EI Internal RAM OsfecdFeO00 Oettectttttt ag DATA O fedF6000 w Name Species the segment name The following characters can be used o Add segment Add section Symbol Symbol list Symbol detail Mame Address El Symbol CB tp TEXT Siete a eh Hame __tp_TEXT Car op DATA GP symbol GP_Sy MBOL Type TP symbollsTP_S MB Ce ep DATA EP symbol ZEP_SyMBOL Address Alignment value HEX Segment name Segment name O Name Specities the symbol name Add symbol Delete
72. Chain with Maximum Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the call chain with the greatest total Stack from Selected Function stack size including the stack size of callee functions of the function selected in the tree display area list display area to an output result file Functions in the same manner as the gq button Save All Call Chains from Selected Opens the Save As dialog box for saving all call chains of the function selected Function in the tree display area list display area to an output result file Save Call Chain with Maximum Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the call chain of the function displayed Stack from Every Root in the tree display area with the largest total stack size to an output result file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 289 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save All Call Chains from Every Opens the Save As dialog box for saving all call chains of all functions dis Root played in the tree display area to an output result file Load Stack Size Specification Opens the Open dialog box for loading a stack size specification file File Save Stack Size Specification Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the results of the operations made in File the Adjust Stack Size dialog box e g changes to function information to a stack size specification file Remark The output result file can only be saved in text format txt or CSV format
73. CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Build Settings tab This tab shows the detailed information on each C source file assembler source file object module file link directive file symbol information file and library file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Build 2 Multi Core Figure A 11 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting C Source File Property c_ main c Property El Build Set as build target Set indrvidual compile option Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Property asm main asm Property El Build Set as build target Set individual assemble option Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Property obj object obj Property El Build Set as build target Set as build target Selects whether to build this file File Information R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 198 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 14 Property Panel Build Settings Tab When Selecting Link Directive File Property dir link dir Property El Build Set as build target Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Property sig symbol stg Property El Build Set as build target Set as build target Selects whether to build this file Property lib user lib Property El Build Set as build target Set as build target Selects whether to build
74. CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 2 2 Method for manipulating This section explains how to manipulate the librarian 1 Startup from the command line Enter the following on the command line Can be omitted Pattern in proceeding can be repeated A One or more spaces Note When an object module file is linked within a library file it is called a member Each member has the same name as its original file name Remark You must specify one key when you runs the librarian An option can be omitted 2 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set create library options from CubeSuite On the CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select the View menu gt gt Property The Property panel opens Next select the Create Library Options tab You can set the various create library options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 10 Property Panel Create Library Options Tab Property A Le Property El Output File Output folder 2B UildModeN amez Output file name lb FProjectN ame lib Message Others Output folder Specifies the folder to which the generated library are sawed This option corresponds to the gq key of the lb command Common Options lt Compile Options N When activating the librarian from the command line combine object module files to create a library file In addition detailed operations can
75. Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information Select whether to generate the debug information It is possible to perform source debugging with the debugger by outputting information for source debugging to the output file This corresponds to the g option of the cx command Default Yes g How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes g Generates the debug information Does not generate the debug information R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 167 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Preprocess The detailed information on preprocessing is displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition Specify the additional include paths during assembling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder The specified include path is searched with higher priority than the standard include file folder of CX The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CX is searched This corresponds to the option of the cx command The specified include pat
76. Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line m Browse Subfolders are automatically included Enter the include path per line in Path One path per one line You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 256 lines Remark You can also specify the include path by dragging and dropping from Explorer or the like or by the Browse button Select the Subfolders are automatically included check box before clicking the Browse button to add all paths under the specified one down to 5 levels to Path One path per one line If you click the OK button the entered include paths are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 47 Additional include paths Property After Adding Include Paths Additional include paths Dey Macro detinition Macro definition 0 Macro undetinition Macro undetinitian 0 To change the include paths you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties automatically Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Additional include paths property in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 44 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 2 Set a macro definition Select the build tool node on the project tree
77. Editing the symbol information file Edit the symbol information file generated automatically in 1 Generating the symbol information file automatically and relocating the variables Describe the symbol information file according to the following format Describe the variables in the order of priority from highest use frequency tidata byte Size_section sizebytes tidata word Size_section sizebytes sidata Size_section sizebytes sedata Size_section sizebytes sdata Size_section sizebytes global variable reference count byte size static variable in file reference count byte size file name including path static variable in function reference count byte size file name including path function name Remark See 3 3 Symbol Information File for detail about the format of the symbol information file b Set the generation of the symbol information file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Select No in the Output symbol information file property R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 63 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 80 Output symbol information file Property c Runa build of the project Run a build of the project The load module file is generated with the variables allocated according to the specified contents in the symbol information file Caution Ifthe file with the extension of s
78. External variable Specify the external variables symbol name excluding _ assigned to the register assigned to the r24 This corresponds to the Xr24 option of the cx command register This property is not displayed when 26 register mode Xreg_mode 26 in the Register mode property in the Register Mode category from the Common Options tab is selected How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 1022 characters 12 Others Other detailed information on compilation is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before compile processing before compile Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit b
79. Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Hex file name Specify the hex file name The extension can be freely specified The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName hex has been specified This corresponds to the Xhex option of the cx command Default ProjectName hex How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 259 characters 2 Hex Format The detailed information on the hex format is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 189 of 577 Oct 01 2010 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Hex file format Select the format of the hex file to be output This corresponds to the Xhex_format option of the cx command Default Intel expanded hex format None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Intel expanded hex Specifies the Intel expanded hex format as format None the format of the hex file Intel expanded hex format 32 bit address Specifies the Intel expanded hex format 32 bit address as the format of the hex Xhex_format i file Motorola S type Specifies the Motorola S type format format standard address standard address as the format of the hex Xhex_format S file Motorola S type format 32 bit Specifies the Motorola S
80. If no project has been registered Favorite Projects is displayed 2path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 2 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Projects is displayed 3path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 3 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Projects is displayed 4path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 4 Register to Favorite Project If no project has been registered Favorite Projects is displayed 1 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 1 path in Favorite Projects 2 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 2path in Favorite Projects 3 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to Spath in Favorite Projects 4 Register to Favorite Project The current project path is added to 4path in Favorite Projects Add Displays the cascading menu to add subprojects to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add an existing subproject to the project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add a new subproject to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selec
81. Individual Compile Options tab Output error message file in the Error Output category From the Individual Compile Options tab Error message file output folder in the Error Output category From the Individual Compile Options tab Error message file name in the Error Output category Example of use To output error messages to the standard error output and file err describe as gt 00 CF3746 Xerror Tile err main R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 419 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Warning message output control The warning message output control options are as follows Xwarning Xno_warning Xwarning This option outputs the specified warning message Specification format Xwaning num num Xwaning numl1 num2 Interpretation when omitted Severe warning messages are output Same as when Xwarning_level 1 is specified Detailed description This option outputs the specified warning message Specify the error numbers as num num1 and num2 If the error number that does not exist it will be ignored An error will occur if num num1 or num2 is omitted If num1 num2 is specified it is assumed that error numbers within the range have been specified The error number specified by this option is the rightmost 5 digits of the 7 digit number following the W See CubeSuite Message for error numbers This option
82. Intel expanded hex format 32 bit address Xhex_format i Motorola S type format standard address SO record as a header record S2 record as data record and S8 record as end Xhex_format S record Motorola S type format 32 bit address SO record as a header record S3 record as data record and S7 record as end Xhex_format s record Expanded Tektronix hex format Data block symbol block and termination block Xhex_format T Remark See 3 4 Hex File for details about the hex file 2 9 2 Fill the vacant area Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel The setting to fill the vacant area is made with the Hex Format category If you select Yes Xhex_fill in the Specify converted address range property the Filling value property is displayed Figure 2 61 Specify converted address range and Filling value Property O Hex Format Specify converted address range Yes Ahex_fill Filling value FFFF Size HEH Specify masimum length of blockrecord Ho Specify offset of output address Ho Enter the fill value for the vacant area directly in the text box The range that can be specified for the value is 00 to FFFF 2 or 4 digit hexadecimal number FFFF is set by default R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 51 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Set the address range of the area to be converted to a hex file in t
83. No specific device None The object module file having information specific to the specified device is output R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CE NESAS Page 138 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Intermediate file output Specify the folder which the intermediate file is output folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xobj_path option of the cx command Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters 3 Frequently Used Options for Compile The detailed information on frequently used options during compilation is displayed and the configuration can be changed Level of optimization Select the level of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the O option of the cx command Default Default Optimization Odefault How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Default Performs optimization that de
84. Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE The default link directive used by the cx uses the following reserved sections as output sections Therefore the cx normally creates the following reserved symbols end _ebss __econst _edata _epro_epi_ runtime _esbss __esconst __esdata __esebss _esedata __esibss __esidata etext __etibss __etibss byte _etibss word _etidata __etidata byte _etidata word sbss __sconst __sdata _spro_epi_runtime _ssbss _ssconst _ssdata __ssebss ssedata __ssibss __ssidata __ stext __stibss _stibss byte _stibss word __stidata _stidata byte _ stidata word Caution Of the above symbols only those for which a section exists in the executable file after link processing are generated The cx behaves as if no section exists if a section that is actually allocated does not exist even if a mapping directive is described in the link directive file 4 When it may not be allocated to the expected sections Even if a link directive file specifies an object module file or library file to be allocated to a section the object module file or library file may not be allocated to the expected sections depending on how the file name is described In such cases relink using the link directive file with the exact same name displayed in the map file including the path and file name 5 main function If linking is performed without creating a main function an error message may b
85. Operations Remarks 1 If there is no subproject in the project the project is always active 2 When setting a build mode add the build mode see 2 15 5 Add a build mode 3 Set build target files Add or remove build target files and update the dependencies see 2 3 Set Build Target Files 4 Set build options Set the options for the compiler assembler librarian and the like see 2 5 Set Compile Options 2 6 Set Assemble Options 2 10 Set Create Library Options Remark To create a library common to various devices set the Output common object module file for various devices property in the Output File Type and Path category from the Common Options tab on the Property panel 5 Runa build Run a build see 2 16 Runa Build The following types of builds are available Build see 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files Rebuild see 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build see 2 16 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations Batch build see 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remark _ If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process on the Property panel from the Common Options tab in the Others category set the Commands executed before build processing and Commands executed after build processing properties If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process at the file level you can set them from the Individual Co
86. Options tab This corresponds to the option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Compiles using the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used No Does not use the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used Specify the name of the macro to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the cx command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 206 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Macro undefinition Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the U option of the cx command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can ente
87. Prohibit the operation that changes memory access size No Perform inline expansion of library Yes Preprocess Additional include paths H o Additional include patha 0 Use whole include paths specified tor build tool Yeg Macro definition Macro undetinitian C Language Character Encodng Output Code Output File Assemble List Error Output Warming Message Others Add debug informabton AHA AA A H Macro detinition 0 Macro undetinition O Species whether to generate the debug information Such information i generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option comresponds to the g option of the cx command Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information 2 Optimization Select whether to generate the debug information It is possible to perform source debugging with the debugger by outputting information for source debugging to the output file This corresponds to the g option of the cx command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes g Generates the debug information Does not generate the debug information The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00
88. Project Tree Panel After Adding Startup File Project Tree E sample Project JE UPO7OF3506 Microcontroller A Fin Configurator Design Tool Ei Code Generator Design Tool AW CS Build Tool Sh Y8S0E2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool ke OB Proagrammer Flash Programming Tool oD Fi s Startup i Caution The build target file added directly below the Startup node on the project tree is treated as the startup file It is not treated as a startup file if it is added to the category below the Startup node When adding the startup file to the Startup node if a startup file has already been added then only the latest startup file to be added is targeted by a build any such files added prior to this one will not be targeted When setting the startup file that is not targeted by a build as the build target if other startup files have also been added then the file will be targeted by the build and the others will not be targeted Remark See CubeSuite Coding for CX Compiler for the method of creating the startup routine R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 17 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 2 Automatically generate link directives Although users can create a link directive file and add it to a project it is also possible to generate it automatically in CubeSuite Remark See CubeSuite Coding for CX Compiler for details about link direct
89. ROMization area reservation code file default ROMization area reservation code file asm s ROMization area reservation code file Function buttons Sets the designated file to the area that this dialog box is called from R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 284 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name Figure A 47 Save As Dialog Box Save As 1 Save in O tem My Recent Documents My Documenta i My Computer 3 ile name Output Build Tool tst ka 4 do Hretrrorh Save as Woe Text file txt s pos Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select Save file name As from the File menu Focus the Output panel and then select Save tab name As from the File menu Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder to save the panel contents in the file The following folders are selected by default a In the Editor panel The folder that currently editing file is saved is selected R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 285 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b In the Output panel The project folder is selected when the file is s
90. Remark You can change the display format of the build option list Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Set the Format of build option list property in the Others category Figure 2 86 Format of build option list Property O Others emporary tolder Commands executed before build processing Commands executed before build processing 0 Commands executed after build processing Commands executed after build processing 0 Other additional options FileName Program Options is set by default FileName Y Program and Options are embedded macros They are replaced to the file name being built program name under execution and command line option under build execution R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 68 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 4 Change the file build target project When running a build that targets a specific project main project or subproject you must set that project as the active project To set the active project select the main project or subproject to be set as the active project on the project tree and select Set selected subproject as Active Project from the context menu Figure 2 87 Set selected project as Active Project Item LK sub Subproject J uPD OF3506 a Pin Configura Rebuild sample gt E H a L Clean sample A CA850 Build os YESOEZ
91. Save Settings from the File menu Description of each area 1 Encode Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items of the drop down list are displayed according to the following sequence Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed Encoding of the current file default Default encoding of the current OS Encoding of code page 932 SJIS Encoding of code page 50222 JIS Encoding of code page 51932 EUC Encoding of code page 65001 UTF8 2 Newline code Select the newline code to be set from the drop down list You can select any of items below Keep current newline code Windows CR LF Macintosh CR Unix LF R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 246 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Keep current newline code is selected by default After the newline code is changed the set newline code is selected by default 3 Reload the file Use this check box to select whether to reload the file with the selected encoding and newline code when the OK button is clicked The check box is not selected by default Function buttons Sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and closes this dialog box If Reload the file is selected sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and reloads the file And then closes this dialog box
92. Settings El Batch Build LT Build Option List Remarks 1 After editing source files it is recommend to save frequently by pressing the Ctrl S key 2 Enabling disabling a rapid build is set for the entire project main project and subprojects 3 If you disable a rapid build while it is running it will be stopped at that time Caution This function will also be enabled in an external editor if the Observe registered files changing checkbox is selected in the Build Debug category of the Option dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 79 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes You can run builds rebuilds and cleans in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has hereafter referred to as batch build Remark See the sections below for a build rebuild and clean Build See 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files Rebuild See 2 16 2 Run a build of all files Clean See 2 16 9 Delete intermediate files and generated files Select Batch Build from the Build menu The Batch Build dialog box will open Figure 2 106 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Build mode Defined macros sample DefaultBuild sample BuildModes sub DefaultBuild sub BuildMode Project In the dialog box the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects
93. The detailed information on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Level of optimization Select the level of the optimization for compiling This corresponds to the O option of the cx command Default Default Optimization Odefault How to change Select from the drop down list Default Optimization Odefault Code Size Precedence Osize Speed Precedence Ospeed Debug Precedence Onothing Detail Setting Performs optimization that debugging is not affected optimization of expressions and register allocation and the like Performs optimization with the object size precedence Regards reducing the ROM RAM capacity as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Performs optimization with the execution speed precedence Regards shortening the execution speed as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Performs optimization with the debug precedence Regards debugging as important and suppresses all optimization including default optimization The properties are added in the Optimization Details category The optimization items selected in the category has the precedence for the optimization R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 152 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Optimization Details The detailed informatio
94. added below the File node Note that on the project tree the folder is the category Remark When the category node created by the user exists you can add a file below the node by dropping the file onto the node see 2 3 6 Classify a file into a category for a category node R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 24 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Creating and adding an empty file On the project tree select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box will open Figure 2 16 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type C ource file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Link directive file dir dr Symbol mformatior file stg Text file twt Empty C source file File name main c File location D work ssample In the dialog box specify the file to be created and then click the OK button The file is added below the File node The project tree after adding the file and folder will look like the one below Figure 2 17 Project Tree Panel After Adding File main c Project Tree Ed E sample Project JBE UPD7OF3506 Microcontroller A Fin Configurator Design Tool ay i Code Generator Design Tool AS CX Build Tool es YES0E2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a OB Progr
95. all members which exist in library file libmain lib to the standard output describe as gt lb t libmain lib R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 545 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Object generate control The object generate control key is as follows X This key extracts the member which exists in the specified library file and generates the object module file with the same name Specification format Interpretation when omitted Members are not extracted Detailed description If the member name is specified and the member exists in the specified library file this key extracts that member and generates the object module file with the same name If the member name is not specified this key extracts all members which exist in the specified library file and gen erates the object module files with the same name The contents of the library file are not changed Example of use To extract member sub obj which exists in library file liomain lib and generate Sub obj describe as gt lb x libmain lib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 546 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Message output suppress specification The message output suppress specification option is as follows C This option does not output messages Specification format Interpretation when omitted M
96. allocated to a section with relocation attributes other than data const or sconst e g sdata is specified in the C source file and assembler source file When this option is specified code corresponding to type will be generated during compilation and assembling symbol references that can be resolved within the scope of the subprogram will be resolved and then linking will be performed and a relinkable load module file will be created At this time the default startup routine and standard libraries will not be linked Additionally ROMization processing and generation of a hex file will not be performed When this option is specified the following preprocessor macros are set automatically Type Preprocessor Macro to Define Value is 1 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 482 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE When this option is specified the section name is automatically converted during assembling unless the section name is explicitly specified in the source That is the suffix corresponding to type pen or cmn is added after the default section name In each object module file the section defined in the file and the section of information indicating correspondence of type is output Specifying this option affects the following options Implicitly enabled options Ignored options ll L Xstartup Xmap Xno_romize Xrompcrt lt Xrompsec Start xXrompse
97. an error is output and linking is stopped At this time the load module file is not generated Detailed description This option generates the relocatable object module file If this option is specified a message is not output and linking is completed normally if an unresolved external reference remains after linking If the object module file generated by the cx is specified as the target for relocation use this option to generate the target object module file for relocation If this option is specified only the types and attributes in the segment directive section in the link directive will be valid and the others are ignored If this option is specified any reserved symbol is not created This option must be specified together with the Xno_ startup and Xno_romize options This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Output relocatable object module file in the Output File category Example of use To generate the relocatable object module file describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 465 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Control checking for mixing register modes The option controls checking for mixing register modes are as follows Xreg_mode Xregmode_info Xreg_mode This option checks whether the specified register mode is mixed Specification format Xreg_mode m
98. any other value is specified Generate the common module rO relative instructions for acquiring variable access and function addresses are generated handled in the same way as if a pragma nopic directive is described at the top of the file An error will occur if a pragma pic directive is described An error will occur if the data be allocated to a section with relocation attributes other than data const or sconst e g sdata is specified When this option is specified code corresponding to type will be generated during compilation symbol references that can be resolved within the scope of the subprogram will be resolved and then linking will be performed and a relinkable load module file will be created At this time the default startup routine and standard libraries will not be linked Additionally ROMization processing and generation of a hex file will not be performed When this option is specified the following preprocessor macros are set automatically Type Preprocessor Macro to Define Value is 1 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 406 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Specifying this option affects the following options Implicitly enabled options xno startup Xno stdlib xno r mize Xrelinkable object Ignored options l L Xstartup Xmap Kno romiz Xrompcrt Xrompsec start Xrompsec data Xrompsec text Xrompsec only
99. as the link target Detailed description This option specifies so that a file that is not recognized as a link target a file other than obj lib and Imf is the link target Specify the file to be linked as file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted Example of use To link file link test describe as Cx CF3746 XIk option link test R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 423 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Command file specification The command file specification option is as follows This option specifies a command file Specification format Interpretation when omitted Only the options and file names specified on the command line are recognized Detailed description This option handles file as a command file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted See 2 Startup from a command file for details about a command file Example of use To handle command as a command file describe as gt cx command R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 424 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Assemble options The types and explanations for options of the assemble phase are shown below Table B 4 Assemble Options specification p Xobj_path This option specifies where the o
100. be used during build Compile Options Link Options The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Edit menu only available for the Property panel Context menu How to open DefaultBuild Execute Module Load Module File 2B uildModeN anes Default Optimization Odetautt Additional include paths 0 System mclude patha 0 Macro detinition 0 Using libranes 0 Additional library patha 0 BulldModeh ane 2Projecthl ame Imt Intel expanded hes format Hone RoMize Options A Hex Output Options On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node file or category node and then select Property from the View menu or Property from the context menu Remark When either one of the Build tool node file or category node on the Project Tree panel is selected while the Property panel has been opened the detailed information of the selected item is displayed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 133 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Selected node area This area displays the name of the selected node on the Project Tree panel When multiple nodes are selected this area is blank 2 Detailed information display change area In this area the detailed information on the Build tool node file or category node that is selected on the Project Tree panel is display
101. boot Imf with 0x200 as the start address of the branch table for the flash area describe as sex CF3746 Xflash ext table 0x200 xXlink output boot imi booti c boot2 c Xlink_directive boot dir To create the branch table at address 0x200 and generate load module file for the flash area flash Imf describe as At this time symbol information of load module file for the boot area boot Imf is referred and link processing is performed gt cx CF3746 Xflash_ext_table 0x200 Xflash boot lmf oflash lmf flashi c flash2 c_ Xlank directive flash dir R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 386 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xflash_ext_table This option specifies the start address value of the branch table for the boot flash re link function Specification format Xflash_ext_table address Interpretation when omitted The load module file for the boot flash re link function is not generated and normal link processing is performed Detailed description This option generates the load module file for the boot flash re link function using address address as the start address value of the branch table See B 1 6 Boot flash re link function for details about the boot flash re link function Specify generating the load module file for the boot area or flash area depending on whether the Xflash option is specified When the load module file for the boot a
102. box 267 Boot flash re link function 517 Browse For Folder dialog box 277 Build 75 77 Build mode 70 71 Build Mode Settings dialog box 265 Build tool version 15 C C Assemble option 432 C Compile option 325 c Compile option 331 c Create library option 547 C Link option 456 C Source convert option 558 category 28 Change the build mode 71 Change the output file name 34 Character String Input dialog box 237 Clean 85 APPENDIX C INDEX D D Assemble option 436 D Compile option 332 d Create library key 537 Delete a build mode 73 E Editor panel 227 err_file Create library option 550 err_file Create library option 551 Expanded Textronix hex format 109 F File dependencies 30 File display order 29 File Save Settings dialog box 246 G g Assemble option 431 g Compile option 323 g Link option 455 General Build Debug category 273 Go to the Location dialog box 269 H h Assemble option 427 h Compile option 315 h Link option 452 h Source convert option 557 Hex file 100 l Assemble option 438 Compile option 334 Intel expanded hex format 101 L L Compile option 367 Compile option 366 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 570 of 57
103. but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers of
104. by OK data with a size less than that value is allocated to the sdata sbss area This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Display GP information in the Others category Example of use To output information that can be used as a yardstick for the parameter of the Xsdata option to the standard output describe as gt cx CF3746 Xsdata_info main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 469 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 pass mode link specification The 2 pass mode link specification option is as follows Xtwo_pass_link Xtwo_pass_link This option performs linking in the 2 pass mode Specification format Xtwo_path_ link Interpretation when omitted Linking is performed in the 1 pass mode Detailed description This option performs linking in the 2 pass mode The 2 pass mode is slower than the 1 pass mode but it is able to process larger sized files This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Link in 2 pass mode in the Others category Example of use To perform linking in the 2 pass mode describe as gt cx CF3746 Xtwo_ path link main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 470 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Relocation resolution error processing control The reloc
105. can be specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 226 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Editor panel This panel is used to display and edit text files and source files The file is opened by automatically distinguishing the encoding Shift_JIS EUC JP UTF 8 and line feed code of the file and the encoding is retained when it is saved If the encoding and newline code is specified in the File Save Settings dialog box however then the file is saved in accordance with those settings This panel can be multiply opened max 100 panels Remark A message is shown when the downloaded load module file is older than the source file to be opened Figure A 21 Editor Panel 43 This function implements main function 44 tt 45 FParameters qajt Mone 47 tt 48 Returns ae ee None 50 tt 51 oT n E OE E E E E E E pee E ed E E ed a es ee ee S52 E 53lvoid mainivoidj 7 ee 55 f Start user code Do not edit comment generated here 56 THPO Start E 57 while iiU 58 i 59 60 61 f End user code Do not edit comment generated here 62 m Ld 4 The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area File menu only available for the Editor panel Edit menu only available for the Editor panel Context menu How to open On the Project Tree panel double click a file On the Project Tree pan
106. can use one of the procedures below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag a file and drop it onto the Editor panel Select a file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Copy Copies the selected file or category node to the clipboard When the file name or category name is in editing the characters of the selection are copied to the clipboard Note that this menu is enabled when a file or category is selected Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below the selected node on the project tree When the file name or category name is in editing the contents of the clipboard are inserted Note that this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project when multiple files and category nodes are selected and when the build tool is in operation R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 126 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE You can rename the selected project subproject file or category node Press the Enter key to confirm editing Press the ESC key to cancel editing When the file is selected the actual file name is also changed When the selected file is added to other project that file name is also changed Note that this menu is enabled when a project subproject file or category node is selected Note that this menu
107. csv b View menu Recalculate Stack Size Recalculates the total stack size Functions in the same manner as the button Forcibly stop the action of the stack usage tracer e g recalculating the total stack size Functions in the same manner as the x button c Option menu Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Opens the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box to display Function Lists a list of functions with unknown frame size functions for which information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modified and functions for which the stack usage tracer has forcibly set an additional margin Adjust Stack Size Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the function selected in the tree display area list display area This dialog box is used to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function Functions in the same manner as the button Reset Function Resets the information additional margin recursion depth and callee func tions for the selected function to the default values This button will be grayed out if all the information for the selected function has the default values Reset All Functions Resets the information additional margin recursion depth and callee func tions for all functions to the default values
108. dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 247 characters Specify the file name of the load module to be generated Output file name The extension other than lmf cannot be specified If the extension is omitted Imf is automatically added If the target is a multi core CPU the load module for the common module and the load module for core n are generated and the final load module is then generated based on those n number of cores of the target CPU Load module for the common module input string without the extension _cmn mf Load module for the core n input string without the extension _pen mf The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the o option of the cx command Default ProjectName Imf How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 259 characters Select whether to generate a relocatable object module file Output relocatable object module file This corresponds to the Xrelinkable_ object option of the cx command This property is displayed only when No in the Use boot flash re linking property in the Flash Correspondence category from the Common Options tab is selected 4 Library The detailed information on the library is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 174 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPEND
109. drop down list Restriction Yes Saves the file location with the absolute path Saves the file location with the relative path R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 224 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Last update The time and date on which this file was changed last is displayed Default File updated time and date How to change Changes not allowed Writable Select whether to enable writing to the file Default Yes when the file is write enabled No when the file is not write enabled How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Enables the file to write Does not enable the file to write 2 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Memo Add memos to the file Add one item in one line The specified memo is displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 225 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Category Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on the category node the category that the user added Files node Build tool generated files node and Sta
110. enable RWX Makes the segment readable writable and execut able R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 250 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Start address Specify the start address to allocate the segment If this field is blank the segment is allocated in the behind of the previous segment by the link function of the compiler How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 0x0 to OXFFFFFFFF hexadecimal number Maximum memory size Specify the maximum memory size of the segment If this field is blank the size is considered as 0x100000 bytes by the link function of the compiler An error will occur if the specified maximum memory size is exceeded How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 0x0 to OXFFFFFFFF hexadecimal number Hole size Specify the hole size between segments If this field is blank the size is considered as 0x0 byte by the link function of the com piler How to change Directly enter in the text box 0x0 to OXFFFFFFFF hexadecimal number Filling value Specify the filling value for a hole between segments If this field is blank the value is considered as 0x0000 by the link function of the compiler How to change Directly enter in the text box 0x0000 to OxFFFF hexadecimal number Alignment value Specify the alignment conditions of the segment When the odd number value is specified it changes to the even numbe
111. error output control options are as follows Xerror_file Xerror_file This option outputs error messages to a file Specification format Xerror file file Interpretation when omitted Error messages are output to only the standard error output Detailed description This option outputs error messages to the standard error output and file file If file already exists it will be overwritten An error will occur if file is omitted An error will occur if file is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Individual Assemble Options tab Output error message file in the Error Output category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Error message file output folder in the Error Output category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Error message file name in the Error Output category Example of use To output error messages to the standard error output and file err describe as gt cx CF3746 Xerror file err main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 445 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Warning message output control The warning message output control options are as follows Xwarning Xno_warning Xwarning This option outputs the specified warning message Specification format Xwaning num num Xwaning numl1 num2 Interpretation whe
112. file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the ROMize Options tab Text sections included in rompsec section in the Section category Example of use To include section text1 and text2 in the rompsec section describe as gt CX CF3746 Xrompsec_text text1 text2 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 495 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xrompsec_ only This option generates the load module file that has only the rompsec section Specification format Xrompsec_ only Interpretation when omitted The section with the text attribute is included in the load module file to be generated Detailed description This option generates the load module file that has only the rompsec section no section with the text attribute is included in the file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the ROMize Options tab Generate load module file has rompsec section only in the Section cate gory Example of use To generate the load module file that has only the rompsec section describe as gt CX CF3746 Xrompsec only main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 496 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Control checking for errors under ROMization The option controls checking for errors under ROMization is as follows Xromize_ch
113. file Bb uildM ode amez Hes file name 4Projecth ame hes El Hex Format Hex file format Intel expanded hes format M one Specify converted address range No Converted sections Converted sectone 0 Specify masimum length of block record No Specify offset of output address No Initialize section of data without initial value to zerg No Output folder for hex fie Specifies the folder for storing a hes file This option corresponds to the o option of the cx command Common Options Compile Options Link Options R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 188 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output folder for hex file Specify the folder which the hex file is output If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xhex option of the cx command Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For
114. file c Assembler source file asm s Header file h inc Symbol information file sfg Link directive file dir dr Link map file map Hex file hex Text file txt Remarks 1 You can use one of the procedures below to open files other than those listed above in the Editor panel Drag a file and drop it onto the Editor panel Select a file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu 2 When the environment is set to use an external editor on the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS 2 3 4 Remove a file from a project To remove the file added to a project select the file to be removed from the project on the project tree and then select Remove from Project from the context menu Figure 2 19 Remove from Project Item 5 A File a Build tool generated files s Startup c_ main c 2 Compile Open Open with Internal Editor Open with Selected Application Open Folder with Explorer Add Ja Copy Chri E ak Rename R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 27 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 5 Remove a file from the build target You can remove the specific file from the build target out of all the files added to the project Select the file to be removed from the build target on the
115. file 4 Current folder If path does not exist a warning will be output An error will occur if path is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category From the Common Options tab System include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category From the Assemble Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Assemble Options tab System include paths in the Preprocess category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Use whole include paths specified for build tool in the Preprocess category Example of use To search include files from the current folder folder D include the standard folder in that order describe as gt cx CF3746 ID include main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 438 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Japanese Chinese character control The Japanese Chinese character control option is as follows Xcharacter_set Xcharacter_set This option specifies the Japanese Chinese character code Specification format Xcharacter_ set code Interpretation when omitted The Japanese character code is handled as SuJIS Detailed d
116. file between the different projects or onto the main project or subproject in same project the file is copied not moved Note that the individual option set in the file are not retained d Adding a category You can add a category node by one of the following procedures The category node is added below the File node Select Add New Category from the Project menu Select Add New Category from the context menu of either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node Remarks 1 The default category name is New category 2 You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node e Moving a category You can move a category node by the following procedure The category node is moved below the File node Drag the category node you want to move and then drop it onto the destination Remarks 1 If you drop the category node in the main project or subproject the individual options set in the file in the category node are retained 2 If you drop the category node between the different projects or onto the main project or subproject in same project the category node is copied not moved Note that the individual option set in the file in the category node are not retained f Adding a folder You can add a folder using such as Explorer by the following procedure The folder is added below the File node The folder is added as a category Drag the folder using such as Explorer and drop it ont
117. file s property on the Property panel 6 When the Build tool generated files node is selected Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel 7 When the Startup node is selected Add Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 130 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project This menu is always disabled This menu is always disabled Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of t
118. folder The specified include path is searched with higher priority than the standard include file folder of CX The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CX is searched This corresponds to the option of the cx command The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified System include paths Change the specified order of the include paths which the system set during compiling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the option of the cx command The include path is displayed as the subproperty System include paths nu
119. format is shown below a CubeSuite Select the build tool node on the Project Tree panel and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel Select the hex format in the Hex file format property in the Hex Format category It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node b Command line Specify the format by the parameter of the Xhex_format option The specification format is shown below Xhex format format The items that can be specified as format are shown below Intel expanded hex format up to 1 MB Intel expanded hex format 32 bit address up to 4 GB Motorola S type hex format 32 bit address up to 4 GB Expanded Tektronix hex format up to 4 GB Motorola S type hex format standard address up to 16 MB R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 100 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 4 1 Intel expanded hex format The Intel expanded hex format file 20 bits consists of four records start address record expanded address record data record and end record The Intel expanded hex format file 82 bits consists of six recordsN start linear address record expanded linear start address record start address record expanded address record data record and end record Note Each record is output in ASCII code The file configuration in Intel expanded hex format is shown below Figure 3 1 File Configuration in Intel E
120. from the build mode list and click the Delete button The Message dialog box below will open Figure 2 95 Message Dialog Box Question Q0232001 P Delete build mode BuildModes C To continue with the operation click the OK button in the dialog box The selected build mode is deleted from the project Caution You cannot delete DefaultBuild R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 73 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 8 Set the current build options as the standard for the project On the Property panel if you add a change to the settings for the standard build options the value of the property will be displayed in boldface Figure 2 96 Property Panel After Changing Standard Build Option Execute Module Hex File A oh ode ame E Output File Type andPath Output file type Intermediate file output folder To make the build options for the currently selected project main project or subproject the standard build options remove the boldface select the Build tool node on the project tree and select Set to Default Build Option for Project from the context menu Figure 2 97 Set to Default Build Option for Project Item a c Build Tool 2h VESOESM Simu CP Pro ly GF Rebuild Project Shift F7 P gram Analy Rebuild Frojec i Eg Build Project F7 ak Set Link Order H Create Link Directive File The values of the properties after setting th
121. from the drop down list Restriction Always latest version Uses the latest version in the installed compiler which was installed packages Versions of the installed Uses the selected version in the compiler compiler packages package Latest compiler package The version of the compiler package to be used when Always latest version which was version which was installed is selected in the Using compiler package version property is displayed installed This setting is common to all the build modes This property is displayed only when Always latest version which was installed in the Using compiler package version property is selected Default The latest version of the installed compiler packages Changes not allowed 13 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Memo Add memos to the build tool Add one item in one line This setting is common to all the build modes The specified memo is displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 14 Others Other detailed information on the build tool is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 148 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite V
122. g Files of type Stack Size Specification File t t Cancel The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Stack Usage Tracer window select Load Stack Size Specification File from the File menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder containing the stack size specification file you wish to open 2 List of files This area displays a list of files matching the conditions selected in Look in area and Files of type area 3 File name area Specify the file name of the stack size specification file to open 4 Files of type area Select the type of file to open Stack Size Specification File txt Text format Function buttons Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 301 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE This appendix describes the detailed specifications of each command included in the build tool B 1 cx The cx generates files executable on the target system from source programs described in C language or assembly language When using the cx a single driver controls all phases from the processor to the object converter Processing of each phase is shown below 1 Compiler Performs processing of preprocess directives comment processing and optimization fo
123. generates the load module file that has only the rompsec section Control checking for errors Xromize_check_off This option omits error checking under ROMization under ROMization R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 490 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ROMization processing suppress specification The ROMization processing suppress specification option is as follows Xno_romize Xno_romize This option suppresses ROMization processing Specification format Xno_romize Interpretation when omitted ROMization processing is performed The following are linked ROMization area reservation code file except when specifying the Xno_stdlib option Startup routine cstart obj that contains copy function _rcopy call except when specifying the Xstartup or Xno_ startup option Detailed description This option suppresses ROMization processing The ROMization area reservation code file is not linked The startup routine cstartN obj that does not contain copy function _rcopy call is linked except when specifying the Xstartup or Xno_ startup option ROMization is a process whereby data that will be expanded in RAM is copied to ROM and a routine is added to copy this data from ROM into RAM when the application first starts If this option is specified in the application that does not have data with a default value the code can be reduced This
124. if path is omitted Example of use To search a device file from folder C NEC Tools32 dev describe as gt CX CF3746 Xdev_path C NECTools32 dev main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 457 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Library link control The library link control options are as follows L Xno_stdlib This option specifies the library file to be used during linking Specification format lstring string Interpretation when omitted Only the standard library mathematical library and standard startup routine are linked When the Xno_romize option is not specified the ROMization area reservation code file is linked Detailed description This option specifies library file libstring lib to be used during linking When the cx resolves an unresolved external symbol reference after linking all object module files the library file libstring lib is referenced An error will occur if string is omitted If this option and the L option are specified at the same time the library file is searched from the folder specified by the L option If the L option is not specified the library file is searched from the standard folder If the library file specified by this option cannot be found a message will not output and link processing will be Note continued If two or more library files are specified they are searched in th
125. in the currently opened project and their build modes and macro definitions is displayed Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and build modes that you wish to run a batch build and then click the Build Rebuild or Clean button Remark The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project Is run R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 80 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 5 Compile assemble link multiple files simultaneously If there are multiple build target files you can compile assemble and link all files simultaneously with a single cx command call this features is called simultaneous build An image of calling the cx command is shown below Example When build target files are aaa c bbb c and ccc c When a build is run simultaneously gt cx CF3746 aaa c bbb c ccc c lt a lmf is generated When a build is not run simultaneously gt cx CF3746 aaa c lt aaa obj is generated gt cx CF3746 bbb c lt bbb obj is generated gt cx CF3746 ccc c lt ccc obj is generated gt cx CF3746 aaa obj bbb obj ccc obj lt a lmf is generated Whether to run a
126. in the specified library file and then moves the object module file to the position immediately after the specified member Specification format ra member Interpretation when omitted Members are not replaced Detailed description This key replaces the specified object module file with the member having the same name in the specified library file and then moves the object module file to the position immediately after member member If the member with the same name as the specified object module file does not exist in the specified library file the object module file is added to the end of the library file If member is omitted processing will be stopped Example of use To replace sub obj with the member having the same name in library file libmain lib and then move sub obj to the position immediately after member main obj describe as gt lb ra main obj libmain 1lib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 543 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ru When the specified object module file has been updated more recently than the member having the same name in the specified library file this key replaces the member with the specified object module file Specification format Interpretation when omitted Members are not replaced Detailed description When the specified object module file has been updated more recently than the member
127. initial value gp indicates the start address of data attribute section the sdata attribute section 32 KB Lower address Therefore the execution efficiency and object efficiency are enhanced if more data is allocated to the sdata attribute or sbss attribute section which can be accessed with a single instruction To allocate data the user can intentionally specify the allocation location by using the pragma section directive in the case of a C source or by using the section quasi directive in the case of an assembler source If a threshold value of the size of the data to be allocated to the sdata attribute or sbss attribute section is prepared and if data of a size less than the threshold value can be allocated to the sdata attribute or sbss attribute section more data can be allocated without having to modify the source program R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 526 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE This specification is made by the Xsdata option The value specified as num of this option is the data size so it would be convenient to have information that can be used as a yardstick This information is output by the Xsdata_info option If the Xsdata_info option is specified information that can be used as a yardstick for num of the Xsdata option b Explanation of output information The examples of the output information when this option is specified when an executabl
128. is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Displayed warning message in the Warning Message category From the Individual Compile Options tab Displayed warning message in the Warning Message category Example of use To output warning message W0566002 describe as gt cx CF3746 Xwaning 66002 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 420 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xno_warning This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Specification format Xno_waning num num Xno_waning numl1 num2 Interpretation when omitted Severe warning messages are output Same as when Xwarning_level 1 is specified Detailed description This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Specify the error numbers as num num1 and num2 If the error number that does not exist it will be ignored An error will occur if num num7 or num2 is omitted If num1 num2 is specified it is assumed that error numbers within the range have been specified The error number specified by this option is the rightmost 5 digits of the 7 digit number following the W See CubeSuite Message for error numbers This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Undisplayed warning message in the Warning Message
129. is selected How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 1022 characters External variable Specify the external variables symbol name excluding _ assigned to the register assigned to the r16 This corresponds to the Xr16 option of the cx command register This property is not displayed when 26 register mode Xreg_mode 26 in the Register mode property in the Register Mode category from the Common Options tab is selected How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 1022 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 163 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE External variable Specify the external variables symbol name excluding _ assigned to the register assigned to the r17 This corresponds to the Xr17 option of the cx command register How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Specify the external variables symbol name excluding _ assigned to the register Up to 1022 characters External variable assigned to the r18 register This corresponds to the Xr18 option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 1022 characters External variable assigned to the r19 register Specify the external variables symbol name excluding _ assigned to the register This corresponds to the Xr19 option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box Re
130. is the number of references of the static variable in the function Size This is the byte size of the static variable in the function Function name This is the name of the function that the static variable is defined Start of function information Function name This is the name of the function If the number of references is 0 is prepended indicating that it is the unused function Start address This is the start address that the function is defined Function size This is the byte size of the function File name The name of the file in which the static variable in the function is defined is output with its path Number of references This is the number of references of the function Stack size This is the byte size of the amount of stack used by the function File name 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 The name of the file in which the function is defined is output with its path R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 99 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 4 Hex File This section explains the hex file The hex file is the file to which a load module file is converted in hex format The following hex formats can be specified Intel expanded hex format Motorola S type hex format Expanded Textronix hex format 1 How to output With CX the hex file is output by default The method for setting the hex
131. is used when the GP symbol value is defined from among the TP symbol that already exists If a base symbol name is specified the offset value from the TP symbol value will be the GP symbol value The following characters can be used only 0 9 A Z a z _ This property is displayed only when GP symbol GP_SYMBOL in the Type property is selected How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 1022 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 255 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Address Specify the symbol to allocate the section If this field is blank the address is considered automatically by the linker How to change Directly enter in the text box 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF hexadecimal number Specify the alignment conditions of the symbol Alignment value When the odd number value is specified it changes to the even number value by automatically adding one If this field is blank the value is considered as 0x4 by the linker How to change Directly enter in the text box 0x0 to OxFF hexadecimal number Segment name Specify the segment name that will be referenced by TP and GP symbol values The specified segment name is displayed as the subproperty This property is not displayed when EP symbol EP_SYMBOL in the Type property is selected
132. microsoft Frontpage Microsoft Silverlight Microsoft SOL Server Compact Edition O Microsoft Sync Framework 2 x gt e eE ONEC Electronics CubeSuite O NetMeeting Online Services 9 Outlook Express Reference Assemblies Uninstall Information O Windows Desktop Search O Windows Live O Windows Live SkyDrive 9 Windows Media Connect 2 O Windows Media Player O Windows NT WindowsUpdate 3 O xerox a MSM Gaming Zone My Computer le name ff Program ese ka 4 hen iles of type Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select a file and then select Open with Selected Application from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the application to open the file is stored Program folder for Windows XP C Program Files is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type 3 File name area Specify the executable file name of the application to open the file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 287 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Specify the executable file type of the application to open the file Program exe Executable fo
133. mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder The specified include path is searched with higher priority than the standard include file folder of CX The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CX is searched This corresponds to the option of the cx command The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Change the specified order of the include paths which the system set during assembling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This c
134. must not be specified for the different function names The size of the branch table byte is calculated as shown below maximum ID value 1 entry size of branch table The address of the branch table must be set with consideration for this If this is not taken into account the branch table could overlap with another section causing an error When execution branches to the body of a function the actual function address is obtained by referencing the offset of the ID value from the beginning of the created branch table and then execution branches For example when functions func_flashO func_flash1 and func_flash2 are allocated to the flash area and they are called from the boot area describe as follows in the boot area When describing in C language void dummy pragma asm ext func func flash0 0 sext func func flashi 1 Sextet tune func flash2 2 pragma endasm When describing in assembly language Sext func func flasho 0 sext func func flashi 1 Sext func func flash2 2 It is recommended to describe these ext_func control instructions in one file and include this file in all source files by using the include control instruction or include directive when describing in C language in order to prevent missing descriptions or the occurrence of contradictions i e to prevent the error of specifying the different ID values for the same function name or specifying the same ID value for t
135. names Hame Specihes the section name The following characters can be used only 0 9 A Z az AN R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 19 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Click Add Segment to add a new segment NewSegment_XxXxX directly below the row selected in the list XXX 0 to 255 in decimal numbers Edit the items in the Segment Section detail area By default Attribute is set to Executable RX if added to the internal ROM area or non mapping area to Read Write RW if added to the internal RAM area or to Read only R if added to the DataFlash area Caution When a section row is selected in the list the Add Segment button is invalid Figure 2 9 Add Segment Segment Section list Segment Section detall Memory Mame Start Address EndAddress O Segment SE Internal ROM OxOQO000000 OxQ00 Fr Name NewS egment_O SCONST Attribute E xecutable R x D sepp Start address HEH MAXIMUM memory size Hole size HEH 3 pro_epi_runtime Filing value Hes F tert Alignment value HEH E Non Mapping Ux00080000 O01 FEFFE SE DataFlash Ux02000000 OxO200 Ht i CONST e const Non Mapping Ux02008000 UshedF5ttt BE Internal RAM OxfedF6000 Oxfedttit Name Specifies the segment name The following characters can be used only 0 9 A Z az AN Click Add Section to add a new section NewSection_XXxX directly below the row selected in the list XX
136. num The range that can be specified for num is 0x0 to OXxFFFFFFFE An abort error will occur if a value outside the range is specified An error will occur if num is omitted Example of use To regard the offset of the address to be output as 0x10000 describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex offset 0x10000 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 402 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_null This option generates as many null characters as the size of the section of data without an initial value Specification format Interpretation when omitted All codes are converted in hex format and the unused area is filled with OxFFFF and output Detailed description This option generates as many null characters 0 as the size of the section with the section type NOBITS and section attribute A section for data for which no initial value is specified such as the bss and sbss section This option can not be specified together with the Xhex_fill option Example of use To generate as many null characters as the size of the section with the section type NOBITS and section attribute A describe as gt CX CF3746 xXhex null main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 403 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_symtab This option converts the symbol table and outputs it Specification format Xh
137. of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Commands executed after assemble processing Specify the command to be executed after assemble processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after assemble processing number of defined items Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button How to change For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the assemble option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the assemble options group How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Str
138. option controls generating floating point calculation instructions Specification format Xfloat type Interpretation when omitted If the target device specified by the C option has FPU floating point calculation instructions are generated Additionally the FPU math support library will be linked In other cases the target device specified by the C option does not have an FPU or the C option is not specified and the Xcommon option is specified floating point calculation instructions are not generated and runtime library call instructions are generated Additionally the FPU math support library will not be linked Detailed description This option controls generating floating point calculation instructions Specify this option if the target device has an FPU The items that can be specified as type are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified Generates runtime library call instructions for floating point calculations Additionally the FPU math support library will not be linked Generates floating point calculation instructions of FPU floating point unit for floating point calculations Additionally the FPU math support library will be linked If this item is specified for the target device including devices other than V850E2V3 that does not have the FPU a warning will be output and this item will be ignored An error will occur if type is omitted If the target devi
139. options for the link phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various link options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure 2 51 Property Panel Link Options Tab Property A Le Property El Debug Informabon Delete debug information El Input File Use standard startup routine Yes Output File Output folder 2B UildModeN amez Output file name Project ame Inf Output relocatable object module file No Library Using libraries Using libranes 0 System libraries System libranes U Additional library paths Additional library paths O System library paths System library paths 0 Link standard library es Link Map Symbol Information Others AeA eo Delete debug information Selects whether to delete debug information line number information and global pomter tables when generating an load module file Common Options A Hex Output Options Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab 2 7 1 Add a user library Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Adding a user library is made with the Using libraries property in the Library category Figure 2 52 Using libraries Property Additional library paths Ad
140. output does not have the offset The address is output from address 0 Detailed description This option outputs the original address offset by num The range that can be specified for num is 0x0 to OXxFFFFFFFE An abort error will occur if a value outside the range is specified An error will occur if num is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Specify offset of output address in the Hex Format category From the Hex Output Options tab Offset of output address in the Hex Format category Example of use To regard the offset of the address to be output as 0x10000 describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex offset 0x10000 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 505 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_null This option generates as many null characters as the size of the section of data without an initial value Specification format Interpretation when omitted All codes are converted in hex format and the unused area is filled with OxFFFF and output Detailed description This option generates as many null characters 0 as the size of the section with the section type NOBITS and section attribute A section for data for which no initial value is specified such as the bss and sbss section This option can not be specified together with the Xhex_fill option This o
141. outputting far jump for an assembler source file Specification format Interpretation when omitted Assembly is performed as a jarl or jr instruction Detailed description For an assembler source file this option assumes that all jarl and jr instructions described in the source are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and assembling is performed If you wish to control individual instructions add jarl22 jarl32 or jr22 jarl22 to the source This option does not affect the jump instruction If this option is specified for a C source file that will be ignored without displaying a warning This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Use 32 bit branch instruction in the Output Code category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Use 32 bit branch instruction in the Output Code category Example of use To assume that all jarl and jr instructions described in the source are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and perform assembling describe as gt cx CF3746 Xasm_far_ jump main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 441 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link control The link control option is as follows Xflash Xflash This option generates the load module file for the flash area Specification format Xflash file Interpretation when omitted When the boot flash re link function is u
142. paths are added by the following procedure Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from this tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from the Assemble Options tab Paths displayed in the System include paths property from the Assemble Options tab This corresponds to the option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Assembles using the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used No Does not use the include path specified in the property of the build tool to be used Specify the name of the macro to be defined Macro definition Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the cx command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 218 of
143. project tree and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various hex output options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure 2 58 Property Panel Hex Output Options Tab Property A Le Property El Output File Output folder for hex file ABuildModeN amez Hes file name 4Projecth ame hes El Hex Format Hex file format Intel expanded hes format M one Specify converted address range No Converted sections Converted sectione 0 Specify masimum length of block record No Specify offset of output address No Initialize section of data without initial value to zerg No Output folder for hex fie Specifies the tolder for storing a hex file This option corresponds to the o option of the cx command Common Options 4 Compile Options lt Link Options Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Hex Output category on the Common Options tab 2 9 1 Set the output of a hex file A hex file is generated by default after generating the ROMized load module Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output a hex file is made with the Output File category Figure 2 59 Output File Category buildM ode anes Project amez hex Folder F name Hex file 1 Set the output folder Settin
144. section allocated to each output section Address This is the start address of the output section and input section Size This is the start address of the output section and input section GpCommon will be displayed for that section If the object module file to which the input section belongs is the object module file in the library file the library file name is displayed in format object module file name library file name 10 Input file This is the name of the object module file that the input section belongs to nil is displayed for sections generated by linking and for symtab strtab shstrtab and the like gener ated by assembly If the identifier indicating the object is tentatively defined by external linkage for assembly language an area that is secured by a comm quasi directive this will be an area common to all files and Common o R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 96 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 3 Symbol Information File This section explains the symbol information file The symbol information file is a text format file that allocation information for a variable global variable static variable in a file and static variable in a function and function defined in a C source file is described 1 How to output The methods for outputting the symbol information file are shown below a CubeSuite Select the build tool node on the
145. sections h Interrupt level settings No conversion is performed because CA850 and CX use the same interrupt level settings i Coding format to disable interrupts No conversion is performed because CA850 and CX use the same method to disable interrupts R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 564 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE j Coding format for interrupt exception handlers The format for interrupt handlers in CA850 is shown below pragma interrupt interrupt request name function name allocation method interrupt Tunction definition or fanction declaration __ multi_interrupt function definition or function declaration The format for interrupt handlers in CX is shown below pragma interrupt interrupt request name function name allocation method option The function specifiers __interrupt and __multi_interrupt have been discontinued and multiplex interrupts are specified via an option For this reason these specifiers are deleted pramga interrupt is converted to the CX specification If the function has the function specifier _ multi interrupt then the multi option will be set in pragma interrupt If there is no pragma interrupt declaration and only the function specifier has been coded then pragma interrupt NO_VECT is output CA850 source 1 pragma interrupt interrupt request name function name allocation method __ interrupt function definition 2
146. select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected The file types to be displayed are as follows C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Link directive file dir dr Symbol information file sfg R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 235 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Library file lib a Object module file obj o Text file txt 2 Subfolder level to search area Directly enter the number of levels of the subfolder to be added to the project 1 is displayed by default Remark Up to 10 decimal number can be specified When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip Fewer than 0 or more than 10 values cannot be More than 10 subfolder levels have been specified specified Specify in decimal A number in other than decimal or a string has been specified Function buttons Adds the folder that was dragged and dropped and the files in that folder to the project And then closes this dialog box Cancel Does not add the folder and files and then closes this dialog box 0 not add the folder and files and then closes this Does not add the folder and files and then closes this dialog box 0 box Crn Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev
147. set for the selected projects The execution result of the cleans is displayed on the Output panel After the cleans are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 268 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Go to the Location dialog box This dialog box is used to move the caret to the designated location Figure A 38 Go to the Location Dialog Box Go to the Location The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Move To Description of each area 1 Line number Symbol area Specify the line number decimal number or symbol name of the location to which the caret is moved You can directly enter the characters into the text box or select from the input history in the drop down list maximum numbers of the history 10 Function buttons ee the designated location at the middle of the target panel display and moves the caret there Cancels the criteria and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 269 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Progress Status dialog box
148. setting is retained R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 267 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Build mode This area displays the build modes which the main project and subprojects have c Defined macros For the combination of the main project and subprojects and their build modes the defined macros which have been set in the Compile Options tab and the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel are separated with and displayed The defined macro in the compile option comes before the one in assemble option They are separated with and displayed Function buttons Rebuild Clean Closes this dialog box and runs builds of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the builds is displayed on the Output panel After the builds are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Closes this dialog box and runs rebuilds of the selected projects in the respective build modes The execution result of the rebuilds is displayed on the Output panel After the rebuilds are complete the build mode configuration restores to the one before this dialog box was opened If any project is not selected this button will be disabled Closes this dialog box and deletes the files which are built in the respective build modes
149. sorting external variables Selsect whether to perform inline expansion of functions strcpy stremp Memcpy and memset calls with regarding the alignment conditions of the array including character strings and the structure as 4 bytes This improves the execution speed of the program to be generated but it increases the code size This corresponds to the Xinline_strcpy option of the cx command This property is displayed only when No in the Structure packing property in the Output Code category is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xinline_strcpy Performs inline expansion of functions strcpy strcmp memcpy p and memset calls Does not specify inline expansion of functions strcpy stremp memcpy and memset calls Specify whether to perform prologue epilogue processing of functions through runtime library calls This corresponds to the Xpro_epi_runtime option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Speed Precedence Ospeed in the Level of optimization property in the Optimization category is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Performs prologue epilogue processing of the function through runtime library calls No Does not perform prologue epilogue processing Xpro_epi_runtime off of functions through runtime library calls Select whether to prohibit repl
150. specified This corresponds to the Xsfg option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xsfg in the Output symbol information file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Specify the symbol information file name Symbol information file name The extension other than sfg cannot be specified If the extension is omitted sfg is automatically added The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank the file is output under the project file name with the extension replaced by sfg This corresponds to the Xsfg option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xsfg in the Output symbol information file property is selected Default ProjectName sfg How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 259 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 177 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output optimized Select whether to sort variables in the order starting from highest use frequency for each allocation information section determine whether they can be allocated to the tidata byte tidata word sidata sedata or sdata section and output the optimum allocation i
151. symbal sEP_SyMBOL Address HEH Alignment value Segment name Segment name U Hame Specifies the symbol name The following characters can be used only Add symbol Delete symbol OF AZ az A Symbols can also be added Click Add symbol to add a new symbol NewSymbol_ XXX directly below the row selected in the list XXX 0 to 255 in decimal numbers Edit the items in the Symbol detail area By default Type is set to TP symbol TP_SYMBOL Figure 2 12 Add Symbol Symbol list Symbol detail Type Sddess El Symbol tp Test TF symbol TP_SyMBOL Name NewS ymbol_0 NewSymbol O TP symbol 7TP_SiMBOL Type L tulle a ae Gop VATA GP symboll GP_ SYMBOL Address hep DATA EF spmboll EP_ SYMBOL Alignment value Segment name Segment namel Hame Specifies the symbol name a The following characters can be used only pad symbol Delete symbol 0 3 AZ az _ After editing the segments sections and symbols click the Generate button A link directive file named project name dir is generated based on the specified memory segments sections and symbol allocation information and then added to the project R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CtENESAS Page 21 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The link directive file is generated in the project folder The link directive file that has been generated is also shown on the project tree under the File node Figure 2
152. symbol information of load module file for the boot area boot Imf is referred and link processing is performed The branch table is created at address 0x300 ROMization processing is also performed by default gt cx CF3746 Xno startup Xstartup cstartN f obj flash asm Xlink output flash 1lmf Xflash boot 1lmf Xflash_ext_table 0x300 Xlink directive directive f dir oromp f lmf If ROMization processing is not performed specify as follows gt cx CF3746 Xno startup Xstartup cstartN _f obj flash asm Xno_romize oflash 1lmf Xilash boot imi Xflash ext Cable 0x200 Xlink_directive directive_f dir Cautions 1 The load module file for the boot area must be the file before ROMization processing 2 The address specified by the Xflash_ext_table option must be the same as the value that is used in the boot area and flash area R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CE NESAS Page 525 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 1 7 Cautions This section explains cautions about the cx command 1 How to use the Xsdata_info option This section describes how to use the Xsdata_info option With CubeSuite on the Property panel from the Link Options tab in the Other category set the Display GP information property to Yes Xsdata_info a Function Information that can be used as a yardstick for parameter num of the Xsdata option is output to the standard output With CubeSuite it is output on the Output pa
153. symbol symbol as the entry point address value it is used when hex conversion is performed for the load module file to be generated An error will occur if symbol does not exist An error will occur if symbol is omitted Example of use To regard the value of symbol _my_ start as the entry point address value for the load module file to be generated describe as gt cx CF3746 Xentry_address my start main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 374 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xrelinkable_object This option generates the relocatable object module file Specification format Xrelankable object Interpretation when omitted The cx tries to generate the executable object module file If an unresolved external reference remains after linking an error is output and linking is stopped At this time the load module file is not generated Detailed description This option generates the relocatable object module file If this option is specified a message is not output and linking is completed normally if an unresolved external reference remains after linking If the object module file generated by the cx is specified as the target for relocation use this option to generate the target object module file for relocation If this option is specified only the types and attributes in the segment directive section in the link directive will be valid
154. the Xrompsec_data option of the cx command The specified section name is displayed as the subproperty Default Data sections included in rompsec section number of specified items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1022 characters Up to 1024 items can be specified Specify the text section included in the rompsec section Text sections included in rompsec section Add one section in one line Each of the specified text sections is included in the rompsec section in descending order This corresponds to the Xrompsec_ text option of the cx command The specified section name is displayed as the subproperty Default Data sections included in text section number of specified items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1022 characters Up to 1024 items can be specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 186 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Others Other detailed information on ROMization is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when Yes in the Output ROMized load module file property in the Output File category is selected Ignore ROMization error
155. the ext_func quasi directive in the assembler source file When the load module file for the boot area is generated the load module file before ROMization processing must be saved This is because this file is specified by the Xflash option when the load module file for the flash area is generated Consequently if this option is not specified with the Xflash option at the same time it must be specified with the Xlink_output option if ROMization is performed or the Xno_romize option if ROMization is not performed at the same time This option can not be specified together with the Xrelinkable_object option An operation fault will occur if the load module file that has been generated using the Xrelinkable_object option is input This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Branch table address in the Flash Correspondence category Example of use To generate load module file for the boot area boot Imf with 0x200 as the start address of the branch table describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 479 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xflash This option generates the load module file for the flash area Specification format Xflash file Interpretation when omitted When the boot flash re link function is used the load module file for the boot area is generated When the boot flash re l
156. the assemble option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 223 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File Information tab This tab shows the detailed information on each file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 File Information 2 Notes Figure A 19 Property Panel File Information Tab Property c_ main c Property El File Information Save With absolute path writable Hotes File name This is the name of this file Change the file name in the project tree panel Description of each category 1 File Information The detailed information on the file is displayed and the configuration can be changed File name The file name is displayed Change the file name on the project tree How to change Changes not allowed Relative path The relative path of the file from the project folder is displayed Default The relative path of the file from the project folder How to change Changes not allowed Absolute path The absolute path of the file is displayed Default The absolute path of the file How to change Changes not allowed Save with absolute path Select whether to save the file location with the absolute path Default No How to change Select from the
157. the specified library file This key replaces the specified object module file with the member having the same name in the specified library file and then moves the object module file to the position immediately after the specified member When the specified object module file has been updated more recently than the member having the same name in the specified library file this key replaces the member with the specified object module file Member output specification This key outputs the names of the members which exist in the specified library file to the standard output Object generate control This key extracts the member which exists in the specified library file and gen erates the object module file with the same name Classification Message output suppress specification Execution status output speci This option outputs the execution status of the librarian This option does not output messages fication Command file specification This option specifies a command file Error output control This option adds and saves error messages to the specified file This option overwrites and saves error messages to the specified file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 535 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Version display specification The version display specification key is as follows V V This key displays the version information of the librarian Specifi
158. to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Output folder in the Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Common Options tab Output file name in the Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Link Options tab Output folder in the Output File category From the Link Options tab Output file name in the Output File category Example of use To output the load module file with sample Imf as the file name describe as gt cx CF3746 osample lmf main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 453 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xtemp_path This option specifies the temporary folder Specification format Xtemp_path path Interpretation when omitted The temporary folder is determined according to the following sequence 1 Folder specified by environmental variable TEMP 2 Folder specified by environmental variable TMP 3 Current folder Detailed description This option specifies path as the folder for generating temporary files that are used internally If path does not exist a warning will be output and the temporary folder will be determined 1 Folder specified by environmental variable TEMP 2 Folder specified by environmental variable TMP 3 Current folder An error will occur if path is omitted Example of use To specify folder D tmp as the temporary folder de
159. to the specified core only R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 200 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Individual Compile Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on a C source file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Common Options tab and Compile Options tab When the settings are changed from these tabs the properties are displayed in boldface 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Debug Information Optimization Optimization Details Preprocess C Language Character Encoding Output Code Output File Assemble List Error Output Warning Message Others Remark This tab is displayed only when Yes in the Set individual compile option property in the Build category from the Build Settings tab is selected R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 201 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 17 Property Panel Individual Compile Options Tab Property c_ main c Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information El Optimization Level of optimization El Optimization D etads Sort external variables Yes g Default Optimization O default No Perform inline expansion of strcpy strompy memcpy memset Mo Use prologueepilogue library Yes
160. use To output the descriptions of the source converter options to the standard error output describe as gt cnvsg50 h R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 557 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Character code specification The character code specification option is as follows C This option specifies the Japanese character code Specification format c code Interpretation when omitted The Japanese character code is handled as SuJIS Detailed description This option specifies the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the input file The items that can be specified as code are shown below If any other item is specified that will be ignored without displaying a warning Does not process the Japanese character code process as ASCII euc EUC Japanese sjis SJIS An error will occur if code is omitted Example of use To specify EUC as the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the input file describe as gt cnv850 main c c euc R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 558 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE List file specification The list file specification option is as follows This option specifies the list file that I O file names are described Specification format Interpretation when omit
161. when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 259 characters 8 Warning Message The detailed information on warning messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed Displayed warning Specify the warning message number to be displayed regardless of the warning level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 02042 02107 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 02222 02554 02699 02782 If the same number is specified on the Undisplayed warning message property and this property the number specified on this property takes precedence This corresponds to the Xwarning option of the cx command Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters Undisplayed warning Specify the warning message number to not be displayed regardless of the warning level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 02042 02107 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 02222 02554 02699 02782 If the same number is specified on the Displayed warning message property and this property the number specified on th
162. with the extension replaced by map The link map file to be output differs depending on whether the Xno_romize option is specified as follows When the Xno_romize option is specified The link map file is output after link processing When the Xno_romize option is not specified The link map file is output after ROMization processing This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Output link map file in the Link Map category From the Link Options tab Output folder for link map file in the Link Map category From the Link Options tab Link map file name in the Link Map category Example of use To output link map file smp1 map after link processing describe as gt cx CF3746 Xmap smp map main obj Xno_romize To output link map file smp2 map after ROMization processing describe as gt cx CF3746 Xmap smp map main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 464 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Generating object module file control The generating object module file control option is as follows Xrelinkable_object Xrelinkable_object This option generates the relocatable object module file Specification format Xrelinkable object Interpretation when omitted The cx tries to generate the executable object module file If an unresolved external reference remains after linking
163. 0 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xcommon This option specifies that an object module file common to the various devices is generated Specification format Xcommon series Interpretation when omitted If the C option is specified the behavior is in accordance with that specification Otherwise an error will occur Detailed description This option specifies that an object module file common to the various devices is generated When this option is specified only instructions are used in the instruction set architecture of the target and common magic number series that supports the instruction set architecture is embed into the object module file The items that can be specified as series are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified v850e It is possible to link to the model with the instruction set architecture superior to V850E V850E V850E2 or V850E2V3 which is specified as the target device V850E2V3 which is specified as the target device v850e2 It is possible to link to the model with the instruction set architecture superior to V850E2 V850E2 or v850e2v3 It is possible to link to the model with the V850E2V3 instruction set architecture which is specified as a target device If the instruction set architecture of the target device is V850E2V3 we recommend specifying this item to get the best performance An error will occur if series is omitted If this o
164. 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Command file specification The command file specification option is as follows This option specifies a command file Specification format Interpretation when omitted Only the options and file names specified on the command line are recognized Detailed description This option handles file as a command file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted See 2 Startup from a command file for details about a command file Example of use To handle command as a command file describe as gt cx command R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 489 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 4 ROMize options The types and explanations for options of the ROMize phase are shown below Table B 7 ROMize Options ROMization processing Xno_romize This option suppresses ROMization processing suppress specification ROMization area reserva Xrompcrt This option specifies the ROMization area reservation tion code file specification code file rompsec section control Xrompsec_ start This option specifies the start address of the rompsec sec tion Xrompsec_data This option specifies the data section included in the rompsec section Xrompsec_text This option specifies the text section included in the rompsec section Xrompsec_ only This option
165. 010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 8 Save the build results to a file You can save the execution results of the build output messages of the build tool that displayed on the Output panel Select the Build Tool tab on the panel and then select Save Output Build Tool As from the File menu The Save As dialog box will open Figure 2 111 Save As Dialog Box Save in O fem DefaultBuild sub My R ecent Documents La Desktop My Documents My Computer File name Output Build Tool bet Hy Network Save as type Text file txt In the dialog box specify the file to be saved and then click the Save button R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 84 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 9 Delete intermediate files and generated files You can delete all the intermediate files and generated files output by running a build hereafter referred to as clean Running a clean is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 15 4 Change the file build target project 1 When running a clean of the entire project From the Build menu select Clean Project Figure 2 112 Clean Project Item Fy Shift F7 CES Rapid Build oy Update Dependencies E Build sample t Rebuild sample a Clean sample ai Update Dependencies of sample wf D Build Mode Settings EL Batch Build Ty Build Op
166. 0UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 326 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If the instruction set architecture of the device specified by the C option is superior to the one specified by this option a warning is output and parameter series of this option is replaced by the instruction set architecture of the device specified by the C option This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Output common object module file for various devices in the Output File Type and Path category Example of use To embed the magic number common to models with the instruction set architectures superior to V850E into the object module file to be generated describe as gt cx Xcommon v850e c main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 327 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xdev_path This option specifies the folder to search device files Specification format Xdev_path path Interpretation when omitted The device file is searched from the standard device file folder Detailed description This option searches a device file from folder path If the folder as path does not exist or if the device file specified by the C option cannot be found a warning will be output and the standard device file folderN te will be searched If it cannot be found an error will occur Note
167. 0o00 oxofffc008 oxofffc008 oxofffc008 oxofffc008 2 SIZE Ox00000004 0x00000004 Ox0000000a Ox0000000a 0x000001e0 0x000001e0 0x00000082 Ox00000076 Ox0000000a Ox00000002 0x00000008 O0x00000008 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 O0x00000000 Ox00000000 Description 10 INPUT FILE D lib cstartN obj nil callt obj D lib libc lib D lib cstartN obj D debug test obj hdwinit obj D lib libc lib D lib cstartN obj D lib cstartN obj D lib cstartN obj This is the name of the output segment configuring the load module file to be generated The name of the output segment is not stored the load module file to be generated R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 2rCENESAS Page 95 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Number 2 Segment attribute The segment attributes and their meanings are as follows R Readable W Writable X Executable Address This is the start address of the output segment Size hexadecimal number This is the size of the memory including the alignment condition between the sections and the align hole 5 Size decimal number ka This is the size of the memory including the alignment condition between the sections and the align hole Output section This is the name of the output section configuring the load module file to be generated Input section This is the name of the input
168. 1 00 CENESAS Page 507 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_rom_less This option does not use the information of the internal ROM area when the hex file is filled Specification format Interpretation when omitted When this option is omitted and the Xhex_fill option is specified and parameter start and size are omitted the internal ROM area defined by the device file is filled Detailed description This option does not use the information of the internal ROM area defined by the device file when the hex file is filled Specify this option when the Xhex_fill option is specified and the information of the internal ROM area defined by the device file is not used This option must be specified together with the Xhex_fill option Besides parameter start and size of the Xhex_fill option must be specified An error will occur if the Xhex_fill option and parameter start and size is omitted A warning will not be output even if parameter start and size of the Xhex_fill option exceeds the internal ROM area This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Warn internal ROM overflow in the Others category Example of use Not to use the information of the internal ROM area defined by the device file when the hex file is filled describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 508 of 577 Oct 01 2010
169. 1 00 CENESAS Page 93 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS ltem Description Number 4 Line number This is the number of the line This is expressed in a decimal number Source program This is the source program of the line If instruction expansion is performed for the instruction at that line the disassembly of the array of machine language instructions generated after the instruction expansion is displayed after 3 2 Link Map File This section explains the link map file The link map has information of the link result It can be referenced for information such as the section s allocation addresses 1 How to output The methods for outputting the link map file are shown below a CubeSuite Select the build tool node on the Project Tree panel and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel To output the link map file select Yes Xmap in the Output link map file property in the Link Map category Specify the output destination in the Output folder for link map file property and Link map file name property It is also shown on the project tree under the Build tool generated files node b Command line When the Xmap option is specified the link map file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the load module file name with the extension replaced by map Also the file name can be specified by the parameter of the Xmap option The link ma
170. 1 00 sQENESAS Page 236 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Figure A 25 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Displayed warning message and Undisplayed warning message in the Warning Message category Format of build option list and Other additional options property in the Others category From the Compile Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Assemble Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Link Options tab Entry symbol and Other additional options in the Others category From the ROMize Options tab Start symbol of rompsec section in the Section category From the Create Library Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options tab Other additional options in the Others category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Other additional options in the Others category In the Link Directive File Generation dialog box select a segment or section in the S
171. 1 Set a startup routine for details about using other than the standard startup routine b Add a folder Drag the folder from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty space below the project tree The Add Folder And File dialog box will open Remark You can also add multiple folders to the project at the same time by dragging multiple folders at same time and dropping them onto the project tree Caution When the folder with the name that is more than 200 characters is dropped the folder is added to the project tree as a category with the name that 201st character and after are deleted R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 23 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 15 Add Folder and File Dialog Box Add Folder and File File type Two or more selections C source file c Header file hz Inc Assemble file asm s Link directive file dir dr Symbol mtormation file stg Library file lib a Object module file obj o Text file bet Sublolder level to search In the dialog box select the types of the files to be added to the project and specify the number of levels of the subfolder to be added to the project And then click the OK button Remark You can select multiple file types by left clicking while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key If nothing is selected it is assumed that all types are selected The folder is
172. 1101 Nicholson Road Newmarket Ontario L3Y 9C3 Canada Tel 1 905 898 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628 585 100 Fax 44 1628 585 900 Renesas Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 Dusseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 65030 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 204 205 AZIA Center No 1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd Pudong District Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5877 1818 Fax 86 21 6887 7858 7898 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2886 9318 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co Ltd 7F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel 886 2 8175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 1 harbourFront Avenue 06 10 keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6278 8001 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 JIn Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd
173. 13 Project Tree Panel After Generating Link Directive File Project Tree A Fin Configurator Design Tool E Code Generator Design Tool AS Cs Build Tool che VESOE2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool lh File ral Build tool generated files i Startup C mair dir sample dir Caution The generated link directive file will be a build target If a link directive file has already been registered to the project then the file will be removed from the build target R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 22 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 3 Add a file to a project Files can be added to a project by the following methods Adding an existing file Creating and adding an empty file 1 Adding an existing file a Add an individual files Drag the file from Explorer or the like and drop it onto the empty space below the project tree The file is added below the File node Figure 2 14 Project Tree Panel File Drop Location Project Tree B uPOVOF3506 Microcontroller A Fin Configurator Design Tool A CX Build Tool ee Y8SOE2M Simulator Debug Tool qb Program Analyzer Analyze Tool LLLI ME QB Programmer Flash Programming Tool 6 0 File Fi Startup Drop the file here Caution To add other than the standard startup routine drop the file onto the Startup node See 2 3
174. 2 The outpu file is not a target for clean The macros used in the output file are shown below Table 2 2 Type of Command Macros Table 2 3 Type of Flag Macros Type of Macro Corresponding Command R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 86 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Type of Macro Type of Macro Macro Corresponding Command LDFLAGS_CORE option Linker only used when linking each core in cases where the project uses a device supporting multi core ROM ROMPFLAGS option ROMPFLAGS option ROMization processor Remark The above macros cannot be used with files for which individual options are specified Table 2 4 Type of File Macros halen OBJS Relative paths from the project of object files Passed to the dependency file of link library processing generated during compilation assembly it is passed command and command during link library processing OBJS_core number Relative paths from the project of Passed to the dependency file of link library processing object files generated during compilation assembly it is command and command only used when linking each core in passed during link library processing cases where the project uses a device supporting multi core core number CMN for processing of common core PEcore number for processing of each core LIBS Relative paths from the project of library files Passed to link and library processing commands e g lI op
175. 2 functions called directly by the selected function Total Stack Size Displays the total stack size including the stack size of callee functions in bytes Frame Size Displays the frame size not including the stack size of callee functions in bytes Additional Margin Displays the value to mandatorily added to frame size in bytes File Displays the file name The table below shows the meaning of the icon displayed to the left of the string representing the function name The function directly called by a given function with the largest total stack size Information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modi fied via the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file The stack usage tracer has not acquired any stack information for this function Other than the above a Context menu Select a function in this area and then right click with the mouse The context menu described below appears Adjust Stack Size Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function Sort List by Changes the function display order in the list display area the Changes the function display order in the list display area display order in the list display area Additional Margin Sort by additional margin 5 Message display area Display operation logs of the stack usage tracer R20UT02
176. 2 15 6 Change the build mode 3 Change the setting of the build mode Select the build tool node on the project tree and change the build options and macro definition settings on the Property panel Remark Creating a build mode is regarded a project change When closing the project you will be asked to confirm whether or not to save the build mode 2 15 6 Change the build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the build you can collectively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and macro definition settings every time 1 When changing the build mode for the main project or subprojects Select the Build tool node of the target project on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select the build mode to be changed to on the Build Mode property in the Build Mode category Figure 2 92 Build mode Property 2 When changing the build mode for the entire project Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 71 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 93 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode Ap
177. 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xstartup This option specifies the startup routine Specification format Xstartup file3 Interpretation when omitted The startup routine is linked Detailed description This option links file as the startup routine instead of the standard startup routine default cstart obj when the Xno_romize option is specified cstartN ob Specify the object module file as file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if num is omitted Example of use To link start obj as the startup routine describe as gt cx CF3746 Xstartup start obj main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 370 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link control The link control options are as follows Xlink_directive Xmap Xentry_address Xrelinkable_object Xregmode_info Xforce_link Xsdata_info Xtwo_pass_link Xignore_address_error Xmultiple_symbol Xlink_check_off Xalign_fill Xrescan Xstrip Xflash Xflash_ext_table R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 371 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xlink_directive This option specifies the link directive file Specification format Xlink directive file Interpretation when omitted The default link directive file is used Deta
178. 42 68 Size of sdata section 65536 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 61 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 78 Project Tree Panel After Generating Symbol Information File Project Tree E7 JPS uPDFOFS506 Microcontroller E A Pin Configurator Design Tool EH Code Generator Design Tool AS CX Build Tool ee YVESOEZM Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool File ex Startup c_ main c 5f sample stg The settings of the output folder and file of the symbol information file are can be changed lt 1 gt Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder for symbol information file property by directly entering in the text box or by the button Up to 247 characters can be specified in the text box BuildModeName is set by default BuildModeName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the build mode name lt 2 gt Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Symbol information file name property by directly entering in the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box ProjectName sfg is set by default ProjectName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the project name If this property is changed the empty symbol information file is generated and added to the project it will be also shown in the Files node of the project
179. 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xsconst This option specifies that constant data is allocated to the sconst section Specification format Xsconst num Interpretation when omitted All const data is allocated to the const section Detailed description This option allocates const data of less than num bytes const attribute data and character string literals to the sconst section Only data that a section is not specified is valid This option is not applicable for arrays of incomplete types arrays whose size is indeterminate within the file Specify 0 to 32767 as num An abort error will occur if a value outside the range is specified If num is omitted all const data is allocated to the sconst section If a different option is specified for each file a code of a different method of placing and referencing variables may be generated and an error or warning may be output during linking This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Size threshold of sconst section allocation Bytes in the Output Code category Example of use To allocate const data of less than 16 bytes to the sconst section describe as gt cx CF3746 Xsconst 16 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 360 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xfloat V850E2V3 This
180. 61EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 292 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Caution Assembly files The stack usage tracer calculates total stack size by collecting information from the assembly files output by the compiler as intermediate files with debugging information added As a consequence in order to obtain stack information at the function level using the stack usage tracer it is necessary to configure the compiler options to output Assembly files with debugging information Timing of static analysis The stack usage tracer performs static analysis upon startup and displays the calling relationship between func tions and function level stack information in its main window Consequently changes to the calling relationship between functions or function level stack information e g adding files changing compiler options or modifying the source code will not be reflected in this window Functions analyzed The stack usage tracer only analyzes functions contained in assembly files with debugging information output by the compiler as intermediate files and in library files provided by the build tool Consequently functions in assem bly files written by the user and library files created by the user are not analyzed For this reason the information for these files must be set using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box Icon display colors Display priorities High E to Low _ are assigned to
181. 7 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 L Link option 459 Link option 458 Source convert option 559 Link Directive File Generation dialog box 248 Link map file 94 Link Order dialog box 261 M m Create library key 538 ma Create library key 539 Main window 116 mb Create library key 540 Motorola S type hex format 106 O o Assemble option 428 O Compile option 344 O Compile option 316 O Link option 453 O Source convert option 560 Object File Select dialog box 257 Open with Program dialog box 287 Optimization function 514 Option dialog box 271 General Build Debug category 273 Output an assemble list 36 Output Makefile Information File dialog box 263 Output map information 36 Output panel 230 Output symbol information 37 P P Compile option 329 Path Edit dialog box 241 Progress Status dialog box 270 Project Tree panel 120 Property panel 133 Assemble Options tab 167 Build Settings tab 198 Category Information tab 226 Common Options tab 136 Compile Options tab 151 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS APPENDIX C INDEX Create Library Options tab 195 File Information tab 224 Hex Output Options tab 188 Individual Assemble Options tab 216 Individual Compile Options tab 201 Link Options tab 172
182. 7 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE h This option displays the descriptions of the cx options Specification format Interpretation when omitted The descriptions of the cx options are not displayed Detailed description This option outputs the descriptions of the cx options to the standard error output It does not execute compilation Example of use To output the descriptions of the cx options to the standard error output describe as gt CX CF3746 h R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 315 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output file specification The output file specification options are as follows O Xobj_path Xasm_path Xorn_path Xtemp_path Xlink_output O This option specifies the output file name Specification format Interpretation when omitted The file is output to the current folder If this option is specified with the P option The output file name will be the input file name with the extension replaced by i If this option is specified with the S option The output assembler source file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by asm If this option is specified with the c option The output object module file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by obj Other than above The output load module file nam
183. 7 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Dace ements tae fT a e e as S E a Change Changes the symbol Z e OOOO e tan OO ome fea fee sewn Netcast fesse econ tani OO Ea T fers Bie wen comets main lcomm label size byte align byte Added label maa e oa Dea a eene ee ooo e E T e E A T C Deea eee O ee ooo oo eee ee ee eee ee E e E E E A e T E E e T T E T e e a T ee T E T Ee E R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 568 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE cee cess tens tase resents ee rs ae a macro macro Change Changes the method of specifying the macro name and formal parameters Ee ee Ee a Ee a Ee a T eme ea f ee oo e e e e Denmen eea f e ooo e e e eee Denmen OO esmneninn Ot oo ee e e e Oe Denmas ferea Oe ooo C Oe Tnm araen eenaosesa Oe ooo secon serie xx O rno oman oo R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 569 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX C INDEX Symbols Assemble option 448 Compile option 424 Create library option 549 Link option 489 A Active project 69 Add a build mode 70 Adding afile 23 Add Existing File dialog box 275 Add File dialog box 233 Add Folder and File dialog box 235 Assemble list file 92 B Batch build 75 80 Batch Build dialog
184. 850E2 V850E2 or V850E2V3 which is specified as the target device v850e2v3 V850E2V3 common It is possible to link to the model with the V850E2V3 instruction set architecture which is specified as a target device If the instruction set architecture of the target device is V850E2V3 we recommend specifying this item to get the best performance An error will occur if series is omitted Example of use To check whether the common magic number and device UuPD70F3746 specified by the C option are mixed describe as gt cx CF3746 Xcommon v850e main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 468 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE sdata sbss information output specification The sdata sbss information output specification option is as follows Xsdata_info Xsdata_info This option outputs information that can be used as a yardstick for the parameter of the Xsdata option to the standard output Specification format Xsdata_info Interpretation when omitted Information that can be used as a yardstick for the parameter of the Xsdata option is not output to the standard output Detailed description This option outputs information that can be used as a yardstick for the parameter of the Xsdata option it specifies the maximum size of data allocated to the sdata sbss section to the standard output When using the numerical value indicated
185. A850 source After conversion for CX b Device specification Although you can specify devices in C source in CA850 you cannot do so in CX In CX device specification directives are deleted To specify a device in CX you must specify the C option CA850 source pragma cpu device nane After conversion for CX c Data section allocations The data section specification format for CA850 is shown below pragma section section type section name begin Variable declarations definitions pragma section section type section name end The data section specification format for CX is shown below pragma section attribute specification char section name Variable declarations definitions Section types and attribute specification characters are the same and only the format differs so they are converted to CX format Since the end specification line is not needed it is deleted CA850 source poragma section section type section name begin prag yP g pragma section section type section name end After conversion for CX section attribute specification char section name section default d Access to peripheral function registers using register names lt 1 gt How to access The pragma ioreg format for using register names is the same in CA850 and CX so no conversion is performed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 563 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND R
186. Address specification of the branch table Xflash_ ext _table 0x300 Link directive file part TEXT LOAD RX VOx400 pro epi runtime SPROGBITS AX text SPROGBITS AX Size of TEXT segment is 0x100 bytes or more An error occurs during linking because the branch table cannot be allocated to address 0x400 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 522 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Change the value specified by the Xflash_ext_table option If another segment is allocated to the address specified by the Xfalsh_ext_table option before the re link function is used but the address of that segment is not specified in the link directive file the branch table will be allocated to the address specified by the Xfalsh_ext_table option and the original segment will be moved behind the branch table However If the segment overlaps a segment for which an address is specified as a result of moving an error occurs Address specification of the branch table Xflash ext table 0x300 Link directive file part TEXT LOAD RX pro e pi runtime SPROGBITS AX text SPROGBITS AX It is assumed that the TEXT segment is allocated from address 0x300 continuing from the segment prior to the TEXT segment At this time the branch table is allocated to address 0x300 because no address Is specified for the TEXT segment and the TEXT segment is allocated behind the branch ta
187. Area v id func boot void void func _boot2 void fune bootl The function can be called without problem R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 517 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE b To call function in the flash area from the flash area The function can be called without problem because addresses have been resolved in the flash area Figure B 5 In Flash Area void func _flashl void void func _flash2 void func Elashi The function can be called without problem c To call function in the flash area from the boot area When a function in the flash area is called from the boot area the address of the function cannot be specified from the boot area because the function size etc have been changed in the flash area In other words a function in the flash area cannot be directly called To solve this execution jumps to the branch table in the flash area Next execute the jump instruction from that table to the relevant function and jump to the intended function Figure B 6 From Boot Area to Flash Area In boot area In flash area void fung boot1 void void func flashi void void func _boot2 void void func_flash2 void fune flashi func_boot1 Branch table Execution jumps to the branch table in the jy une flashi jr fune flash flash area In the same manner as functions this is relevant to referencing external va
188. DefaultBuild will be duplicated Up to 20 build modes can be added Delete Deletes the selected build mode Note that DefaultBuild cannot be deleted Rename Renames the selected build mode Rename the build mode with entered name in the opening the Character String Input dia log box Caution When duplicating or renaming the build mode the existing build mode name cannot be used Remarks 1 Up to 127 characters can be specified as a build mode name When the input violates any restric tion the following messages are shown in the tooltip A build mode with the same name already exists The entered build mode name already exists More than 127 characters cannot be specified Build mode name is too long more than 128 charac ters The build mode name is invalid The following charac Invalid build mode name is entered The characters ters cannot be used lt gt lt gt cannot be used because the build mode name is used for the folder name 2 Upto 20 build modes can be added When the input violates any restriction the following mes sages are shown in the tooltip The maximum number of build modes that can be set The number of build modes exceed 20 per project subproject is 20 Function buttons Button Function Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 266 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A
189. Detailed description This option specifies the format in which the code of switch statements is to be output The items that can be specified as type are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified ifelse Outputs the code in the same format as the if else statement along a string of case statements Select this item if the case statements are written in the order of frequency or if only a few labels are used Because the case statements are compared starting from the top unnecessary comparison can be reduced and the execution speed can be increased if the case statement that most often matches is written first Outputs the code in the binary search format Searches for a matching case statement by using a binary search algorithm If this item is selected when many labels are used any case statement can be found at almost the same speed Outputs the code in a table jump format References a table indexed on the values in the case statements and selects and processes case labels from the switch statement values The code will branch to all the case statements with about the same speed However if case values are not used in succession an unnecessary area will be created If the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the case labels exceeds 8192 then this option is ignored and the optimum output format for each switch statement is selected automatically An error will occur if type
190. EFERENCE lt 2 gt Bit access I O register bit accesses in CA850 have been deleted in CX In order to replace this it is replaced by bit field type declarations and macros If there is bit access in the I O register then a type declaration and macro are output at the top of the file and the access portion is changed to a macro call Since the type of the I O register is unknown to the source converter an 8 16 or 32 bit field is created depending on the position of the bit In the example below 3 and 5 fit into 8 bits so an 8 bit field is created CA850 source After conversion for CX ifndef BITS typedef struct unsigned int b0 1 unsigned int bl1 1 unsigned int b2 1 unsigned int b3 1 unsigned int b4 1 unsigned int b5 1 unsigned int b6 1 unsigned int b7 1 Bits8 define BIT8 name bit __Bits8 amp name gt b bit endif i _BIT8 PAHL 3 __BIT8 PAHL 5 0 e Assembler instruction format No conversion is performed because CA850 and CX use the same assembler instruction format When there are differences however as with pseudo instructions the user must perform the conversion manually f Specification of inline expansion No conversion is performed because CA850 and CX use the same inline expansion specification format g Function specification of name specified sections No conversion is performed because CA850 and CX use the same method for specifying functions to name specified
191. EFERENCE Compile strictly Select whether to process as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard according to ANSI and output an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard Standards This corresponds to the Xansi option of the cx command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xansi Processes as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard and outputs an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard Compatibility with the conventional C language specifications is conferred and processing continues after warning is output Sign of char Select whether char type without a type specifier signed or unsigned are handled as signed or unsigned This corresponds to the Xchar option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction signed Handles char type without a type specifier as signed unsigned Handles char type without a type specifier as Xchar unsigned unsigned Enumeration type Select which integer type the enumeration type handles This corresponds to the Xenum_type option of the cx command Default signed int None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction signed int None The enumeration type is handled as int type auto Treats each enumerated type as the smallest Xenum_type auto integer type capable of expressing all the en
192. ENCE C This option does not execute processing after linking Specification format Interpretation when omitted Processing is continued after linking Detailed description This option does not execute processing after linking The object module file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by obj The output file name can be specified by specifying this option and the o option Example of use To output object module file main obj without executing any processing after the linking describe as gt cx CF3746 c main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 331 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Preprocessor control The preprocessor control options are as follows Xpreprocess D This option defines preprocessor macros Specification format Dname def name def Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option defines name as a preprocessor macro This is equivalent to adding define name def at the beginning of the C source program If name contains characters that are allowed in an assembler symbol but which cannot be used in a preprocessor macro and a warning will be displayed and it is defined as an assembler symbol only An error will occur if name is omitted If def is omitted defis regarded as 1 This option can be specified m
193. ERENCE Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Delete debug information Select whether to delete debug information line number information and global pointer tables when generating the load module file This corresponds to the Xsirip option of the cx command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xstrip Deletes debug information line number information and global pointer tables when generating the load module file No Does not delete debug information line number information and global pointer tables when generating the load module file 2 Input File The detailed information on input files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Using link directive file The name of the link directive file to be used for linking is displayed An effective link directive file to be added to the project is searched and used This corresponds to the Xlink_directive option of the cx command Default The name of the link directive file that is added to the project How to change Changes not allowed Use standard startup Select whether to link the object module file cstart obj or cstartN obj provided with CX in routine which the standard startup routine is written In the Output ROMized load module file property in the Output File category from the ROMize Options t
194. FERENCE APPENDIX C INDEX How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electricity logic circuits and microcontrollers Conventions Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation XXX overscore over pin or signal name Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution Information requiring particular attention Remark Supplementary information Numeric representation Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal OXXXXX Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such Integrated Development Environment R20UTO267E V 50 Debug Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice Be sure to use the latest edition of each document when designing All trademarks or registered trademarks in this document are the property of their respective owners MEMO MEMO MEMO TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 11 1 1 Overview 11 1 2 Features 12 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 13 2 1 Overview 13 2 1 1 Create a load module 13 2 1 2 Create a user library 14 2 2 Change the Build Tool Version 15 2 3 Set Build Target Files 16 2 3 1 Seta startup routine 16 2 3 2 Automatically generate link directives 18 2 3 3 Add a file to a project 23 2 3 4 Remove
195. How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Compiles assembles and links multiple files simultaneously The assembler source file except the file with the individual build options is assembled using the settings of the Compile Options tab Compiles assembles and links for each file Handling the source file Selects whether to recompile assemble the source file if there are no files that include it includes non existing file 9 Default Re compile assemble the source file How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Re compile assemble the Recompiles assembles the source file if there source file are no files that include it Ignore re compiling Does not recompile assemble the source file assembling the source file even if there are no files that include it 12 Version Select The detailed information on the build tool version is displayed and the configuration can be changed Using compiler package The folder in which the compiler package to be used is installed is displayed install folder Default Install folder name How to change Changes not allowed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 147 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Using compiler package Select the version of the compiler package to be used version This setting is common to all the build modes Default Always latest version which was installed How to change Select
196. IX A WINDOW REFERENCE Using libraries Specify the library file libxxx lib or libxxx a to be used other than the standard library libxxx lib is searched with higher priority If it is not found lipxxx a is searched Specify only the xxx part example if you specify user libuser lib is assumed to be specified Add one file in one line The library file is searched from the library path This corresponds to the option of the cx command The specified library file is displayed as the subproperty Using libraries number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 249 characters Up to 256 items can be specified System libraries The name of the library file which the system uses is displayed The system library file is searched with lower priority than the library file to be used This corresponds to the option of the cx command The library file name is displayed as the subproperty Default System libraries number of defined items How to change Changes not allowed Specify the search folder of the library file to be used other than the standard libraries Additional library paths The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name Cub
197. M Sin ee Open Folder with Explorer E Build sample Add Set sub as Active Project Remove From Project Shift Del Rename Property When a project is set as the active project that project is underlined Figure 2 88 Active Project Project Tree g E sample Project ME UPD7O0F3506 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool E Bl Code Generator Design Tool A CX Build Tool ee YESOEZM Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool ME OPETOF3506 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool p Code Generator Design Tool A CX Build Tool em YES0E2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a QB Programmer Flash Programming Tool Bs File Remarks 1 Immediately after creating a project the main project is the active project R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 69 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 When you remove a subproject that set as the active project from a project the main project will be the active project 2 15 5 Adda build mode When you wish to change the build options and macro definitions according to the purpose of the build you can collectively change those settings Build options and macro definition settings are organized into what is called build mode and by changing the build mode you eliminate the necessity of changing the build options and m
198. MMAND REFERENCE If a link directive file has not been specified link before the text section Other cautions are shown below The prologue epilogue runtime libraries are included in standard library libc lib Unlike ordinary sections the pro_epi_runtime section has a fixed input section name and only the special purpose section is allocated The prologue epilogue runtime libraries use the callt instruction when a device of the V850Ex V850E2 core is used Set CTBP in the startup routine 7 Programmable peripheral I O register For an application program that uses programmable peripheral I O register functions the bpc section which is a reserved section is output when assembling If there is the bpc section in an input object module file when linking the value specified as BPC is checked If values do not match between input object module files the cx outputs an error message like the following and suspends link processing FQ0560114 Input files have different BPC value 0x00001234 filel obj 0x00001234 file2 obj 0x00001235 file3 obj none file4 obj In the above case there is an error because the value set in file3 obj is different Object that does not reference the programmable peripheral I O register is not checked As in file4 obj above none is displayed If there are no errors in checking BPC values a bpc section is generated with section type SHT_PROGBITS section attribute none and sec
199. None Flash area load Generates the load module file for the flash area module file Xflash Specify the boot area load module file in the Boot area load module file name property R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 144 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Boot area load module Specify the boot area load module file name file name If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different Be sure to specify this property when Flash area load module file Xflash in the Load module file type property is selected This corresponds to the Xflash option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Flash area load module file Xflash in the Load module file type property is selected How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters Branch table address Specify the start address of the branch table Specify the same address for both the flash area and the boot area If an odd number is specified it is revised to an even number This corresponds to the Xflash_ext_table option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use boo
200. OMize option 491 Xno_ startup Compile option 369 Xno_stdlib Compile option 368 Xno_stdlib Link option 460 Xno_warning Assemble option 447 Xno_warning Compile option 421 Xno_warning Link option 487 Xobj_path Assemble option 429 Xobj_path Compile option 318 Xpack Compile option 351 Xpass_source Compile option 352 Xpreprocess Compile option 335 Xprn_path Assemble option 430 Xprn_path Compile option 320 Xpro_epi_runtime Compile option 349 Xr Compile option 355 Xreg_mode Compile option 357 Xreg_mode Link option 466 Xregmode_info Compile option 376 Xregmode_info Link option 467 Xrelinkable_object Compile option 375 Xrelinkable_object Link option 465 Xrescan Compile option 384 Xrescan Link option 476 Xromize_check_off Compile option 395 Xromize_check_off ROMize option 497 Xrompcrt Compile option 390 Xrompcrt ROMize option 492 Xrompsec_data Compile option 392 Xrompsec_data ROMize option 494 Xrompsec_only Compile option 394 Xrompsec_ only ROMize option 496 Xrompsec_ start Compile option 391 Xrompsec_ start ROMize option 493 Xrompsec_text Compile option 393 Xrompsec_text ROMize option 495 Xsconst Compile option 360 Xsdata Assemble option 440 Xsdata Compile option 359 Xsdata_inf
201. OW REFERENCE 3 Section The detailed information on the section is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when Yes in the Output ROMized load module file property in the Output File category is selected Start symbol of rompsec section Specify the symbol to be used as the start address of the rompsec section to be generated If this is blank it is assumed that __S_ romp has been specified This corresponds to the Xrompsec_ start option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 1022 characters Select whether to generate the load module file that includes only a rompsec section no text attribute section is included in the file to be generated Generate load module file has rompsec section only This corresponds to the Xrompsec_ only option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Restriction Generates the load module file that has only the Xrompsec_ only rompsec section Includes the section with the text attribute in the load module file to be generated Data sections included in Specify the data section included in the rompsec section rompsec section Add one section in one line Each of the specified data sections is included in the rompsec section in descending order This corresponds to
202. Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xtwo_pass_link This option performs linking in the 2 pass mode Specification format Xtwo_path_ link Interpretation when omitted Linking is performed in the 1 pass mode Detailed description This option performs linking in the 2 pass mode The 2 pass mode is slower than the 1 pass mode but it is able to process larger sized files Example of use To perform linking in the 2 pass mode describe as gt cx CF3746 Xtwo_ path link main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 379 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xignore_address error This option continues link processing if an illegality is found during relocation processing when linking Specification format Xignore address error Interpretation when omitted An error occurs if an illegality is found during relocation processing when linking Detailed description If any of the following illegalities is found during relocation processing when linking this option outputs a warning instead of an error and continues link processing The result of address calculation of an unresolved external reference is illegal The relationship with the section to be allocated is illegal Specifically it indicates one of the following There is no GP symbol for GP relative relocation LOCAL GLOBAL EXTERN The result of PC22
203. Output File Category BuldhodeN ame lb FrojectName lib Ut folder Output file name 1 Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder property by directly entering to the text box or by the button Up to 247 characters can be specified in the text box BuildModeName is set by default BuildModeName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the build mode name 2 Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Output file name property by directly entering to the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box lib ProjectName lib is set by default ProjectName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the project name R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 53 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 Set Build Options Separately Build options are set at the project or file level Project level See 2 11 1 Set build options at the project level File level See 2 11 2 Set build options at the file level 2 11 1 Set build options at the project level To set options for build options for the project main project or Subproject select the Build tool node on the project tree to display the Property panel Select the phase tab and set build options by setting the necessary properties Compile phase Compile Options tab Assemble phase Assemble Options tab Link phase Link Options tab ROMize phase
204. PENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xlink_check_off This option suppresses checking when linking Specification format Xlank check off sctring string Interpretation when omitted When the external symbol is linked a warning will be output and link processing will be continued if the size of the symbol is checked and the difference is detected At this time the symbol size of the file in which the symbol is defined is valid When the undefined symbol is linked a warning will be output and link processing will be continued if the size and alignment conditions of the symbol is checked and the difference is detected If the application allocation overlaps the addresses of the internal ROM area a warning will be output Detailed description This option suppresses checking when linking The items that can be specified as string are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Does not check the size and alignment conditions of the external symbol when it is linked Does not check the size and alignment conditions of the undefined external symbol when it is linked irom Does not check the allocation to the internal ROM area Therefore if the application allocation overlaps the addresses of the internal ROM area a warning will not be output An error will occur if string is omitted When the application is created in the ROM less mode it is assumed that irom has been specified Caution Che
205. PPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Tree panel This panel is used to displays the project components such as the build tool source files etc in tree view Figure A 2 Project Tree Panel Project Tree The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area A CX Build Tool ce YESOESM Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool AP File ral Build tool generated files imt sample Inf hex sample hex s Startup aam start asm C main c E sub Subproject ME UPOFOF3506 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool H e Code Generator Design Tool A CX Build Tool ee YESOE2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Jr QB Programmer Flash Programming Tool Ei File Edit menu only available for the Project Tree panel Context menu How to open From the View menu select Project Tree R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 120 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Project tree area This area displays the project components in tree view with the following given nodes Project name Project The project name hereafter referred to as Project node Build tool name Build tool The build tool CX used in the project hereafter referred to as Build tool node File Th
206. Page 559 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output file specification The output file specification option is as follows O O This option specifies the output file name Specification format Interpretation when omitted If a file name is specified on the command line this option cannot be omitted If this option is omitted an error will occur except when specifying the h or V option Detailed description This option specifies the name of the conversion output file as file If file already exists it will be overwritten without displaying a warning An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted Example of use To output the converted file with name main_cnv c describe as gt cnv850 main c o main_cnv c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 560 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Conversion results file specification The conversion results file specification option is as follows f r This option specifies the conversion results file name Specification format Interpretation when omitted The conversion results are output to the standard output Detailed description This option outputs the conversion results to file file An error will occur if file is omitted Example of use To output the conversion results to file r
207. Preprocessor control The preprocessor control options are as follows This option defines assembler symbols Specification format Dname def name def Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option defines name as an assembler symbol This is equivalent to adding SET name def at the beginning of the assembler source program If name contains characters that are allowed in an assembler symbol but which cannot be used in a preprocessor macro and a warning will be displayed and it is defined as an assembler symbol only An error will occur if name is omitted If def is omitted defis regarded as 1 This option can be specified more than once If both this option and U option are specified for the same assembler symbol the option specified last will be valid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category From the Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category Example of use To define sample 256 as an assembler symbol describe as gt cx CF3746 Dsample 256 main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 436 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE U
208. Project Tree panel and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel To output the symbol information file select Yes Xsfg in the Output symbol information file property in the Symbol Information category Specify the output destination in the Output folder for symbol information file property and Symbol informa tion file name property It is also shown on the project tree under the Files node b Command line When the Xsfg option is specified the symbol information file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the load module file name with the extension replaced by sfg Also the file name can be specified by the parameter of the Xsfg option 2 Output example When the C source file is compiled the symbol information file shown below is output 1 Section and Variable Information 2 Global Variable Name ReferenceCount ByteSize 2 Static Variable in file Name ReferenceCount ByteSize FileName 2 Static Variable in function Name ReferenceCount ByteSize FileName FunctionName 3 Cidata byte Size_128bytes 11 fune static UC 12 5 13 1 14 Dz develop tp xx 2 c 15 sub2 11 func static UC 12 4 13 1 14 tp xx_1 c 15 main 4 ti_data_byte 5 1 6 1 4 ti_bss byte 5 1 6 1 11 func static unused UC 12 0 13 1 14 D develop tp xx 2 c 15 sub2 3 tidata word Size 128bytes 4 global_ int module xx1_ symbol 5 6 6 4
209. Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 493 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xrompsec_data This option specifies the data section included in the rompsec section Specification format Xrompsec data section section Interpretation when omitted All sections with the data or sdata attribute and the sections allocated to the internal instruction RAM are included in the rompsec section Detailed description This option specifies the data section included in the rompsec section The contents of section section and the corresponding address and size information are included in the rompsec section This option is related to the section with the data or sdata attribute If section does not exist in the load module file an error will be output and processing will be stopped section cannot include a space An error will occur if section is omitted If this option is specified more than once each data section will be included in the rompsec section in the order which they are specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the ROMize Options tab Data sections included in rompsec section in the Section category Example of use To include section data1 and data2 in the rompsec section describe as gt CX CF3746 Xrompsec date datal dataz main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 494 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeS
210. SAS Page 56 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 Prepare for Implementing Boot Flash Relink Function Depending on the system in addition to the area which cannot be rewritten replaced boot area there are occasions when you can use the area which can be rewritten replaced flash area such as the flash or external ROM In these kinds of systems when you wish to change the program in the flash area a function called the relink function correctly performs function calls between the boot area and flash area without rebuilding the program in the boot area By creating load module files for the boot area and flash area you can implement the relink function The method to implement the relink function is shown below Remark See B 1 6 Booi flash re link function for details about the relink function and how to implement it 2 12 1 Prepare the build target files 1 Specify the ext_func control instruction Describe the ext_func control instruction in the source file for the boot area With the ext_func control instruction specify the ID value for the target function the actual function exists in the flash area and is called from the boot area Remark In order to prevent description mistakes and inconsistencies between source files it is recommend that you organize the ext_func control instruction in a single file and regardless of the boot area or flash area include that file in all source files by u
211. Sets the option that differs from the project settings to the selected assembler source file Does not set the option that differs from the project settings to the selected assembler source file File type The type of the selected file is displayed type of the selected file is The type of the selected file is displayed Default C source when the C source file is selected Assembler source when the assembler source file is selected Object module when the object module file is selected Link directive when the link directive file is selected Symbol information when the symbol information file is selected Library when the library file is selected How to change Changes not allowed 2 Multi Core The detailed information on the multi core is displayed and the configuration can be changed Note that this category is displayed only when a C source file assembler source file object module file or library file is selected in the project using devices supporting multi core Target core number Specify the target core number Core n Xmulti pen shows the number of cores n number of cores on the target CPU This corresponds to the Xmulti option of the cx command Default Common Xmulti cmn How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Common Xmulti cmn The code and data in the selected file will be available to all cores Core n Xmulti pen The code and data in the selected file will be available
212. The device file is searched in the following order V850E2V3 1 CubeSuite install folde CubeSuite CX V x xx Device V850E2 Devicefile 2 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device V850 Devicefile 3 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device_Custom Devicefile V850E V850E2 1 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device V850 Devicefile 2 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device_Custom Devicefile An error will occur if path is omitted Example of use To search a device file from folder C NEC Tools32 dev describe as gt CX CF3746 Xdev_path C NECTools32 dev main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 328 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Processing interrupt specification The processing interrupt specification options are as follows P S C P This option executes only preprocessing for the input file Specification format Interpretation when omitted Processing is continued after preprocessing The preprocessed file are not output Detailed description This option executes only preprocessing for the input file and outputs the results to a file An error will occur if two or more input files are specified The output file name will be the input file name with the extension replaced by i The output file name can be specified by specifying this option and the o option
213. This button will be grayed out if all the information for all functions has the default values R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 290 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d Help menu skcx Help Displays the help of this window Functions in the same manner as the button About skcx Opens the Version Information dialog box of the stack usage tracer 2 Toolbar This area consists of the following buttons Opens the Save As dialog box for saving the call chain with the greatest total stack size including the stack size of callee functions of the function selected in the tree display area list display area to an output result file Functions in the same manner as when Save Call Chain with Maximum Stack from Selected Function is selected from the File menu Recalculates the total stack size Function in the same manner as when Recalcu late Stack Size is selected from the View menu Forcibly stop the action of the stack usage tracer e g recalculating the total stack size Functions in the same manner as when Stop is selected from the View menu Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional mar gin recursion depth and callee functions for the function selected in the tree dis play area list display area Functions in the same manner as when Adjust Stack Size is selected from the Option menu Displays the h
214. WINDOW REFERENCE Batch Build dialog box This dialog box is used to run builds rebuilds and cleans in batch with the build modes that the project main project and subproject has Remark The batch build order follows the project build order the order of the subprojects main project When multiple build modes are selected for a single main project or subproject after running builds of the subproject with all the selected build modes the build of the next subproject or main project is run Figure A 37 Batch Build Dialog Box Batch Build Build mode list Build mode Defined macros DetaultBuild BuildMode DefaultBuild BuildMode Project The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Build menu select Batch Build Description of each area 1 Build mode list area This area displays the list of the combinations of the names of the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project their build modes and their macro definitions a Project This area displays the main project and subprojects in the currently opened project Select the check boxes for the combinations of the main project and subprojects and their build modes which you wish to run a build When this dialog box is opened for the first time after the project is created all the check boxes are unchecked From the second time the previous
215. X 0 to 255 in decimal numbers Edit the items in the Segment Section detail area By default Type is set to Exist data PROGBITS and Attribute inherits the value of the parent segment Figure 2 10 Add Section segment Section list segment Section detall Memory Name Start Address EndAddress O Section Internal ROM 000000000 OXOOD Ft Name NewS ection_O SS SCONST _E Type Exist data PROGEITS D sce Attribute Read only A E New5ection O i Start address HEX 7 iat Hole size Hen F pro epi runtime Alignment value HE F text f Input section name Non Mapping osnog Che FFFFEE Object tle names Object tile names 0 DataFlash 0202000000 Ox02007 ttt CONST e const E Non Mapping Ux02008000 OshedF5ttt SE Internal RAM Oxfedf6000 Oxfedtiff Name Species the section name The following characters can be used incor e PO em rr a _ R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 20 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Edit symbols The Symbol list area displays the list of currently configured symbols When a symbol is selected from the list detailed information on that symbol is displayed in the Symbol detail area Edit the items in the Symbol detail area Figure 2 11 Segment Detail When _tp_TEXT Is Selected Symbol list Symbol detail Address O Symbol TF symboll TF_SYMBOL Mame __tp_TEAT GP symbol GF_SYMBOL Type TP symbol TP_SyMBOL EP
216. X A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for Specify the folder which the assemble list file is output assemble list file The assemble list file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xprn_path option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 247 characters 7 Error Output The detailed information on the error output is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output error message Select whether to output the error message file to the Output panel file This corresponds to the Xerror_f
217. a the same library is linked to the boot area if the same library function is called from the boot area When a library function is called therefore a function does not have to be specified by the ext_func control instruction for the library function because branching does not take place between the boot area and flash area However in a special case where the library linked to the boot area branches to a function in the flash area a function must be specified by the ext_func control instruction A function does not have to be specified by the ext_func control instruction for the library attached to the CX f Specify the ext_func control instruction for the interrupt handler Describe the part that calls an interrupt handler in the area where the address of the interrupt handler exists In the following case an interrupt handler function name must also be specified by the ext_func control instruction When the interrupt handler address is in the boot area When the interrupt handler body is in the flash area Assembler Source Described By User Assembler Image After Linking lext table ine sext func ant flasho 0 boot asm boot 1lmf cseg TEXT sinclude ext table inc jr ext table head 0x4 0 1p extern ant flasho cseg TEXT jr _int_flash0 flash asm flash 1lmf sLnclude ext Cable vine branch table spublic ant flasho cseg TEXT _int flasho public ext _table head extern ant flasho ext_table_head
218. a file from a project 27 2 3 5 Remove a file from the build target 28 2 3 6 Classify a file into a category 28 2 3 7 Change the file display order 29 2 3 8 Update file dependencies 30 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File 33 2 4 1 Change the output file name 34 2 4 2 Output an assemble list 36 2 4 3 Output map information 36 2 4 4 Output symbol information 37 2 5 Set Compile Options 38 2 5 1 Perform optimization with the code size precedence 38 2 5 2 Perform optimization with the execution speed precedence 39 2 5 3 Add an include path 39 2 5 4 Seta macro definition 40 2 5 5 Reduce the code size perform prologue epilogue runtime calls 41 2 5 6 Change the register mode 41 2 6 Set Assemble Options 43 2 6 1 Add an include path 43 2 6 2 Seta macro definition 45 2 7 Set Link Options 46 2 7 1 Add a user library 46 2 8 Set ROMize Options 48 2 8 1 Create a ROMized load module 48 2 9 Set Hex Output Options 50 2 9 1 Set the output of a hex file 50 2 9 2 Fill the vacant area 51 2 10 Set Create Library Options 53 2 10 1 Set the output of a library file 53 2 11 Set Build Options Separately 54 2 11 1 Set build options at the project level 54 2 11 2 Set build options at the file level 54 2 12 Prepare for Implementing Boot Flash Relink Function 57 2 12 1 Prepare the build target files 57 2 12 2 Set the boot area project
219. a relocatable object module file cannot determine allocation of an undefined external symbol to a section the cx internally generates a virtual section GoCommon and temporarily allocates the data to this section Actual size of section This is the actual size of the section that is considered for use as the area for the hole generated by data alignment Assumed size of section This is the size of the section that is assumed if compilation is performed with the Xsdata option with the value shown in 5 as num Because the calculation of this size assumes an alignment condition of more than 4 bytes without taking the actual alignment condition into consideration the value shown in this column does not necessarily agree with the actual size of the created section Value of num of the Xsdata option assumed This is the value of num of the Xsdata option during compilation and assembling which is assumed as a result of calculating the assumed size of section shown 4 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 528 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 3 Item Description Number 6 Judgement result This is the result of the judgment ote as to whether or not the size of the section is within a range of 15 bits 0x0 to 0x7fff if compilation is performed with the Xsdata option with the value shown in 5 specified as num If the size is within this range OK is displ
220. ab cstart obj is linked when Yes is selected and cstartN obj is linked when No Xno_romize is selected This corresponds to the Xno_ startup option of the cx command This property is not displayed when the build target file is added directly below the Startup node on the project tree or when any C source file is added under the File node How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Links the standard startup routine cstart obj or cstartN ob j o Xno_ startup Does not link the standard startup routine 3 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 173 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder Specify the folder which the load module to be generated is output If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the o option of the cx command Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder
221. ab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option Reset All to Default Restores all the configuration of the current tab to the default configuration of the project For the Individual Compile Options tab and Individual Assemble Options tab restores to the configuration of the general option R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 135 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Common Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the build tool categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 l l i Remark 0 2 3 aj Build Mode Output File Type and Path Frequently Used Options for Compile Frequently Used Options for Assemble Frequently Used Options for Link Frequently Used Options for Hex Output Register Mode Flash Correspondence Error Output Warning Message Build Method Version Select Notes Others If the property in the Frequently Used Options category is changed the value of the property having the same name contained in the corresponding tab will be changed accordingly Category from Common Options Tab Corresponding Tab Frequently Used Options for Compile category Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab Frequently Used Options for Assemble category Frequently Used Opt
222. able Register category From the Compile Options tab External variable assigned to the r24 register in the External Variable Register category Example of use To allocate external variable arg to register r18 when using the 22 register mode describe as gt cx CF3746 Xreg mode 22 Xr18 arg main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 356 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xreg_mode This option specifies the register mode Specification format Xreg mode mode Interpretation when omitted The 32 register mode object module file is generated Detailed description This option generates the object module file for the specified register mode This option limits the number of registers used by the cx to 32 the 32 register mode 26 the 26 register mode or 22 the 22 register mode or register mode common and embeds the magic number into the object module file Use register mode common to generate the object module file that does not depend on register modes The items that can be specified as mode are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified Register Mode mode Working Registers Registers for Register Variables An error will occur if mode is omitted When Xreg_mode common is specified the behavior of setjmp and longjmp is the same as when Xreg_mode 32 is specified For this reason ev
223. ables in the unused function Deleting unused static Deletes unused static functions functions Inline expansion for standard Performs inline expansion of standard library functions strcpy strcmp library functions memcpy and memset calls Prologue epilogue processing Instead of generating instruction rows to perform function prologue epilogue of a function based on runtime processing generates instructions to call the runtime library to perform equivalent library calls processing Although this reduces the code size it will make execution somewhat slower Pipeline optimization Reorders instructions at the machine language level in order to use the pipeline V850E2V3 effectively and get the best performance from the V850E2V3 architecture Remark See Optimization specification for optimization options 2 Effects of optimization on debugging Note with caution that optimization can have the following kinds of effects when debugging As a result of deformation of an expression by optimization propagation of copy and recognition of common part expression variable reference does not take place where the read write event of a variable appears in the C source program and the event may not occur as expected by the user When a statement has been made common deleted or rearranged step execution and breakpoints may not be set as intended by the user The live range of a variable range in which the va
224. acing the load and store instructions with 1 bit manipulation instructions set1 clr1 tst1 and not1 This corresponds to the Xkeep_access_ size option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Restriction Prohibits replacing the load and store Xkeep_access size instructions with 1 bit manipulation instructions 1 bit manipulation instructions may be generated instead of load and store instructions CENESAS Page 154 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Perform inline expansion Specify whether to perform inline expansion at the location calling library functions of library This corresponds to the Xcall_lib option of the cx command This property is displayed only for the project using a device with the V850E2V3 architecture Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Generates a sartf s instruction instead of a call to the sartf function No Xcall_lib Always generates a call to the sartf function 4 Preprocess The detailed information on preprocessing is displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during compiling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install
225. acro definition settings every time The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild Add a build mode according to the purpose of the build The method to add a build mode is shown below 1 Create a new build mode Creating a new build mode is performed with duplicating an existing build mode Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The Build Mode Settings dialog box will open Figure 2 89 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode DefaultBuild Apply to All Build mode list DefaultBuild Duplicate Select the build mode to be duplicated from the build mode list and click the Duplicate button The Character String Input dialog box will open Figure 2 90 Character String Input Dialog Box Character String Input String Build odez In the dialog box enter the name of the build mode to be created and then click the OK button The build mode with that name will be duplicated The created build mode is added to the build modes of the main project and all the subprojects which belong to the project R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 70 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 91 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box After Adding Build Mode Build Mode Settings Selected build mode Buildk odes Build mode list 2 Change the build mode Change the build mode to the newly created build mode see
226. age 541 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Member replace control The member replace control keys are as follows r ra ru This key replaces the specified object module file with the member having the same name in the specified library file Specification format Interpretation when omitted Members are not replaced Detailed description This key replaces the specified object module file with the member having the same name in the specified library file If the member with the same name as the specified object module file does not exist in the specified library file the object module file is added to the end of the library file If the specified library file does not exist a new library file that contains the specified object module file will be cre ated This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Create Library Options tab Output folder in the Output File category From the Create Library Options tab Output file name in the Output File category Example of use To replace sub obj with the member having the same name in library file libmain lib describe as gt lb r libmain lib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 542 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ra This key replaces the specified object module file with the member having the same name
227. ain build functions 2 1 Overview This section describes how to create a load module and user library Remark See B 3 Source Converter for details about conversion from CA850 files to CX files 2 1 1 Create a load module The procedure for creating a load module is shown below 1 Create or load a project Create a new project or load an existing one Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about creating a new project or loading an existing one 2 Set a build target project Set a build target project see 2 15 Make Settings for Build Operations Remarks 1 If there is no subproject in the project the project is always active 2 When setting a build mode add the build mode see 2 15 5 Add a build mode 3 Set build target files Add or remove build target files and update the dependencies see 2 3 Set Build Target Files Remarks 1 See 2 7 1 Add a user library for the method of adding a user library to the project 2 Also you can set the link order of object module files and library files see 2 15 1 Set the link order of files 4 Specify the output of a load module Select the type of the load module to be generated see 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File 5 Set build options Set the options for the compiler assembler linker and the like see 2 5 Set Compile Options 2 6 Set Assemble Options 2 7 Set Link Options 6 Run a build Run a build see 2 16 Runa Build The following type
228. al variable TEMP 2 Folder specified by environmental variable TMP 3 Current folder Detailed description This option specifies path as the folder for generating temporary files that are used internally If path does not exist a warning will be output and the temporary folder will be determined 1 Folder specified by environmental variable TEMP 2 Folder specified by environmental variable TMP 3 Current folder An error will occur if path is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Temporary folder in the Others category Example of use To specify folder D tmp as the temporary folder describe as gt cx CF3746 Xtemp path D tmp main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 321 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xlink_output This option saves the load module file before ROMization Specification format Xlink output file Interpretation when omitted The load module file will not be saved before ROMization Detailed description This option saves the load module file as file before ROMization An error will occur if file is omitted If this option and the Xno_romize option are specified at the same time a warning will be output and this option will be ignored Example of use To save the load module file with sample Imf as the file name before ROM
229. allocated to RAM and packs them into a single section By default this section becomes the rompsec section By allocating the rompsec section to ROM and calling the copy function it is possible to deploy initial value information and programs into RAM Remark See CubeSuite Coding for CX Compiler for details about how to create the ROMized load module 1 Call a copy function Call a copy function within the startup routine You can use the standard startup routine cstart obj as is because it already contains a call to _rcopy If you use _rcopy2 or _rcopy4 instead of _ rcopy or specify the section to be copied customize the standard startup routine Remarks 1 See CubeSuite Coding for CX Compiler for details about copy functions 2 To use other than the standard startup routine add the file to be used to the Startup node on the project tree See 2 3 1 Seta startup routine for details about the setting of the startup routine 2 Set ROMize options Specify to generate the ROMized load module by the ROMize option Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the ROMize Options tab on the Property panel R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 48 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Set the output of the ROMized load module file Select Yes in the Output ROMized load module file property in the Output File category Figure 2 56 Output ROMized load module fi
230. alog box This dialog box is used to refer object module files and library files to be input to the linker and configure these link orders Figure A 34 Link Order Dialog Box Link Order ystem obj uer liE Function buttons l The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu Description of each area 1 File list display area This area displays the file list to be input to the linker a File The names of the following files are listed in the order that the files are input to the linker Object module files which are generated from the source files added to the selected main project or sub project Object module files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Library files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject The default order is the order that the files are added to the project By changing the display order of the files you can set the input order of the files to the linker To change the display order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the file names R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 261 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Remarks 1 When the mouse cursor
231. alues Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 274 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add Existing File dialog box This dialog box is used to select existing files to add to the project Figure A 42 Add Existing File Dialog Box Add Existing File 0 Lakin My Recent Documents 3 le name 4 do Hetrroth iles of type Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add File On the Project Tree panel select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or file and then select Add gt gt Add File from the context menu Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder that the file to be added to the project exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 275 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Designate the name of the file to be added to the project 4 Files of type area Designate the type of the file to be added to the project C source file
232. ammer Flash Programming Tool a File 5 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 25 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 18 Project Tree Panel After Adding Folder src Project Tree y Fai 7 sample Project PE uPOFOF3506 Microcontroller A Fin Configurator Design Tool S Code Generator Design Tool AL CX Build Tool chs W8S0E2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool E QB Programmer Flash Programming Tool EI BS File sx Cc main c I i Bam 1 start asm die link dir Remark The location of the file added below the File node depends on the current file display order setting See 2 3 7 Change the file display order for the method of changing the file display order Cautions 1 If the paths differ you can add source files with the same name Note however that if the setting of the output file name is left as the default the output files will have the same name which will prevent the build from running correctly for example when adding D sample1 func c and D sample2 func c the default output file name for these files is both func obj The target file cannot open during debugging To avoid these problems set the output file name for each of those files to a different name with the individual build options for the source files The changing the name of the C source file is made with the Object module file name property
233. ampersand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe function that can be added is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name c Button area Add Adds the function selected in All Functions to Callee Functions If no function is selected in All Functions then this button will be grayed out Delete Deletes the function selected in Callee Functions from Callee Functions If no function is selected in Callee Functions then this button will be grayed out Remark Functions can only be deleted from Callee Functions if the function name ends with a plus sign functions added from All Functions intentionally by clicking Adqd Function buttons OK Reflects the settings in the Stack Usage Tracer window save them to the project file prj then close the dialog Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Resets the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function to the default values This button will be grayed out if all the information for the selected function has the default values Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 300 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open dialog box This dialog box is used to open an existing stack size specification file Figure A 52 Open Dialog Box Function buttons 4
234. ample of use To output the version information of the cx to the standard error output describe as gt Cx CF3746 V R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 451 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE h This option displays the descriptions of the cx options Specification format Interpretation when omitted The descriptions of the cx options are not displayed Detailed description This option outputs the descriptions of the cx options to the standard error output It does not execute linking Example of use To output the descriptions of the cx options to the standard error output describe as cx CF3746 h R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 452 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output file specification The output file specification options are as follows 0 Xtemp_path O This option specifies the output file name Specification format ofite Interpretation when omitted The file is output to the current folder The output load module file name is a lmf Detailed description This option specifies the output file name as file If file already exists it will be overwritten It is assumed that a load module file name has been specified as file An error will occur if two or more files are output An error will occur if file is omitted This option is equivalent
235. and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel The macro definition setting is made with the Macro definition property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 48 Macro definition Property E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Macro Undetinition Macro Undetinithorn If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 49 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit Enter the macro definition in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line You can specify up to 256 characters per line up to 256 lines The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value If you click the OK button the entered macro definitions are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 50 Macro definition Property After Setting Macros El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 i Ta Lie i LAIT i Macro definition 2 TEST 1 TIME 10 Macro Undetinithorny O To change the macro definitions you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Macro definition property in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category on the Common Options tab R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 45 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 Set Link Options To set
236. and the others are ignored If this option is specified any reserved symbol is not created This option must be specified together with the Xno_ startup and Xno_romize options Example of use To generate the relocatable object module file describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 375 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xregmode_info This option outputs detailed information when different register modes are mixed Specification format Xregmode_info Interpretation when omitted Detailed information is not output when different register modes are mixed Detailed description This option outputs detailed information and specifies the input object module file that causes a warning when different register modes are mixed for all input object module files No information will be output if the register modes match Example of use To output detailed information when different register modes are mixed for all input object module files describe as gt Cx CF3746 Xregmode info filel c file2 c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 376 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xforce_link This option continues link processing when the internal ROM RAM overflows Specification format Interpretation when omitted An error is output and link processing is completed when the internal ROM RAM overflo
237. anded Tektronix hex format Xhex_format T is selected 16 to 255 decimal number or 10 to FF hexadecimal number Specify offset of output address Select whether to specify the offset of the address to be output This corresponds to the Xhex_offset option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Specifies the offset of the address to be output Restriction Xhex_ offset No Does not specify the offset of the address to be output R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 192 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Offset of output address Specify the offset of the address to be output This corresponds to the Xhex_offset option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xhex_offset in the Specify offset of output address property is selected Default 0 hexadecimal number How to change Directly enter in the text box 0 to FFFFFFFE hexadecimal number Initialize section of data Select whether to initialize the section of the data without the initial value the section with without initial value to section type NOBITS and section attribute A to zero during the conversion to the hex file zero This corresponds to the Xhex_null option of the cx command This property is displayed when Expanded Tektronix hex format Xhex_format T in the Hex file format property is selected or No in the Specify converted addres
238. arct size Interpretation when omitted Fill processing is not performed Detailed description This option converts all codes in the area from address start to size size into hex format and outputs them The unused area in the specified area is filled with value The range that can be specified for value is 0x00 to OxFFFF Specify value in hexadecimal value can be specified in 1 byte or 2 byte units If the specified value is less than 2 or 4 digits the higher bits will be filled with O If value is omitted it is assumed that OxFF has been specified The range that can be specified for start is 0x00 to OxFFFFFFFF Even if start is within the above range an error will occur if the section does not exist The range that can be specified for size is 0x01 to Ox100000000 Specify start and size in hexadecimal If start and size are omitted all the codes in the internal ROM area defined by the device file are converted in hex format and output This option can not be specified together with the Xhex_format T option When the information of the internal ROM area defined by the device file is not used specify this option together with the Xhex_rom_less option In this case parameter start and size of this option must be specified Example of use To convert all codes in the area from address 0x1000 to size 0x2000 into hex format and outputs them describe as The unused area in the area is filled with
239. artup and Exit Di 1 Text Editar Font and Color External Tools Build Debug The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Tool menu select Option Description of each area 1 Category selection area Select the items to configure from the following categories General External Tools category Configure the startup of external tools General Build Debug category Configure building and debugging General Update category Configure update Other User Information category Configure user information R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 271 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about categories other than General Build Debug 2 Settings This area is used to configure the various options for the selected category For details about configuration for a particular category see the section for the category in question Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default values Note however that newly added items in the General External Tools category will not be removed Applies all setting and closes this dialog box Ignores the setting and closes this dialog box Apply Applies all setting does not close this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box
240. ash area is generated Although this section does not require an alignment specification in the link directive file you must leave enough space for alignment Note This is the value specified by the ext_func quasi directive in the assembler source file When the load module file for the boot area is generated the load module file before ROMization processing must be saved This is because this file is specified by the Xflash option when the load module file for the flash area is generated Consequently if this option is not specified with the Xflash option at the same time it must be specified with the R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 387 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xlink_output option if ROMization is performed or the Xno_romize option if ROMization is not performed at the same time This option can not be specified together with the Xrelinkable_object option An operation fault will occur if the load module file that has been generated using the Xrelinkable_object option is input Example of use To generate load module file for the boot area boot Imf with 0x200 as the start address of the branch table describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 388 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ROMization control The ROMization control options are as follows Xno_romize Xrompcrt Xrompsec_star
241. at property When Intel expanded hex format None or Intel expanded hex format 32 bit address Xhex_format i is selected and Reset to Default from the context menu of this property is selected 32 When Motorola S type format standard address Xhex_format S is selected and Reset to Default from the context menu of this property is selected 80 When Motorola S type format 32 bit address Xhex_format s is selected and Reset to Default from the context menu of this property is selected 80 When Expanded Tektronix hex format Xhex_format T is selected and Reset to Default from the context menu of this property is selected 255 Note that if a change to the Hex file format property causes the value set in this property to be outside the specifiable range then it is set immediately to the above default How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction This differs depending on the item selected in the Hex file format property When Intel expanded hex format None or Intel expanded hex format 32 bit address Xhex_format i is selected 1 to 255 decimal number or 01 to FF hexadecimal number When Motorola S type format standard address Xhex_format S is selected 1 to 251 decimal number or 01 to FB hexadecimal number When Motorola S type format 32 bit address Xhex_format s is selected 1 to 250 decimal number or 01 to FA hexadecimal number When Exp
242. at or Motorola S type hex format the number of bytes of the code indicated in one data record The range that can be specified for num differs depending on the hex format The range that can be specified for num are shown below for each hex format If the specified value is less than the minimum value a warning will be output and it is corrected to the default value If the specified value exceeds the maximum value a warning will be output and it is corrected to the maximum value An error will occur if O is specified ntl expanded T to 255 0x01 to OxFF Intel expanded 32 bit address 1 to 255 0x01 to OxFF Motorola S type standard address 1 to 251 0x01 to OxFB O 0x50 Motorola S type 32 bit address 1 to 250 0x01 to OxFA O 0x50 Extended Tektronix 16 to 255 0x10 to OxFF 255 OxFF An error will occur if num is omitted Example of use To specify 255 as the maximum length of the block describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex block s1ize 255 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 401 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_ offset This option specifies the offset of the address to be output Specification format Xhex offset num Interpretation when omitted It is regarded that the address to be output does not have the offset The address is output from address 0 Detailed description This option outputs the original address offset by
243. at specifies the corresponding object file in the Link Directive File Generation dialog box If an object file is specified from multiple sections they are displayed separated by commas If the section that specifies the object file does not exist this field is blank Function buttons OK Closes this dialog box and sets the selected file to Object file name in the Segment Sec tion detail area in the Link Directive File Generation dialog box Cancel Cancels the file selecting and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 258 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Segment Select dialog box This dialog box is used to select the segment among the segments currently set in the Link Directive File Generation dialog box and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 33 Segment Select Dialog Box segment Select Segment list Segment Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open In the Link Directive File Generation dialog box select a symbol in the Symbol list area and then click the button on Segment name in the Symbol detail area Description of each area 1 Segment list area This area displays the list of currently set segments in the Link Directive File Generation dialog
244. ata datal data2 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 392 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xrompsec_text This option specifies the text section included in the rompsec section Specification format Xrompsec_text section section Interpretation when omitted Each section allocated to the internal instruction RAM is included in the rompsec section Detailed description This option specifies the text section included in the rompsec section The contents of section section and the corresponding address and size information are included in the rompsec section This option is related to the section with the text or const attribute The section that can be specified as section is the section with the text or const attribute If the section that has any other attribute is specified a warning will be output and processing will be stopped If section does not exist in the load module file an error will be output and processing will be stopped section cannot include a space An error will occur if section is omitted If this option is specified more than once the section will be included in the rompsec section in the order which they are specified If the particular section is specified by using this option for the input file linked specifying the device file with the internal instruction RAM the section that is not specified and is allocated to inte
245. ated characters cannot be used lt gt The following characters cannot be used for the file name and folder name lt gt R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 242 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE More than maximum number of paths or files specified The number of paths or files which have been by the caller lines cannot be specified entered exceeds the maximum number of restriction in the property that called this dialog box b Button Browse When adding the path Opens the Browse For Folder dialog box If a folder is selected the path will be added in Path One path per one line When adding the file name including the path Opens the Specify Far Jump File dialog box If a file is selected the file will be added in Path One path per one line c Subfolders are automatically included Select this check box and then click the Browse button to specify the path The path will be added includ ing subfolders to Path One path per one line up to five levels deep Function buttons Reflects the entered path to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Does not reflect the entered path to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 243 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40
246. ategory From the Individual Compile Options tab Maximum number of loop expansions in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Remove unused static functions in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Perform inline expansion in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Perform pipeline optimization in the Optimization Details category Example of use To perform optimization with the object size precedence describe as gt cx CF3746 Osize main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 346 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xsort_var This option sorts external variables Specification format ASOLL Var Interpretation when omitted External variables are not sorted Detailed description This option rearranges external variables allocated to a section other than const or sconst sequentially starting from the largest alignment size This option is for reducing the RAM capacity This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Sort external variables in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Sort external variables in the Optimization Details category Example of use To rearrange external variables allocated to a section o
247. ath is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xprn_path option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters 11 External Variable Register The detailed information on the external variable registers is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed when 82 register mode None or Universal register mode Xreg_mode common in the Register mode property in the Register Mode category from the Common Options tab is selected External variable Specify the external variables symbol name excluding _ assigned to the register assigned to the r15 This corresponds to the Xr15 option of the cx command register This property is not displayed when 26 register mode Xreg_mode 26 in the Register mode property in the Register Mode category from the Common Options tab
248. ation can be changed Output folder Specify the folder which the library file to be generated is output If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the r key of the librarian Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 195 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output file name Specify the name of the library file to be generated The extension other than lib cannot be specified If the extension is omitted lib is automatically added The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that lib ProjectName lib has been specified This corresponds to the r key of the librarian Default lib ProjectName lib How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 259 characters 2 Message Th
249. ation resolution error processing control option is as follows Xignore_address_error Xignore_address _ error This option continues link processing if an illegality is found during relocation processing when linking Specification format Mi gQnore address error Interpretation when omitted An error occurs if an illegality is found during relocation processing when linking Detailed description If any of the following illegalities is found during relocation processing when linking this option outputs a warning instead of an error and continues link processing The result of address calculation of an unresolved external reference is illegal The relationship with the section to be allocated is illegal Specifically it indicates one of the following There is no GP symbol for GP relative relocation LOCAL GLOBAL EXTERN The result of PC22 26 relocation is a branch to an odd address The result of PC relative relocation is outside the allowed bounds symbol no symbol The result of other than PC relative relocation is outside the allowed bounds symbol no symbol The value of address calculation judged as an illegality is not assigned to the unresolved external reference judged as an error and the original value remains This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Ignore illegal relocation in the Others category Example of use To outpu
250. ation when omitted When the Xno_romize option is not specified the standard ROMization area reservation code file rompcrt obj is linked at the end of input files Detailed description This option links file instead of the standard ROMization area reservation code file at the end of input files Specify the object module file as file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted If this option is specified together with the Xno_romize option this option will be invalid Example of use To link rompack obj instead of the standard ROMization area reservation code file at the end of input files describe as gt cx CF3746 Xrompcrt rompack obj main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 390 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xrompsec_ start This option specifies the start address of the rompsec section Specification format Xrompsec_start label Interpretation when omitted The value of label __S_romp is regarded as the start address of the rompsec section to be created Detailed description This option performs hex output only for the specified section The value of label label is regarded as the start address of the rompsec section to be created If label is not in the load module file or if this option is specified more than once the option specified last will be valid and the option specified f
251. atted version of the code that is output when the source has been compiled and assembled It can be used to check the code resulting from compilation and assembly 1 How to output The methods for outputting the assemble list file are shown below a CubeSuite Select the build tool node on the Project Tree panel and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To output the assemble list file select Yes Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category Specify the output destination in the Output folder for assemble list file property The file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by prn When Yes Xpass_source in the Output comment to assembler source file property in the Output Code category is selected the C source program that corresponds to the assembler source program is output as comments in the assemble list file b Command line When the Xprn_path option is specified the assemble list file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn Also the file name can be specified by the parameter of the Xprn_path option If the Xpass_source option is specified at the same time the C source program that corresponds to the assembler source program is output as comments in the assemble list file 2 Output example When the C source file shown below is compiled and the output assembler source file is assembled the as
252. auto generated symbol information file Confirm that the build has completed successfully and the load module file has been generated before using this function Remark See B 1 4 Symbol information file for detail about the symbol information file 1 Generating the symbol information file automatically and relocating the variables Below is the procedure for generating the symbol information file automatically and referring that file to allocate the variables via one build a Set the generation of the symbol information file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Select Yes Xsfg in the Output symbol information file property in the Symbol Information category The empty symbol information file will be generated and added to the project it will be also shown in the Files node of the project tree The output destination is the file set in the Output folder for symbol information file property and Symbol information file name property Select Yes Xsfg_opt in the Output optimized allocation information property Remark If a symbol information file with the same name already exists the build will be configured to use it Figure 2 77 Output symbol information file and Output optimized allocation information Property Yes stg Ooh ode ame ize of tidata sechon Size of tidata byte section 126 Size of sidata section 42512 Size of sedata section
253. aved for the first time The previously selected file is selected after the second time 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Save in area and Save as type area 3 File name area Designate the name of the file to be saved 4 Save as type area a In the Editor panel This area displays any of the following file types depend on the type of the currently editing file Text file txt Text format C source file c C source file Header file h inc Header file Assemble file asm Assembler source file Assemble file s Assembler source file Link directive file dir dr Link directive file Symbol information file sfg Symbol information file Map file map Map file Hex file hex Hex file b In the Output panel This area displays the following file type Text file txt Text format Function buttons Saves the file as the designated name R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 286 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open with Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the application to open the file selected in Project Tree Figure A 48 Open with Program Dialog Box Open with Program 1 Look ir 3 Program Files v My Recent Documents My Documenta 9 Adobe C Common Files 9 ComPlus Applications Internet Explorer McAfee O Messenger Microsoft
254. ayed if it is not nothing is displayed Note Usually the sections to which data is allocated are allocated from the lower address in the order of data sdata sbss bss attribute sections in the cx The global pointer gp is assumed to be set in the startup module etc so as to indicate the start address of the sdata attribute section 32 KB Therefore if the result is OK in this judgement the sdata sbss attribute sections are assumed to be allocated to a memory range that can be referenced using 16 bit displacement c Cautions The information output by the Xsdata_info option is only a yardstick and the judgment result may not be correct such as in the following cases When allocation of a section that creates a hole is specified by a link directive etc When a direct address is specified for a global pointer symbol When data is allocated to the sdata sbss section by the pragma section directive Library file An library file is created by linking two or more object module files with the librarian The cx searches library files for unresolved external references 1 after linking all object module files and links only the necessary object module files The library file can be also specified in the mapping directive of the link directive lf the library file is also specified in the mapping directive it is searched for unresolved external references at that Note 2 are linked time and only the necessary object module files Note
255. be edited and then their values are set automatically The combinations of reserved section names and values set automatically are shown below R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 253 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The linker limits the reserved sections below to the names of segments where they can be assigned sidata sibss tidata tibss tidata byte tibss byte tidata word tibss word SIDATA sedata sebss SEDATA sconst SCONST If one of these section names is specified for Name the name of the parent segment is referenced Although these sections cannot be moved within a segment they can be moved to other segments For the following reserved sections the linker creates a fixed correspondence between the output and input section names For this reason even if the input section name is omitted the linker will assign it automatically pro_epi_runtime tidata tioss tidata byte tibss byte tidata word sidata sibss sedata sebss 3 Symbol list area This area displays the list of currently configured symbols a Name This area displays the symbol name This item can be edited directly If the symbol name is changed the value of Name in the Symbol detail area is also changed b Type This area displays the type of the symbol This item can be edited directly If the type is changed the value of Type in the Symbol detail area is als
256. be performed such as manipulation of library file objects By contrast when using CubeSuite to create a library file compile and assemble source files and then combine the object module files to be generated into a library file Operations cannot be performed for a complete library file via CubeSuite The user should keep this difference in mind when choosing between command line activation and activation via CubeSuite R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 534 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 2 3 Key Option The types and explanations for keys and options of the librarian are shown below Table B 12 Create Library Key Version display specification vo This key displays the version information of the librarian Member delete specification a This key deletes a member from the specified library file Member move specification This key moves the specified member in the specified library file to the end of the file This key moves the specified member in the specified library file to the posi tion immediately after the specified member This key moves the specified member in the specified library file to the posi tion immediately before the specified member Member add specification This key adds the specified object module file to the end of the specified library file Member replace control This key replaces the specified object module file with the member having the same name in
257. beSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xsfg This option generates a symbol information file Specification format Xsfg file Interpretation when omitted A symbol information file is not generated Detailed description This option generates symbol information file file based on the static analysis result of the C source file sfg is recommended as the extension of file If file already exists it will be overwritten If file is omitted the file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the load module file name with the extension replaced by map This option must be specified together with the Xcube_suite_info option to use the information of the CubeSuite information file It is recommend that this option is specified identically for all source files in the given application This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Output symbol information file in the Symbol Information category From the Link Options tab Output folder for symbol information file in the Symbol Information category From the Link Options tab Symbol information file name in the Symbol Information category Example of use To output the symbol information file as file name symbol sfg describe as gt CX CE3 746 Xsfg symbol sfg Xcube _ suite_info info cref main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 412 of 577 Oct
258. bject module file generated during assembling is to be saved Xprn_path This option specifies where an assemble list file is to be saved Source debugging This option outputs information for source debugging control Device specification This option specifies the target device Xcommon This option specifies that an object module file common to the various devices is generated Xdev_path This option specifies the folder to search device files This option defines assembler symbols Preprocessor control E This option deletes the assembler symbol definition by the D option This option specifies the folder to search include files Japanese Chinese Xcharacter_set This option specifies the Japanese Chinese character code character control Generated code Xsdata This option specifies the maximum size of data allocated to the control sdata or sbss section Assembler control Xasm_far_jump This option controls outputting far jump for an assembler source specification V850E2 V850E2V3 file Link control Xflash This option generates the load module file for the flash area Multi core support Xmulti This option specifies the generation of a subprogram of a multi specification core program Error output control This option outputs error messages to a file Warning message This option outputs the specified warning message output control Xno_warning This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the speci
259. ble d Specify the ext_ent_size control instruction When an actual function is called from the branch table in the flash memory jr branch instructions are generated as follows by default _ ext table head jr _func_flasho J _fune flashi gp _func flash2 However the jr instruction can branch only within a 22 bit range 1MB To branch in the entire 32 bit space additionally specify the ext_ent_size control instruction The format of the ext_ent_size directive is shown below sext_ent_size entry size The value that can be specified as the entry size is 4 or 8 V850Ex core The entry size means the instruction size necessary for one branch processing The default entry size is 4 A 4 byte instruction is allocated as follows JE _flash_funco 4 byte instruction If 8 is specified a total of 8 bytes of instructions will be allocated as follows R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 523 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE flash _funco rl 6 byte instruction r1 2 byte instruction It is assumed that there is only one entry size for all source An abort error will occur if a different value is specified for each source e Specify the ext_func control instruction for the library If a library function is called from the boot area or flash area the library is linked to the object on the calling side For example even if a library is linked to the flash are
260. ble Options tab Link Options tab ROMize Options tab Hex Output Options tab You can set the various cx options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure B 2 Property Panel Property A Le Property El El Build Hode Build mode Output File Type andPath Output file type Intermediate file output folder El Frequently Used Options for Compie io Ae Oe A H AAA eee A Level of optimization Additional include paths Sistem mclude paths Macro definition Frequently Used O ptions for Link Using libraries Additional library paths Output folder Output file name Frequently Used Options for Hex O uput Hex file format Register Hode Flash Correspondence Error Qutput Warning Message Build Method Yersion Select Hotes Others Build mode Selects the build mode name to be used during build B 1 3 Link Options Option This section explains cx options for each phase Compile phase gt See 1 Compile options Assemble phase gt See 2 Assemble options Link phase gt See 3 Link options ROMize phase gt See 4 ROMize options Hex output phase gt See 5 Hex output options DefaultBuild Execute Module Load Module File 2B uildModeN anes Default Optimization Odetautt Additional include paths 0 System mclude patha 0 Macro detinition 0 Using libranes 0 Additional library pathe O BulldModeh ame PF rojecthl ame Imt Intel expanded hes format Ho
261. box and symbols that specify them a Segment This area displays a list of segment names currently set in the Link Directive File Generation dialog box Select segments to set to Segment name in the Symbol detail area in the Link Directive File Generation dia log box that opened this dialog box via check boxes Remarks 1 Move the mouse cursor over a file name to display a tooltip with the absolute path of that file 2 Inthe Link Directive File Generation dialog box that opened this dialog box in the Symbol detail area if a segment is already set in Segment name the check box for that segment will be selected by default R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 259 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 The check box for the segment that specifies a symbol other than the one that opened this dia log box will be disabled b Symbol This area displays the symbol specifying the displayed segment If the symbol that specifies the segment does not exist this field is blank Function buttons Closes this dialog box and sets the selected segment to Segment name in the Symbol detail area in the Link Directive File Generation dialog box Cancel Cancels the file selecting and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 260 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Order di
262. bugging is not affected Optimization optimization of expressions and register allocation and Odefault the like Code Size Performs optimization with the object size precedence Precedence Regards reducing the ROM RAM capacity as important Osize and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Speed Performs optimization with the execution speed Precedence precedence Ospeed Regards shortening the execution speed as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Debug Performs optimization with the debug precedence Precedence Regards debugging as important and suppresses all Onothing optimization including default optimization Detail Setting The properties are added in the Optimization Details category from the Compile Options tab The optimization items selected in the category has the precedence for the optimization R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 139 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Additional include paths Specify the additional include paths during compiling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder The specified include path is searched with higher priority than the standard include file fol
263. build simultaneously is made with the property Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category Figure 2 107 Build simultaneously Property Build simultaneously Hang mg the source He inchides hon essting IE Camper asteme e the source hle At this time the Assemble Options tab is hidden The assembler source file except the file with the individual build options is assembled using the settings of the Compile Options tab Remarks 1 The build of the files with the individual build options and files to be executed prior to the build is run simultaneously A build of the file that is not targeted for a simultaneous build is run separately 2 Ifthe source file is older than the generated object module file or related properties and project or the like the object module file will be used for the build instead of the source file 3 Ifthe Build simultaneously property is changed from Yes to No the following message dialog box will open R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 81 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 108 Message Dialog Box Question Q0 70300 3 Are You sure you want to copy the curent compile options to the assemble y 2 options Click Yes in the dialog box The settings of the Compile Options tab will be c
264. c data Xrompsec Cext KXrompsec only Xromize check off Xhex xAhex only Xhex format Xhex fill Xhex section Xhex block size Xhex_ offset Xhex null Xhex symtab Xhex rom less To generate library files for each of the subprograms specify this option at the same time as the c option and create an object module file Caution Do not create a library file for object module files created with different Xmulti options specified Example of use To generate a program for core 1 describe as 20x CES5S15 Xm lti p il file pel 1 tile pel 2 0 0per Imf R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 483 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xmulti_link This option specifies the linking of multi core subprograms Specification format Interpretation when omitted It will not be treated the linking of multi core subprograms Detailed description This option links each generated subprograms when generating a multi core program When this option is specified each subprogram library file and object module file are input the addresses between the subprogram are resolved and the multi core program is generated At this time the startup routine and libraries supporting multi core will be linked Additionally ROMization processing and generation of a hex file will be performed at the same time An error will occur if a C source file or assembler so
265. category From the Individual Compile Options tab Undisplayed warning message in the Warning Message category Example of use To suppress outputting warning message W0566002 describe as gt cx CF3746 Xno_ waning 66002 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 421 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Phase individual option specification The phase individual option specification options are as follows Xasm_option Xlk_option Xasm_option This option specifies the file to be assembled Specification format Xasm_option file file Interpretation when omitted Only asm and s are recognized as the assembly target Detailed description This option specifies so that a file that is not recognized as an assembler source file a file other than asm and s is the assembly target Specify the file to be assembled as file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted Example of use To assemble file assemble test describe as gt cx CF3746 Xasm_option assemble test R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 422 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xlk_option This option specifies the file to be linked Specification format X1k_option file file Interpretation when omitted Only obj lib and Imf are recognized
266. cation format Interpretation when omitted The version information of the librarian is not output Detailed description This key outputs the version information of the librarian to the standard error output and terminates processing Example of use To output the version information of the librarian to the standard error output describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 536 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Member delete specification The member delete specification key is as follows d This key deletes a member from the specified library file Specification format PS Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This key deletes a member from the specified library file Example of use To delete member sub obj from library file libmain lib describe as gt lb d libmain lib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 537 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Member move specification The member move specification keys are as follows m ma mb m This key moves the specified member in the specified library file to the end of the file Specification format Interpretation when omitted Members are not moved Detailed description This key moves the specified member in the specified library file to the end of the file Example of use T
267. ce below the lower project tree it is assumed that you have dropped it onto the Main project lt 2 gt Adding a new file Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the File menu The Add File dialog box will open Designate the file to be created Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node Then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu The Add File dialog box will open Designate the file to be created Remark A blank file is created at the location designated in the Add File dialog box b Removing a file from the project You can remove a file from the project by one of the following procedures The file itself is not deleted from the file system Select the file you want to remove from the project and then select Remove from Project from the Project menu Select the file you want to remove from the project and then select Remove from Project from the context menu c Moving a file You can move a file by the following procedure The file is moved below the File node Drag the file you want to move and then drop it onto the destination Remarks 1 If you drop the file in the main project or subproject the individual options set in the file are retained R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 122 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 If you drop the
268. ce does not have an FPU then linking an object module file containing FPU instructions in CX version 1 10 or later will cause an error Linking an object module file generated by CX version 1 01 or earlier in this case will cause a warning to be displayed regardless of whether there are FPU instructions object module files generated with CA850 will be linked as is This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Floating point calculating type in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Floating point calculating type in the Output Code category Example of use To generate runtime library call instructions for floating point calculations describe as gt cx CF3746 Xfloat soft main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 361 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xfar_jump This option controls outputting far jump Specification format Xfar_jump file Interpretation when omitted The jarl or jr directive is generated for the branch to the function Detailed description This option generates the code that uses the jump instruction V850E or the jarl32 and jr32 instruction V850E2 and V850E2V3 for the branch to functions including interrupt functions described by C language specified in far jump calling function list file file fjp is recommended as the extension of fi
269. cess Additional include paths Use whole include paths specified tor build tool Macro definition Macro undetinitian C Language Character Encodng Output Code Output File Assemble List Error Output Warming Message Others Add debug informabton Species whether to generate the debug information Such information i generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option comresponds to the g option of the cx command H o Additional include patha 0 Yeg Macro definition 0 Macro undetinition O AHA AA A H You can set compile options for the C source file by setting the necessary properties in this tab Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Common Options tab and Compile Options tab by default except the properties shown below Additional include paths and Use whole include paths specified for build tool in the Preprocess category Object module file name in the Output File category 2 When setting assemble options for an assembler source file Select the assembler source file on the project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel Select Yes in the Set individual assemble option property in the Build category The Figure 2 68 Message Dialog Box will open Figure 2 67 Set individual assemble option Property R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 55 of 577 CubeSui
270. cessing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the cx options group How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 150 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Compile Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the compile phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Debug Information Assemble List External Variable Register Others 1 2 Optimization 3 Optimization Details 4 Preprocess 5 C Language 6 Character Encoding 7 Output Code 8 Output File 9 Symbol Information 10 11 12 Figure A 5 Property Panel Compile Options Tab Property A Le Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information es g El Optimization Level of optimization Default Optimization O default El Optimization D etads Sort external variables No Perform mline expansion of strcpy stromp memcpy memset Mo Use prologue
271. ch table function control for the boot flash re link function Xflash This option generates the load module file for the flash area Non ROMized load Xlink_output This option saves the load module file before ROMization module file save processing specification Multi core support Xmulti This option specifies the generation of a subprogram of a multi specification core program Xmulti_link This option specifies the linking of multi core subprograms Error output control This option outputs error messages to a file Warning message This option outputs the specified warning message output control Xno_warning This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Phase individual X Ik_option This option specifies the file to be linked option specification Command file This option specifies a command file specification R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 450 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Version help display specification The version help display specification options are as follows V h V This option displays the version information of the cx Specification format mo Interpretation when omitted Linking is performed without displaying the version information of the cx Detailed description This option outputs the version information of the cx to the standard error output It does not execute linking Ex
272. character code in the source file as UFT 8 Big5 Xcharacter_set big5 Interprets the Chinese character code in the source file as Traditional Chinese GB2312 Interprets the Chinese character code in Xcharacter_set gb231 2 the source file as Simplified Chinese No process Does not process the Japanese character Xcharacter_set none code in the source file 7 Output Code The detailed information on output codes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output comment to Select whether to output a C source program as a comment to the assembler source file to be assembler source file output This corresponds to the Xpass_ source option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_path in the Output assembler source file property in the Output File category or Yes Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xpass_ source Outputs a C source program as a comment to the assembler source file Does not output a C source program as a comment to the assembler source file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 208 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output code of switch Select the code output mode for switch statements in programs statement This corresponds to the Xswitch option of the cx command Default Configu
273. characters Up to 256 items can be specified Output C source comments to preprocessed file Select whether to output the comments of the C source to the preprocessed file This corresponds to the Xpreprocess option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes P in the Output preprocessed source file property in the Output File category is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xpreprocess comment Outputs the comments of the C source to the preprocessed file No Does not output the comments of the C source to the preprocessed file Select whether to output the line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file Output line number information to preprocessed file This corresponds to the Xpreprocess option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes P in the Output preprocessed source file property in the Output File category is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Outputs the line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file Restriction Yes Xpreprocess line No Does not output the line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file 5 C Language The detailed information on C language is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 156 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW R
274. cified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output assembler source file in the Output File category From the Compile Options tab Output folder for assembler source file in the Output File category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output assembler source file in the Output File category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output folder for assembler source file in the Output File category Example of use To save the assembler source file generated during compilation with sample asm as a file name describe as gt cx CF3746 Xasm_path sample asm main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 319 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xprn_path This option specifies where an assemble list file is to be saved Specification format Xprn_path path Interpretation when omitted An assemble list file will not be output Detailed description This option outputs an assemble list file when assembling and saves it to path If an existing file is specified as path If one assemble list file is output it will be saved with path as the file name If two or more assemble list files are output an error will occur If an existing folder is specified as path The assemble list file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn to path If the spe
275. cified folder or file as path does not exist An error will occur If path is omitted The assemble list file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn to the current folder If two or more files with the same name even if they are in different folders are specified as source files then a warning is output and an assemble list file is only saved for the last source file to be specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output assemble list file in the Assemble List category From the Compile Options tab Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output assemble list file in the Assemble List category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category Example of use To save the assemble list file that is output when assembling with sample prn as a file name describe as gt cx CF3746 Xprn_ path sample prn main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 320 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xtemp_path This option specifies the temporary folder Specification format Xtemp_path path Interpretation when omitted The temporary folder is determined according to the following sequence 1 Folder specified by environment
276. cking the overflow of the internal ROM is not supported when the single chip mode is selected Invalidate checking the overflow of the internal ROM by specifying the Xlink_check_off irom option and check the overflow on the link map Example of use Not to check the size and alignment conditions of the external symbol when it is linked describe as gt cx CF3746 Xlink check off symbol main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 382 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xalign_fill This option specifies the filling value of align holes Specification format Xalagn fill valive Interpretation when omitted The filling value 0x0000 is used for align holes between sections of the load module file to be generated Detailed description This option specifies filling value value of align holes between sections of the load module file to be generated The range that can be specified for value is Ox0000 to OxFFFF An abort error will occur if a value outside the range is specified If the specified value is less than 4 digits the higher digits will be filled with 0 An error will occur if value is omitted When this option is specified linking must be performed in the 2 pass mode by specifying the Xtwo_path_link option An error will occur if the Xtwo_path_link option is not specified Example of use To specify OxFFFF as the filling value of align ho
277. cking under ROMization The items that can be specified as string are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified rom_less Does not check a peripheral allocation error of the internal ROM for the rompsec section Specify this item when the ROM less mode is used Checking the overflow of the internal ROM is not supported when 1 is selected as the single chip mode Disable checking the overflow of the internal ROM by specifying this item address Does not check the duplicate addresses of the input file and output file An error will occur if string is omitted Example of use Not to check a peripheral allocation error of the internal ROM for the rompsec section describe as gt cx CF3746 Xromize check off rom_less main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 395 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Hex output control The hex output control options are as follows Xxhex Xhex_only Xhex_ format Xhex_fill Xhex_ section Xhex_block_size Xhex_ offset Xhex_null Xhex_symtab Xhex_rom_less Xhex This option specifies the hex file name Specification format Interpretation when omitted The hex file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the load module file name with the extension replaced by hex the load module file name that hex is added if the extension of the file name is
278. command line of the cx command and deleted double quotation mark The character string until the next double quotation mark is treated as a contiguous character string sharp If this is specified at the beginning of a line characters on that line before the end of the line are interpreted as a comment circumflex The character immediately following this is not treated as a special character b Example of command file specification Create command file cfile using an editor CF3746 Specifies the device Utest Deletes the definition of macro test oobject obj Specifies the object module file name Specifies the execution until the assemble phase Specifies the file to be compiled When the cx command is executed on the command line specify command file cfile by command file specification option gt type cfile lt displays the contents of cfile CF3746 Utest oobject obj C file c gt cx cfile lt Same operation as cx CF3746 Utest oobject obj c file c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 308 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 3 Set options in CubeSuite This section describes how to set cx options from CubeSuite On the CubeSuite s Project Tree panel select the Build Tool node Next select the View menu gt gt Property The Property panel opens Next select the Common Options tab Compile Options tab Assem
279. common v850e c main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 434 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xdev_path This option specifies the folder to search device files Specification format Xdev_path path Interpretation when omitted The device file is searched from the standard device file folder Detailed description This option searches a device file from folder path If the folder as path does not exist or if the device file specified by the C option cannot be found a warning will be output and the standard device file folderN te will be searched If it cannot be found an error will occur Note The device file is searched in the following order V850E2V3 1 CubeSuite install folde CubeSuite CX V x xx Device V850E2 Devicefile 2 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device V850 Devicefile 3 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device_Custom Devicefile V850E V850E2 1 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device V850 Devicefile 2 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device_Custom Devicefile An error will occur if path is omitted Example of use To search a device file from folder C NEC Tools32 dev describe as gt cx CF3746 Xdev_path C NECTools32 dev main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 435 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE
280. ct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xsfg_size_sidata This option specifies the size of sidata section Specification format Xsfg_ size sidata num Interpretation when omitted The frequency of variable use is calculated limiting the size of variables allocated to the sidata section to 32512 bytes Detailed description This option calculates the frequency of variable use limiting the size of variables allocated to the sidata section to num bytes Specify 0 to 32512 as num An error will occur if a value outside the range is specified An error will occur if num is omitted This option is valid only when the Xsfg_opt option is specified If the Xsfg_opt option is not specified this option will be ignored This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Size of sidata section in the Symbol Information category Example of use To calculate the frequency of variable use limiting the size of variables allocated to the sidata section to 32000 bytes describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 416 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xsfg_size_sedata This option specifies the size of sedata section Specification format Xsfg size sedata num Interpretation when omitted The frequency of variable use is calculated limiting the size of variables all
281. ctions If this field is blank the size is considered as 0x0 byte by the linker How to change Directly enter in the text box 0x0 to OXFFFFFFFF hexadecimal number Alignment value Specify the alignment conditions of the section When the odd number value is specified it changes to the even number value by auto matically adding one If this field is blank the value is considered as 0x4 by the linker However if the section name is tidata byte or tibss byte the odd number value can be specified If this field is blank the value is considered as 0x1 by the linker How to change Directly enter in the text box 0x0 to OxFF hexadecimal number Input section name Specify the input section name The following characters can be used only 0 9 A Z a Z _ How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 1022 characters Object file name Specify the name of the object file including the input section The specified object file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Object file name number of set items How to change Edit by the Object File Select dialog box which appears when clicking the button Remark Reserved sections are handled as follows If a section defined in the compiler as a reserved section is specified by Name or Input section name the Types and Attribute cannot
282. d menu shows menu items for the build process and others Build Project Runs a build of the project A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild Project Runs a rebuild of the project A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean Project Runs a clean of the project A clean of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rapid build Toggles the rapid build function between enabled default and disabled Update Dependencies Updates the dependency of a file in the project to build The dependency of a file in the subproject to be build is also updated when the subproject is added to the project Build active project Runs a build of the active project If the active project is the main project a build of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Runs a rebuild of the active project If the active project is the main project a rebuild of its subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Runs a clean of the active project If the active project is the main project a clean of its Subproject is not run Note
283. d not called using a pointer Consequently the All Functions section of the Adjust Stack Size dialog box only displays functions meeting the above conditions R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 293 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Functions called by multiple functions The stack usage tracer treats the stack information of functions called by multiple functions as unique Conse quently it is not possible to change the stack information for such functions depending on which function is calling them Example If you select function sub called by funci in the tree display area and open the Adjust Stack Size dialog box the changes are reflected in sub called by func2 as well int sub int i void func void void func2 void void main void funci func2 ine sub ane i 4 i return i void funcl void int ret i 0 ret sub i void func2 void int ret i 100 ret sub i ASM statements in C source If C source contains ASM statements the stack usage tracer may output the following message W0594132 Ille gal format in file path name line number If this occurs fix the problem by disabling the code in question using if declarations or the like or commenting it out Calls to indirectly recursive functions If a recursion path consists of multiple functions the stack size may be calculate
284. d Tool es Y8S0E2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program nalyzer Analyze Tool File ral Build tool generated Files m MultiCore Inf hex Multicore hex a Startup c_ comman c cA corel c cll coez C all stackPE 1 asmi alt stackPE2 asm dir multi dir R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 66 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 Make Settings for Build Operations This section explains operations on a build Set the link order of files Change the file build order of subprojects Display a list of build options Change the file build target project Add a build mode Change the build mode Delete a build mode Set the current build options as the standard for the project 2 15 1 Set the link order of files The link order of object module files and library files is decided automatically but you can also set the order On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Set Link Order from the context menu The Link Order dialog box will open Figure 2 85 Link Order Dialog Box Link Order slstem obj user lib The names of the following files are listed in File in the order that the files are input to the linker Object module files which are generated from the source files added to the selected main project or subproject Object module files which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Library f
285. d incorrectly Example Assuming that the frame size of recursive functions func_rec1 func_rec2 is 8 bytes if the recursion depth of func_rec1 func_rec2 is set to 3 in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box then although the stack size of func will be calculated correctly as 8 24 3 the stack size of func2 will be calculated as 8 3 ignoring calls to func_rect1 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 294 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 void main APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE func rechl int i func _ rec2 int i funel void func2 void void funci func2 void fume recl int i func_rec2 i void func_rec2 void funci int i E func _ recl i 1 void 4 Pane rect 2 void func2 void 4 func_rec2 2 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 sQENESAS Page 295 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box This dialog box is used to display a list of functions for which the stack usage tracer could not obtain stack information functions for which information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions was changed intentionally and functions for which the stack usage tracer forcibly set an additional margin Figure A 50 Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Dialog Box Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Funct
286. d mark mark SS ee Number of bytes of 3C58E01B expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number 4 Record type 00 EX Each byte of code expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number Checksum The lower 1 byte of two s complement E6C of 04 01 00 00 3C 58 EO 1B 194 is expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal number End record This indicates the end of the code Record mark Item Description Number Fixed at 00 Fixed at 01 Fixed at FF o Fixed at 0000 Remark The allocation address in the Intel hex format is 2 bytes 16 bits Therefore only a 64 KB space can be directly specified To extend this area the Intel extended hex format adds the extension address of 16 bits so that the space up to 1 M byte 20 bits can be used Specifically the record type that specifies the 16 bit extension address is added This extension address is shifted 4 bits and added to the allocation address to express a 20 bit address To indicate FFFFFH for example FOOOH is set as the extension address and FFFFH is specified as the location address In the Intel extended hex format only 0 to FFFFFH can be addressed To express 100000H another object format must be used R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 104 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS With CX a message will be output if the rule of this format is violated with this address and size In the Intel extended hex format a value that can be e
287. d to the hex file This corresponds to the Xhex_section option of the cx command The specified section is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed when Expanded Tektronix hex format Xhex_format T in the Hex file format property is selected or No in the Specify converted address range property is selected Default Converted sections number of set items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1022 characters Up to 1024 items can be specified Specify maximum length Select whether to specify the maximum length of block record of block record This corresponds to the Xhex_block_size option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xhex_block_size Specifies the maximum length of block record No Regards the default value as the maximum length of block record R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 191 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Maximum length of Specify the maximum length of block record block record This corresponds to the Xhex_block_size option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xhex_block_size in the Specify maximum length of block record property is selected Default This differs depending on the item selected in the Hex file form
288. data This option specifies the maximum size of data allocated to the sdata or sbss section This option specifies that constant data is allocated to the sconst section Xfloat V850E2V3 This option controls generating floating point calculation instructions Xfar_jump This option controls outputting far jump Xdiv V850E2V3 This option generates the div and divu instructions for division Assembler control Xasm_far_jump This option controls outputting far jump for an assembler source specification V850E2 V850E2V3 file A This option specifies the library file to be used during linking This option specifies the folder to search library files Xno_stdlib This option suppresses linking the standard library Library link control Xno_startup This option suppresses linking the startup routine Xstartup This option specifies the startup routine R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 311 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xregmode_info This option outputs detailed information when different register modes are mixed Xforce_link This option continues link processing when the internal ROM RAM overflows Xsdata_info This option outputs information that can be used as a yardstick for the parameter of the Xsdata option to the standard output Xtwo_pass_link This option performs linking in the 2 pass mode Xignore_address_error This option continues link processing if a
289. ded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Error message file name Specify the error message file name The extension can be freely specified The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName err has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 259 characters 11 Warning Message The detailed information on warning messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 213 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Displayed warning Specify the warning message number to be displayed regardless of the warning leve
290. der of CX The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CX is searched This corresponds to the option of the cx command The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified System include paths Change the specified order of the include paths which the system set during compiling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the option of the cx command The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears w
291. der certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas El
292. der the load module file name with the extension replaced by map Use this option when only hex output is executed after generating the load module file An error will occur if a load module file is not specified as the input file Example of use To generate hex file sample hex from load module file a lmf describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex only sample hex a lmf R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 500 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Hex conversion control The hex conversion control options are as follows Xhex_ format Xhex_fill Xhex_ section Xhex_block_size Xhex_ offset Xhex_null Xhex_symtab Xhex_rom_less Xhex_ format This option specifies the format of the hex file to be output Specification format xnex_format format Interpretation when omitted The format of the hex file to be output is regarded as the Intel expanded hex format 32 bit address It is the same result as when the Xhex_format i option is specified Detailed description This option specifies the format of the hex file to be output The items that can be specified as format are shown below Intel expanded hex format up to 1 MB Intel expanded hex format 32 bit address up to 4 GB Motorola S type hex format standard address up to 16 MB Motorola S type hex format 32 bit address up to 4 GB Expanded Tektronix he
293. device If device does not exist the corresponding device file does not exist an error will occur An error will occur if device is omitted This option cannot be omitted when linking is performed Example of use To specify UPD70F3746 as the target device describe as gt cx CF3746 main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 456 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xdev_path This option specifies the folder to search device files Specification format Xdev_path path Interpretation when omitted The device file is searched from the standard device file folder Detailed description This option searches a device file from folder path If the folder as path does not exist or if the device file specified by the C option cannot be found a warning will be output and the standard device file folderN te will be searched If it cannot be found an error will occur Note The device file is searched in the following order V850E2V3 1 CubeSuite install folde CubeSuite CX V x xx Device V850E2 Devicefile 2 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device V850 Devicefile 3 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device_Custom Devicefile V850E V850E2 1 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device V850 Devicefile 2 CubeSuite install foldeACubeSuite CX V x xx Device_Custom Devicefile An error will occur
294. diting source files 2 Observe registered files changing This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 273 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Starts a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text editor or the like Does not start a rapid build when a source file registered in the project is edited or saved by an external text edi tor or the like default Remark This item is only enabled if the Enable Rapid Build check box is selected Caution Files that are in the project folder and have been registered to the project can be monitored The rapid build will not finish if this item is selected and the files to be built have been regis tered for automatic editing or overwriting e g by commands executed before or after the build If the rapid build does not finish unselect this item and stop the rapid build 3 Enable Break Sound Beeps when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break Does not beep when the execution of a user program is halted due to a break event hardware or software break default 4 Buttons Initialize Settings Returns all currently displayed setting to their default values Function buttons Initialize All Settings Restores all settings on this dialog box to their default v
295. ditional library paths O System library paths Sistem library paths O Link standard library es If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 46 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 53 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit In the Text specify only the xxx part of library file name libxxx lib example if you specify user libuser lib is assumed to be specified Add one item in one line You can specify up to 249 characters per line up to 256 lines Remark libxxx a can also be specified lipxxx lib is searched with higher priority If it is not found libxxx a is searched If you click the OK button the entered library files are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 54 Using libraries Property After Setting Library Files Using hbrarnes T UZET vstem Iorarnes L Additional library paths Additional library paths 0 System library paths System library paths U Link standard library es To change the library files you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Using libraries property in the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab The library file is searched from the library path To add a library path set the Additional library paths prope
296. ds to the Xprn_path option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters 6 Others Other detailed information on assembly is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 170 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before assemble processing before assemble Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before assemble processing number
297. e 2 to 17 bytes Section definition field SEDF N te 1 5 to 35 bytes R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 rCENESAS Page 110 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS ltem Description Number 7 Symbol definition field SYDF N 2 5 to 35 bytes Notes 1 Section definition field One section definition field must exist in each section A section definition field can be followed by or can follow any of symbol definition fields Number of digits in the base address of the section and the base address of the section 2 to 17 bytes Number of digits in the length of the section and the length of the section 2 to 17 bytes 2 Item Description Number Type of symbol 1 Global address symbol having binding class GLOBAL and type other than ABS Global scalar symbol having binding class GLOBAL and type ABS Global code address Global code address Local address symbol having binding class GLOBAL and type other than ABS Local scalar Symbol having binding class GLOBAL and type ABS Global code address Global code address Number of characters of the symbol and the symbol 2 to 17 bytes Number of digits of the symbol and the symbol 2 to 17 bytes Examples 1 8SVCSTUFF 02402C6 22CRIDI40PEN25014READ25815WRITE260 NL R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 111 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Number 6 Section definition field The number of dig
298. e Displayed warning message property takes precedence This corresponds to the Xno_warning option of the cx command Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters 9 Others Other detailed information on assembly is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 222 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before assemble processing before assemble The following macro names are available as embedded macros processing ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For
299. e Frequently Used Options for Compile category From the Compile Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Compile Options tab System include paths in the Preprocess category From the Individual Compile Options tab Additional include paths in the Preprocess category From the Individual Compile Options tab Use whole include paths specified for build tool in the Preprocess category Example of use To search include files from the current folder folder D include the standard folder in that order describe as gt cx CF3746 ID include main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 334 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xpreprocess This option controls outputting the result of preprocessing Specification format Xpreprocess string string Interpretation when omitted The comments and line number information of the C source are not output to the preprocessed file Detailed description This option outputs the comments and line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file This option is valid only when the P option is specified If the P option is not specified this option will be ignored The items that can be specified as string are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified Outputs the comments of the C source Outputs line number informatio
300. e 2 pass mode Performs linking in the 1 pass mode Specify the filling value for align holes between sections of the load module file to be generated If this is blank it is assumed that 0000 hexadecimal number has been specified This corresponds to the Xalign_fill option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xtwo_pass_link in the Link in 2 pass mode property is selected Default 0000 hexadecimal number How to change Directly enter in the text box 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal number of 4 digits or fewer Select whether to continue linking outputting warning messages instead of errors if the following illegalities are found during relocation processing The result of address calculation of an unresolved external reference is illegal The relationship with the section to be allocated is illegal This corresponds to the Xignore_address_ error option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Restriction Continues linking outputting warning messages Xignore_address_ error if an illegality is found during relocation processing An error occurs if an illegality is found during relocation processing CENESAS Page 180 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Check all multi defined symbols Check illegality of external symbol Check illegality of undefined external symbol Check allocation for internal ROM area APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE S
301. e C source file exists in file it will be deleted and replaced with new contents If the information does not exist it will be added into file When the input is an assembler source file If the information about the assembler source file exists in file it will be deleted and replaced with new contents If the information does not exist it will be added into file If the information about the original C source file exists of the assembler source file in file it will be deleted The original C source file is acquired from the FILE quasi instruction in the assembler source file When the input is an object module file If the information about the source file of the object module file exists in file only information determined during linking in it will be deleted and replaced with new contents If the information does not exist nothing will be output An error will occur if file is omitted If two or more files are input and if C source files assembler source files and object module files are mixed each input file will be updated as above and the information will be output to file The information about a library file is not output Information for static functions that are not called unless Odelete_static_func off is specified and information for Static variables in unused files are not output R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 409 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE It is recommend
302. e Output tab name Saves the contents on the currently selecting tab in the previously saved text file txt see c Save log When this item is selected for the first time after launching the program the operation is equivalent to when selecting Save Output tab name As Save Output tab name As Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents on the currently selecting tab in the designated text file txt see c Save log R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 231 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu only available for the Output panel The following items are exclusive for the Edit menu in the Output panel other items are all invalid Copy Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Select All Selects all the messages displayed on this panel Find Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with the Quick Search tab target Replace Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with the Whole Replace tab target Context menu Copy Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Select All Selects all the messages displayed on this panel Clear Deletes all the messages displayed on this panel Tag jump lf there is information of the file name line and column on the caret line jumps to that location Help for Message Displays the help related to the message on the current caret position This only applies to warning messages a
303. e detailed information on messages is displayed and the configuration can be changed Verbose mode Select whether to display the execution status of the librarianN on the Output panel This corresponds to the v option of the librarian Note The meaning of the output format of the execution status is shown below Output Format Meaning q file name Create a new library file or add a member 3 Others Other detailed information on creating a library is displayed and the configuration can be changed Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before library generation processing before library generate Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file YLibraryFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under the library generation processing The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed before library generate processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specifi
304. e far jump function it is assumed that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and assembling is performed This corresponds to the Xasm_far_jump V850E2 V850E2V3 option of the cx command This property is displayed only for the project using a device with the V850E2 core and V850E2V3 architecture How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_far_jump Assumes that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and performs assembling Performs assembly as a jarl or jr instruction 5 Assemble List The detailed information on the assemble list is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the Xprn_path option of the cx command Output folder for Specify the folder which the assemble list file is output assemble list file The assemble list file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This correspon
305. e file output folder property The file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by i This corresponds to the P option of the cx command This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes P Outputs the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file No Does not output the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file 9 Assemble List The detailed information on the assemble list is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the Xprn_path option of the cx command Restriction Yes Xprn_path Output folder for Specify the folder which the assemble list file is output assemble list file The assemble list file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this i
306. e following files that are added to the project are displayed directly hereafter referred to as File node below this node C source file c Assembler source file asm s Header file h inc Object module file obj o Library file lib Link directive file dir dr Symbol information file sfg Other file doc xml etc Build tool generated files The following files generated by the build tool appear directly below the hereafter referred to as Build tool generated node generated during the build files node For other than library projects Load module file Imf Link map file map Hex file hex Error message file err For library projects Library file lib Error message file err Files displayed below this node cannot be renamed deleted or moved This node is always generated below the File node This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after building Startup The node for adding other than the standard startup routine to the hereafter referred to as Startup node project This node is always displayed below the File node Category name Categories that the user creates to categorize files see 2 3 6 Classify hereafter referred to as category node a file into a category This node is always created below the File node Subproject name Subproject Subprojects added to the project hereafter referred to as Subpr
307. e is a lmf Detailed description This option specifies the output file name as file If file already exists it will be overwritten This option is valid when processing is interrupted by specifying the P S or c option If this option is specified with the P option lt is assumed that is the name of the file containing the results of preprocessing performed on the input file has been specified as file If this option is specified with the S option lt is assumed that an assembler source file name has been specified as file If this option is specified with the c option It is assumed that an object module file name has been specified as file Other than above It is assumed that a load module file name has been specified as file An error will occur if two or more files are output An error will occur if file is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Individual Compile Options tab Object module file name in the Output File category R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 316 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To output the load module file with sample Imf as the file name describe as gt cx CF3746 osample lmf main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 317 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xobj_path This option specifies where the obj
308. e object module file is generated when the Xrelinkable_object option is not specified and when this option is specified when a relocatable object module file is generated when the Xrelinkable_object option is specified are shown below Examples 1 Output Information for the executable load module file keekeee LINK EDITOR GP INFORMATION 1 2 3 4 GP SYMBOL SECTION SECTION SECTION NAME NAME SIZE REAL SIZE ASSUMED NUMBER _gp DATA 0x000af10 0x00002000 0x00003450 0x00004430 0x000050a8 0x00007b40 0x0000a010 0x0000af10 0x00012050 0x00000050 0x00002050 0x00007050 0x00010050 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 527 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Output Information for the relocatable object module file EREREREX LINK EDITOR GP INFORMATION 1 2 3 4 GP SYMBOL SECTION SECTION SECTION NAME NAME SIZE REAL SIZE ASSUMED NUMBER NOT AVAILABLE sdata Ox000af10 0x00002000 0x00003450 0x00004430 0x000050a8 0x00007b40 0x0000a010 O0x0000af10 0x00012050 0x00000050 0x00002050 GpCommon 0Ox00010000 0x00005000 0x00010000 Description Name of global pointer symbol This is the name of the global pointer symbol used for linking If the object module file is relocatable NOT AVAILABLE is displayed Section name This is the name of the sdata attribute section or sbss attribute section to which data are allocated Because
309. e order which they are specified The cx links the standard library libc lib and standard startup routine cstart ob as well as the library specified by this option automatically When the Xno_romize option is not specified the ROMization area reservation code file rompcrt obj is also linked automatically Use the Xno_stdlib and Xno_ startup option to suppress this This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Using libraries in the Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Link Options tab Using libraries in the Library category From the Link Options tab System libraries in the Library category Note CubeSuite install foldernCubesuite CX V x xx lib 850e Example of use To specify library file libsmp lib to be used during linking describe as gt cx CF3746 lsmp main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 458 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE L This option specifies the folder to search library files Specification format Lpath path Interpretation when omitted The library file is searched from the standard library file folder Detailed description Note in that order This option searches libraries from folder path the standard folder If path does not exist a warning will be output An error will occur if path is omitted This option is eq
310. e output to indicate that the _main symbol is an undefined symbol This may occur when the user links the default startup routine cstart obj or cstartN obj rather than a user specified startup routine or when cstart asm or cstartN asm is used as they are assembled and linked The error is due to code jarl _main lp that is written following cstart asm and cstartN asm If the main function is not needed overwrite this code then use the reassembled object module file as the startup routine In the case of an application that uses the real time OS main function does not exist normally Use the startup routine provided as a sample of the real time OS 6 Prologue epilogue runtime library The prologue epilogue runtime library must be allocated to the special purpose pro_epi_runtime section If it is not allocated there the following message will be output and linking will be stopped If a link directive file has been specified describe the mapping directive before the text section pro epi runtime PROGBITS AX pro_ epi runtime text SPROGBITS AX If the pro_epi_runtime section is placed after the text section it overlaps the allocation position of the default operation of the section that is packed during ROMization Therefore allocating the pro_epi_runtime section before the text section is recommended R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 530 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B CO
311. e reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name The assembler source file is saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by asm If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xasm_path option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_path in the Output assembler source file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Output preprocessed Select whether to output the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file source file The file is output to the folder specified in the Intermediate file output folder property The file is output under the source file name with the extension replaced by i This corresponds to the P option of the cx command This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes P
312. eSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This is the first window to be opened when CubeSuite is launched This window is used to control the user program execution and open panels for the build process 3 sample CubeSuite Project Tree 2 m set F ETETE Project Tree q x f main c 2 O8 o jsample Project RE UPD70F3506 Microcontroller a A Pin Configurator Design Tool Code Generator Design Tool A CX Build Tool S gt 850E2M Simulator Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a QB Programmer Flash Programming Toa File a g Build tool generated files im sample Inf hex sample hex B s Startup asm start asm main c E sub Subproject JE uPD7OF3506 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool 3 en Code Generator Design Tool Figure A 1 Main Window EER This function implements main function Parameters None Returns 53jvoid main void Start user code Do not edit comment generated here TMPO Start while 10 End user code Do not edit comment generated here Ay CX Build Tool 850E2M Simulator Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Start build all Thursday September 24 2009 5 19 48 PM Start build sample DefaultBuild gri QB Programmer Flash Programming gt De faultBuild sample hex E Sh File Build ended Error 0 Warning 0 Property Ended Success l1 Projects Fai
313. eSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the L option of the cx command The specified library path name is displayed as the subproperty Additional library paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified System library paths The folder to search the system library file is displayed The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder If a relative path is displayed the reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the L option of the cx command The library path name is displayed as the subproperty Default System library paths number of defined items How to change Changes not allowed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 175 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link standard library Select whether to link the standard library This corresponds to the Xno_stdlib option of the cx command Select from the drop d
314. ea reservation code file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 46 Specify ROMization Area Reservation Code File Dialog Box specify ROMization Area Reservation Code File a Look in 22 2 m O DefaulkBuild sub My Recent Documents My Documenta 5 My Computer 9 JF File name 4 He k les of type AUMization area reservation code fiel obj 0 Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following property and then click the button From the ROMize Options tab ROMization area reservation code file name in the Input File category Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 283 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Select the name of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from ROMization area reservation code file obj o
315. ecified section in hex format and outputs them Xhex_block_size This option specifies the maximum length of the block Xhex_ offset This option specifies the offset of the address to be output Xhex_null This option generates as many null characters as the size of the section of data without an initial value Xhex_symtab This option converts the symbol table and outputs it Xhex_rom_less This option does not use the information of the internal ROM area when the hex file is filled Multi core support Xmulti This option specifies the generation of a subprogram of a multi specification core program Xmulti_link This option specifies the linking of multi core subprograms Information file Xcube_suite_info This option outputs the CubeSuite information file output control Xno_cube_suite_info This option suppresses the output of the CubeSuite information file This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the Xsfg This option generates a symbol information file Xsfg_opt This option outputs the optimum allocation information Xsfg_size_tidata This option specifies the size of tidata section Xsfg_size_tidata_byte This option specifies the size of tidata byte section Xsfg_size_sidata This option specifies the size of sidata section Xsfg_size_sedata This option specifies the size of sedata section Xsfg_size_sdata This option specifies the size of sdata section Error output contr
316. eck box before clicking the Browse button to add all paths under the specified one down to 5 levels to Path One path per one line If you click the OK button the entered include paths are displayed as subproperties Figure 2 38 Additional include paths Property After Adding Include Paths Additional include paths De Macro defintion Macro definition 0 Macro undetinitian Macro undetinition 0 To change the include paths you can use the button or enter the path directly in the text box of the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties automatically Remark You can also set the option in the same way with the Additional include paths property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 4 Set a macro definition Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel The macro definition setting is made with the Macro definition property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 39 Macro definition Property E Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Macro Undetinition Macro undetinithorn If you click the button the Text Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 40 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 40 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS
317. eck_ off Xromize_check_ off This option omits error checking under ROMization Specification format xXromize check off string string Interpretation when omitted A peripheral allocation error of the internal ROM is not checked for the rompsec section The duplicate address of the input file and output file is checked Detailed description This option omits error checking under ROMization The items that can be specified as string are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified rom_less Does not check a peripheral allocation error of the internal ROM for the rompsec section Specify this item when the ROM less mode is used Checking the overflow of the internal ROM is not supported when 1 is selected as the single chip mode Disable checking the overflow of the internal ROM by specifying this item Does not check the duplicate addresses of the input file and output file An error will occur if string is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the ROMize Options tab Ignore ROMization error in the Others category Example of use Not to check a peripheral allocation error of the internal ROM for the rompsec section describe as scx CF3746 xXromize check off rom less main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 497 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 5 Hex output option
318. ect module file generated during compilation is to be saved Specification format Xobj path path Interpretation when omitted The object module file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by obj to the current folder However the object module file will not be saved if one source file is specified as input and the c option is not specified Detailed description This option saves the object module file generated during compilation to path If an existing file is specified as path If one object module file is output it will be saved with path as the file name If two or more object module files are output an error will occur If an existing folder is specified as path The object module file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by obj to path If the specified folder or file as path does not exist An error will occur If path is omitted The object module file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by obj to the current folder If two or more files with the same name even if they are in different folders are specified as source files then a warning is output and an object module file is only saved for the last source file to be specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Intermediate file output folder in the Output File Type and Path category Example of
319. ectly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 166 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Assemble Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the assemble phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Debug Information 1 2 Preprocess 3 Character Encoding 4 Output Code 5 Assemble List 6 Others Caution This tab is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Figure A 6 Property Panel Assemble Options Tab Property A Le Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information fes g El Preproces Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 System include paths System include paths 0 Macro definition Macro definition O Macro undefinition Macro undefinitionf0 Character Encodng Output Code Assemble List Others Add debug informabon Species Whether to generate the debug information Such information i generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option comesponds t H HAAA A A Common OPET A Compile Opti A A A ROMze Opt A Hex Oukput 7 Description of each category 1
320. ectronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics How to Use This Manual This manual describes the role of the CubeSuite integrated development environment for developing applications and systems for V850 microcontrollers and provides an outline of its features CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE for V850 microcontrollers integrating the necessary tools for the development phase of software e g design implementation and debugging into a single platform By providing an integrated environment it is possible to perform all development using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Readers This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the CubeSuite and design software and hardware application systems Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the Cubesuite to use for reference in developing the hardware or software of systems using these devices Organization This manual can be broadly divided into the following units CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX B COMMAND RE
321. ed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 196 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after library generation processing after library generate Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file YLibraryFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under the library generation processing The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after library generate processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the create library options to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the create library options group How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 197 of 577 Oct 01 2010
322. ed delete _static_func on or off Deleting unused static functions If value is omitted it is assumed that on has been specified This item is valid when the Onothing option is not specified pipeline on or off Pipeline optimization V850E2V3 If value is omitted it is assumed that on has been specified This item is always valid when the Ospeed option is specified If item is omitted it is assumed that this option has specified Osize If this option is specified more than once for the same item the option specified last will be valid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Level of optimization in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category From the Compile Options tab Level of optimization in the Optimization category From the Compile Options tab Maximum number of loop expansions in the Optimization Details category From the Compile Options tab Remove unused static functions in the Optimization Details category From the Compile Options tab Perform inline expansion in the Optimization Details category From the Compile Options tab Perform pipeline optimization in the Optimization Details category R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 345 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE From the Individual Compile Options tab Level of optimization in the Optimization c
323. ed and runtime library call instructions are generated If the target device has FPU floating point calculation instructions are generated Software Calculating Generates runtime library call instructions for Xfloat soft floating point calculations FPU Calculating Generates floating point calculation instructions of Xfloat fpu FPU floating point unit for floating point calculations Select whether to generate the div and divu instructions instead of the divq and divqu instructions for division Generate div divu instructions Although the divq and divqu instructions are fast the number of execution cycles will differ depending on the values of the operands This corresponds to the Xdiv V850E2V3 option of the cx command This property is displayed only for the project using a device with the V850E2V3 architecture having an FPU Specify the Far Jump file name Far Jump file names The Far Jump file outputs the code that uses the jmp instruction V850E ES core or jarl82 and jr32 instruction V850E2 core or V850E2V3 architecture for branch instructions of functions described in the file The cx command outputs an error if the function is in a range that cannot be branched to by the jarl or jr directive 2MB or more in which case the Far Jump file is used to recompile Use the extension fjp This corresponds to the Xfar_jump option of the cx command The specified Far Jump file name is displayed a
324. ed after build processing property The following macro names are available as embedded macros Program Replaces with the program name under execution Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution FileName Replaces with the file name being compile assemble or making link If this is blank FileName Program Options will be set automatically Default FileName Program Options How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character Siring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 256 characters Specify the folder to which the temporary files generated by the cx command under execution are saved Temporary folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different If this is blank the temporary folder is determined in the following sequence 1 Folder specified by environmental variable TEMP 2 Folder specified by environmental variable TMP 3 Folder of the main project or subproject This corresponds to the Xiemp_path option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 200 characters
325. ed by every category in the list And the settings of the information can be changed directly Mark E indicates that all the items in the category are expanded Mark H indicates that all the items are col lapsed You can expand collapse the items by clicking these marks or double clicking the category name Mark indicates that only a hexadecimal number is allowed to input in the text box See the section on each tab for the details of the display setting in the category and its contents 3 Property description area This area displays the brief description of the category and item selected in the detailed information display change area 4 Tab selection area Categories for the display of the detailed information are changed by selecting a tab In this panel the following tabs are contained see the section on each tab for the details of the display setting on the tab a When the Build tool node is selected on the Project Tree panel Common Options tab Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab Link Options tab ROMize Options tab Hex Output Options tab Create Library Options tab b When a file is selected on the Project Tree panel Build Settings tab for C source file assembler source file object module file link directive file symbol information file and library file Individual Compile Options tab for C source file Individual Assemble Options tab for assembler source file File Infor
326. ed description This option performs the structure packing If this option is specified struct members will not be aligned by their member types but rather code will be generated with alignment packed to the specified num bytes 1 2 4 or 8 can be specified as num An abort error will occur if any other item is specified An error will occur if num is omitted This option can not be specified together with the Xinline_strcpy option If this option is specified when the structure packing is specified by the pragma directive in the C source the value specified by this option is applied to all structures until the first pragma directive appears After that the value of the pragma directive is applied Even after the pragma directive has appeared however the value specified by the option is applied if the default value is specified if the value of the packing by the pragma directive This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Structure packing in the Output Code category Example of use To generate code with struct member alignment packed to 1 byte describe as gt cx CF3746 Xpack 1 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 351 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xpass_source This option outputs a C source program as a comment to the assembler source file Specification format X
327. ed during building rapid building rebuilding compiling or assembling is highlighted as the example below The file without errors or warnings c main c The file with a warning main c Remarks 1 The file with both an error and a warning is highlighted in red 2 The highlight is canceled when the build option general option or individual option or the build mode is changed lt 2 gt The names of the following files are displayed in boldface The source file that has not been compiled after editing The source file after a clean has been executed The source file after the build tool option has been changed The source file after the build mode has been changed Remark The file names are all displayed in boldface right after the project is opened The boldface display is canceled after a build is executed o Highlighting the non build target file The file that is set as non build target is highlighted as shown in the example below Non build target file T main c p Highlighting the file that core number is specified In a project using a device supporting multi core the icon of the file specifying the core number will change to an icon with the core number added Ordinary file File specifying core number 1 Remarks 1 Core numbers 1 to 4 are supported 2 Files that are not build targets are not targeted by this function q Highlighting the project that has been changed The file component that is added
328. ed from and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered characters to the area that this dialog box is called from and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 238 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Figure A 26 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel select the following properties and then click the button From the Common Options tab Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Assemble category Using libraries in the Frequently Used Options for Link category Memo in the Notes category and Commands executed before build pro cessing Commands executed after build processing in the Others category From the Compile Options tab Macro definition Macro undefinition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before compile processing Commands executed after compile processing in the Others category From the Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before assemble processing Commands execu
329. ed to by the jarl or jr directive t2MB or more in which case the Far Jump file is used to recompile Use the extension fjp This corresponds to the Xfar_jump option of the cx command The specified Far Jump file name is displayed as the subproperty Default Far Jump file names number of set items How to change Click the button to open the Path Edit dialog box gt Edit by the Specify Far Jump File dialog box which appears when clicking the Browse button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 5000 items can be specified However only the file name specified last is valid 8 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assembler source Select whether to output the assembler source file of the compile result for the C source file This corresponds to the Xasm_path option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_path Outputs the assembler source file of the compile result for the C source Does not output the assembler source file of the compile result for the C source R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 161 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output folder for Specify the folder which the assembler source file is output assembler source file If a relative path is specified th
330. efore ROMization processing describe as gt cx CF3746 Xlink output sample lmf main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 481 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Multi core support specification The multi core suppor specification options are as follows Xmulti Xmulti_link Xmulti This option specifies the generation of a subprogram of a multi core program Specification format Xmulti type Interpretation when omitted A single core program is generated Detailed description This option specifies the subprogram type when generating a subprogram of a multi core program If this option is specified for a target that is not a multi core CPU a warning will be output and this option will be ignored The items that can be specified as type are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Generates a program for core n The value that can be specified for nis an integer in the range of 1 to the number of cores on the target CPU An error will occur if any other value is specified Generate the common module When the input is a C source file rO relative instructions for acquiring variable access and function addresses are generated handled in the same way as if a pragma nopic directive is described at the top of the file An error will occur if a pragma pic directive is described An error will occur if the data be
331. egment Section list area and then click the button on Name in the Segment Section detail area In the Link Directive File Generation dialog box select a section in the Segment Section list area and then click the button on Input section name in the Segment Section detail area In the Link Directive File Generation dialog box select a symbol in the Symbol list area and then click the but ton on Segment name in the Symbol detail area In the Link Directive File Generation dialog box select a symbol in the Symbol list area and then click the but ton on Segment name in the Base symbol name area Description of each area 1 String area Input characters in one line By default the current value of the area that this dialog box is called from is reflected to this area You cannot start a new line Remark Up to 32767 characters can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 237 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE More than maximum number of restriction in the prop The numbers of input characters exceeds the maxi erty that called this dialog box characters cannot be mum number of restriction in the property that called specified this dialog box Function buttons EE the entered characters to the area that this dialog box is call
332. el select a source file and then select Open from the context menu On the Project Tree panel select a file and then select Open with Internal Editor from the context menu On the Project Tree panel select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu and then create a text file or source file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 227 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Title bar The name of the open text file or source file is displayed Marks that are displayed at the end of the file name indicate as follows The contents of the editing file is changed Uneditable The opened text file is write disabled The same text file is multiply opened 2 Line number area This area displays the line number of the opened text file or source file 3 Characters area This area displays character strings of text files and source files and you can edit it This area has the following functions a Character editing Characters can be entered from the keyboard Various shortcut keys can be used to enhance the edit function b File monitor The following function for monitoring is provided to manage source files If the contents of the currently displayed file are changed not with CubeSuite a message is displayed to indicate whether to save the file You can either select yes or no Remark The following items can be customized by setti
333. elect whether to generate runtime library call instructions for floating point calculations or to generate floating point instructions for the floating point unit FPU Floating point calculating type This corresponds to the Xfloat V850E2V3 option of the cx command This property is displayed only for the project using a device with the V850E2V3 architecture having an FPU Default Auto None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Auto None If the target device does not have FPU floating point calculation instructions are not generated and runtime library call instructions are generated If the target device has FPU floating point calculation instructions are generated Software Calculating Generates runtime library call instructions for Xfloat soft floating point calculations FPU Calculating Generates floating point calculation instructions of Xfloat fpu FPU floating point unit for floating point calculations Select whether to generate the div and divu instructions instead of the divq and divqu instructions for division Generate div divu instructions Although the divq and divqu instructions are fast the number of execution cycles will differ depending on the values of the operands This corresponds to the Xdiv V850E2V3 option of the cx command This property is displayed only for the project using a device with the V850E2V3 architecture having an FPU Default How
334. elect whether to output a message for all multi defined external symbols and stop link processing This corresponds to the Xmultiple_ symbol option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xmultiple_ symbol Outputs a message for all multi defined external symbols and stops link processing Outputs a message for the first multi defined external symbol and stops link processing Select whether to check if the size and alignment conditions of an external symbol are invalid when linking it This corresponds to the Xlink_check_off option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Checks if the size and alignment conditions of an external symbol are invalid when linking it Does not check if the size and alignment Xlink_check_off symbol conditions of an external symbol are invalid when linking it Select whether to check if the size and alignment conditions of an undefined external symbol are invalid when linking it This corresponds to the Xlink_check_off option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Checks if the size and alignment conditions of an undefined external symbol are invalid when linking it No Does not check if the size and alignment Xlink_check_off undefin conditions of an undefined external symbol are ed invalid when linking it Select whether to check for the al
335. elp of this window Functions in the same manner as when skcx Help is selected from the Help menu 3 Tree display area The calling relationship of the functions is shown in tree format The table below shows the meaning of the icon displayed to the left of the string representing the function name The function directly called by a given function with the largest total stack size Information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modi fied via the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file The stack usage tracer has not acquired any stack information for this function Other than the above Remark The display priority for icons is from High E to Low _ R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 291 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Context menu Select a function in this area and then right click with the mouse The context menu described below appears Adjust Stack Size Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function 4 List display area Display the stack information for a single function function name total stack size frame size additional margin and file name in list format Function Displays the function name Note that this area will only display functions from level 1 the selected function and level
336. em as the standard build option are as shown below Figure 2 98 Property Panel After Setting Standard Build Option O Output File Type andPath Output file type Execute Module Hex File Intermediate file output folder zb uld ode ame Caution When the main project is selected only the main project settings are made Even if subprojects are added their settings are not made R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 74 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 Runa Build This section explains operations related to running a build 1 Build types The following types of builds are available Table 2 1 Build Types Build Out of build target files runs a build of only updated files gt See 2 16 1 Run a build of updated files Rebuild Runs a build of all build target files gt See 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build Runs a build in parallel with the change of the build setting gt See 2 16 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations Batch build Runs builds in batch with the build modes that the project has gt See 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remarks 1 Builds are run in the order of subproject main project Subprojects are built in the order that they are displayed on the project tree see 2 15 2 Change the file build order of subprojects 2 lf there are files being edited with the Editor panel when running a build rebuild or batch build
337. en Auto None or Table jump Xswitch table in the Output code of switch statement property is selected If Auto None is selected in the Output code of switch statement property and the cx command automatically selects if else Xswitch ifelse or Binary search Xswitch binary the setting of this property will be disabled set to 2 bytes Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction 2 bytes None Generates one 2 byte branch table per case label in a switch statement 4 bytes Xword_case Generates one 4 byte branch table per case label in a switch statement Select this item when a compile error occurs because the switch statement is long R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 209 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Floating point calculating Select whether to generate runtime library call instructions for floating point calculations or to type generate floating point instructions for the floating point unit FPU This corresponds to the Xfloat V850E2V3 option of the cx command This property is displayed only for the project using a device with the V850E2V3 architecture having an FPU Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Auto None If the target device does not have FPU floating point calculation instructions are not generat
338. en if the values of r20 to r24 are changed after calling setjmp after longjmp is called they will be returned to their values before the setjmp call When Xreg_mode common is specified the behavior of runtime functions is the same as when Xreg_mode 32 is specified For this reason when an exception is raised even if the values of r15 to r19 are changed inside matherrf or matherrd the runtime functions will not be reflected in the calling program This option generates the code using the register that can be used for a C source file The same register mode must be specified for all source files The different register mode cannot be specified for each source file If there are object module files with different register modes a warning will be output during linking and link processing will be continued By specifying this option the register mode of the software register bank function can be changed This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Register mode in the Register Mode category R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 357 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use To generate the 22 register mode object module file describe as scx CF3746 Xreg mode 22 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 358 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xsdata
339. epilogue library Yes Prohibit the operation that changes memory access size No Perform inline expansion of library Yes Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths U Sistem mclude paths System mclude paths O Macro definition Macro detinition 0 Macro undetinitian Macro undetinition O C Language Character Encodng Output Code Output File Symbol Information Assemble List El Add debug intormaton Species whether to generate the debug information Such information i generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option comesponds to the g option of the cs command Common Options N A RoOMize Options A Hex Output Options ka R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 151 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Debug Information The detailed information on debug information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Add debug information Select whether to generate the debug information It is possible to perform source debugging with the debugger by outputting information for source debugging to the output file This corresponds to the g option of the cx command Default How to change Select from the drop down list 2 Optimization Generates the debug information Restriction es g No No Does not generate the debug information
340. er 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output message format Specify the format of the message under build execution This applies to the messages output by the build tool to be used and commands added by plugins It does not apply to the output messages of commands specified in the Commands executed before build processing or Commands executed after build processing property The following macro names are available as embedded macros Program Replaces with the program name under execution Options Replaces with the command line option under build execution FileName Replaces with the file name being compile assemble or making link If this is blank Program Options will be set automatically Default FileName How to change Directly enter in the text box up to 256 characters or select from the drop down list Restriction FileName Displays the file name in the output message FileName Options Displays the file name and command line options in the output message Program Options Displays the program name and command line options in the output message Format of build option list Specify the display format of the build option list see 2 15 3 Display a list of build options This applies to the options of the build tool to be used and commands added by plugins It does not apply to the options of commands specified in the Commands executed before build processing or Commands execut
341. ere How to open Description of each area File menu only available for the Output panel Edit menu only available for the Output panel Context menu How to open From the View menu select Output Description of each area 1 Message area This area displays messages output from each tool In build result display a new message is displayed deleting the previous message every time build is done but not the All Messages tab Remark Up to 500000 lines of messages can be displayed If 500001 lines or more of messages are output then the excess lines are deleted oldest first The message colors differ as follows depends on the type of the output message the character color background color is set in the General Font and Color category in the Option dialog box Normal message Aahbce Character color Information on something Background color Warning message AaBhpce Character color Warning for the operation Background color R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 230 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Message Type Example Default Error message AaBbbee Character color Red o Fatal error or operation disabled because of an error in operation Background color Light gray i This area has the following functions a Tag jump When the output message is double clicked or the Enter key is pressed with the caret over the message the Edito
342. error number that does not exist it will be ignored An error will occur if num num7 or num2 is omitted If num1 num2 is specified it is assumed that error numbers within the range have been specified The error number specified by this option is the rightmost 5 digits of the 7 digit number following the W See CubeSuite Message for error numbers This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Individual Assemble Options tab Undisplayed warning message in the Warning Message category Example of use To suppress outputting warning message W0566002 describe as gt cx CF3746 Xno_ waning 66002 main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 447 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Command file specification The command file specification option is as follows This option specifies a command file Specification format Interpretation when omitted Only the options and file names specified on the command line are recognized Detailed description This option handles file as a command file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted See 2 Startup from a command file for details about a command file Example of use To handle command as a command file describe as gt cx command R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 448 of 577 Oct 01 2010
343. error will occur if a C source file or assembler source file is specified as input If another type of file is specified then if a necessary file is not specified and there are remaining unresolved gp ep or tp relative symbol references then an error will occur during linking If this option is specified together with the Xmulti option an error will occur Example of use To link multi core subprograms pe1 Imf pe2 lmf and cmn mf describe as scx CF3515 xAmulti link pel lmft pe2 lmf cmn lmf otarget lmf lmulti lib R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 408 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Information file output control The information file output control options are as follows Xcube_suite_info Xno_cube_suite_info Xsfg Xsfg_opt Xsfg_size_tidata Xsfg_size_tidata_byte Xsfg_size_sidata Xsfg_size_sedata Xsfg_size_sdata Xcube_suite_info This option outputs the CubeSuite information file Specification format Xcube_suite_info file Interpretation when omitted The CubeSuite information file is not output Detailed description This option analyzes input files statically and outputs the information that the IDE editor etc of the CubeSuite use to file cref is recommended as the extension of file If file already exists it will be updated When the input is a C source file If the information about th
344. es 1 Each record is output in ASCII code 2 The Motorola S type hex formats are divided into two types 24 bit standard address and 32 bit address types The format of the standard address type consists of SO S2 and S8 records and the format of the 32 bit address type consists of S0 S3 and S7 records The file configuration in the Motorola S type hex format is shown below Figure 3 2 File Configuration of Motorola S Type Hex Format S2 S3 record S2 S3 record S8 S7 record Each record consists of the following fields Item Description Number cz Record type Record length This is the number of bytes expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number of 3 number of bytes expressed by SS Note Checksum This is lower 1 byte expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal number of one s complement of total of number of bytes in the record other than Sx SS and NL expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal number Le fern Note This is 1 SO record This indicates the file name SO XX XX XX SS NL 1 2 3 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 106 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS ltem Description Number 1 Fixed at SO 2 Record length 3 File name This is the specified file name indicated in ASCII code S2 record This indicates the value of the code ltem Description Number Ty Fixed at 82 EJ Record length Load address 24 bits 0x0 to Oxf
345. escribe as gt cx CF3746 Llib main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 367 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xno_stdlib This option suppresses linking the standard library Specification format Interpretation when omitted The standard library is linked Detailed description This option does not link the standard library Example of use Not to link the standard library describe as gt cx CF3746 Xno_ stdlib main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 368 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xno_ startup This option suppresses linking the startup routine Specification format Xno_startup Interpretation when omitted The startup routine is linked Detailed description This option does not link the startup routine default cstart obj when the Xno_romize option is specified cstartN obj Specify this option to handle the file including startup routine in the same way as other source files without preparing the special file as the startup routine This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Use standard startup routine in the Input File category Example of use Not to link the startup routine describe as gt CX CF3746 Xno_ startup main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 369 of 577 Oct 01
346. escription This option specifies the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the source file The items that can be specified as code are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified Operation is not guaranteed if the specified character code differs from the character code of the source file Does not process the Japanese and Chinese character code Traditional Chinese gb2312 Simplified Chinese An error will occur if code is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Character encoding in the Character Encoding category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Character encoding in the Character Encoding category Example of use To specify EUC as the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the input file describe as gt cx CF3746 Xcharacter set euc jp main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 439 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Generated code control The generated code control options are as follows Xsdata Xsdata This option specifies the maximum size of data allocated to the sdata or sbss section Specification format Interpretation when omitted All data is allocated to the sdata section or sbss section However static variables with a const modifier are all
347. ess size Interpretation when omitted 1 bit manipulation instructions set1 clr1 tst1 and not1 may be generated instead of load and store instructions Detailed description This option prohibits replacing load and store instructions except for byte access with 1 bit manipulation instructions set1 clr1 tst1 and not1 This option is enabled when read or write events are set for variables during debugging This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Prohibit the operation that changes memory access size in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Prohibit the operation that changes memory access size in the Optimization Details category Example of use To prohibit replacing load and store instructions with 1 bit manipulation instructions describe as gt Cx CF3746 Xkeep access size main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 324 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device specification The device specification options are as follows C Xcommon Xdev_path C This option specifies the target device Specification format Interpretation when omitted If the Xcommon option is specified the behavior is in accordance with that specification Otherwise an error will occur except when specifying the V h or P option An error will occur
348. essages are output Detailed description This option does not output messages Example of use Not to output messages describe as gt lb te libmain lib R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 547 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Execution status output specification The execution status output specification option is as follows V This option outputs the execution status of the librarian Specification format Interpretation when omitted The execution status of the librarian is not output Detailed description This option outputs the execution status of the librarian using format a d q m r x file This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Create Library Options tab Verbose mode in the Output File category Example of use Member sub obj is deleted from library file libmain lib At this time to output the execution status of the librarian describe as gt lb dv libmain 1lib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 548 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Command file specification The command file specification option is as follows This option specifies a command file Specification format Interpretation when omitted It is assumed that a command file is not specified Detailed description This opt
349. esult describe as gt cnv850 main c r result R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 561 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE File type specification The file type specification option is as follows t t This option specifies the type of the input file Specification format t type Interpretation when omitted The file type is determined by the extension of the input file Detailed description This option processes the input file as the type specified by type The items that can be specified as type are shown below If any other item is specified that will be ignored without displaying a warning and the input file is output as is C source file or C header file without conversion Assembler source file or assembler include file An error will occur if type is omitted Example of use To process the input file as a C source file describe as gt cnv850 sample test t c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 562 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 3 4 Conversion Specification This section describes details of conversions in C source files and assembler source files 1 C source file a Internal expression of data In CA850 the double type is 32 bits the same as the float type but in CX a double is 64 bits In CA850 source type declarations of double are converted to float C
350. esult for the C source No Does not output the assembler source file of the compile result for the C source Output folder for Specify the folder which the assembler source file is output assembler source file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name The assembler source file is saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by asm If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xasm_path option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_path in the Output assembler source file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 211 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output preprocessed Select whether to output the execution result of preprocessing for the source file to a file source file The file is output to the folder specified in the Intermediat
351. ex_symtab string Interpretation when omitted The symbol table is not output Detailed description This option converts the symbol table and outputs it The items that can be specified as string are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified global Converts only global symbols pal Converts local symbols as well An error will occur if string is omitted This option is valid only when the Xhex_format T option is specified This option can not be specified together with the Xhex_fill option Example of use To convert the symbol table and output it describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex_symtab Xhex format T main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 404 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_rom_less This option does not use the information of the internal ROM area when the hex file is filled Specification format Interpretation when omitted When this option is omitted and the Xhex_fill option is specified and parameter start and size are omitted the internal ROM area defined by the device file is filled Detailed description This option does not use the information of the internal ROM area defined by the device file when the hex file is filled Specify this option when the Xhex_fill option is specified and the information of the internal ROM area defined by the device file is not used This option must be
352. explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window select a function and then select Adjust Stack Size from the Option menu On the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window select a function and then click the E4 button from toolbar On the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window select a function and then select Adjust Stack Size from the context menu On the Unknown Functions Adjusted Functions System Library Functions of the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box select a function and then click the Adjust Size button R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 298 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Function Name Display the function name of the selected function Remarks 1 If the selected function is written in assembly language or it is a system library function then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe selected function is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name 3 Ifthe selected function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers t
353. f necessary Caution If the symbol information file is referred when compiling the cx will only use the variable allocation information If a symbol information file is generated automatically using the cx function allocation information will also be output but it is not possible to specify function allocation using this information 2 Information output to symbol information file If a symbol information file is generated automatically using the cx the optimum allocation information is output for the variables and functions defined in the C source file The following are output global variables static variables in the file static variables in functions and functions Information about the number of references and size of variables and functions and the like is output in the order starting from highest use frequency The optimum allocation information for each section can be output by specifying the Xsfg_opt option Variables are allocated so that they can be allocated within the sizes of the tidata byte tidata word sidata sedata and sdata sections in order starting from highest use frequency The size of each section can be specified by the Xsfg_size_tidata Xsfg_size_tidata_byte Xsfg_size_sidata Xsfg_size_sedata and Xsfg_size_sdata options Remarks 1 The frequency of variable use is calculated as the number of references per byte from the number of references at the assembler source level and the size in by
354. fault the current contents of the text box that opened this dialog box are reflected in this area The path can be added by one of the following methods Click the Browse button and then select the folder in the Browse For Folder dialog box Drag and drop the folder using such as Explorer The file names including the path can be added by one of the following methods Click the Browse button and then select the file in the Specify Far Jump File dialog box Drag and drop the file using such as Explorer Caution If an extremely long absolute path is specified as a relative path an error could occur when clicking the OK button In this case designate the absolute path Remark Up to 10000 lines can be entered Up to the maximum characters that are limited by the Windows OS can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following messages will be shown in the tooltip Message Description Specify a path The field is empty The path is too long Specify a path with a number of The file name including the path exceeds the maxi characters equal to or fewer than maximum number of mum number of restriction in the property that called restriction in the property that called this dialog box this dialog box The specified path contains a folder that does not exist The path contains a folder that does not exist The file name or path name is invalid The following The file name with the invalid path is design
355. fffff 4 Code Each byte of code expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number S3 record This indicates the value of the code Item Description Number EN Fixed at S3 Record length Load address 32 bits 0x0 to Oxffffffff Each byte of code expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number S7 record This indicates the entry point address XX YYYYYY SS NL R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 107 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS ltem Description Number 1 Fixed at S7 2 Record length 3 Entry point address 32 bits 0x0 to Oxffffffff S8 record This indicates the entry point address S8 XX YYYYYY SS NL 17 2 3 ltem Description Number Fixed at 8 Record length 3 Entry point address 24 bits 0x0 to Oxffffff R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 108 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 4 3 Expanded Textronix hex format The Expanded Textronix hex format file consists of three blocks data block symbol block and termination block The file configuration in Expanded Textronix hex format is shown below Figure 3 3 File Configuration of Expanded Tektronix Hex Format Item Description Number Header character Block length This is the number of characters in the block other than and NL 3 Type of block 6 Data block 3 Symbol block 8 Termination block Checksum Note This i
356. fg is added to the project it is treated as a symbol information file It is also treated as a symbol information file if it is added below the Startup node When adding a symbol information file to the project if a symbol information file has already been added then only the latest symbol information file to be added is targeted by a build any such files added prior to this one will not be targeted When setting the symbol information file that is not targeted by a build as a build target if other symbol information files have also been added then the file will be targeted by the build and the others will not be targeted R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 64 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 14 Create a Multi Core Load Module CubeSuite is able to create a single load module from a program that runs on multiple cores multi core The procedures for performing this operation are described below Remark See CubeSuite Coding for CX Compiler for details about multi core programming 1 Create a link directive file The link directive file must be created together with each target system Create the file with reference to the sample link directive file below CubeSuite install foldenCubeSuite C X Vx xx smp 850 multi_smp dir 2 Create a project Create a project and add build target files source file link directive file etc to the project Figure 2 81 Project for Multi Core Project Tree
357. fication option is as follows Xlink_check_off Xlink_check_off This option suppresses checking when linking Specification format Klank check oft sctring string Interpretation when omitted When the external symbol is linked a warning will be output and link processing will be continued if the size of the symbol is checked and the difference is detected At this time the symbol size of the file in which the symbol is defined is valid When the undefined symbol is linked a warning will be output and link processing will be continued if the size and alignment conditions of the symbol is checked and the difference is detected If the application allocation overlaps the addresses of the internal ROM area a warning will be output Detailed description This option suppresses checking when linking The items that can be specified as string are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified symbol Does not check the size and alignment conditions of the external symbol when it is linked Does not check the size and alignment conditions of the undefined external symbol when it is linked irom Does not check the allocation to the internal ROM area Therefore if the application allocation overlaps the addresses of the internal ROM area a warning will not be output An error will occur if string is omitted When the application is created in the ROM less mode it is assumed that irom has been s
358. fice equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions un
359. fied If the extension is omitted map is automatically added The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName map has been specified This corresponds to the Xmap option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xmap in the Output link map file property is selected Default ProjectName map How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 259 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 176 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Symbol Information The detailed information on the symbol information is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output symbol information file Select whether to output the symbol information file during a build This corresponds to the Xsfg option of the cx command Output folder for symbol Specify the folder which the symbol information file is output information file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been
360. fied If either of them is blank all the codes in the internal ROM area defined by the device file are converted into the hex format This corresponds to the Xhex_fill option of the cx command This property is not displayed when Expanded Tektronix hex format Xhex_format T in the Hex file format property is selected and No in the Specify converted address range property is selected How to change Directly enter in the text box 0 to FFFFFFFF hexadecimal number Page 190 of 577 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 2 CENESAS CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the size of the area to be converted to the hex file If this property is specified the Start address property must be specified If either of them is blank all the codes in the internal ROM area defined by the device file are converted into the hex format This corresponds to the Xhex_fill option of the cx command This property is not displayed when Expanded Tektronix hex format Xhex_format T in the Hex file format property is selected and No in the Specify converted address range property is selected How to change Directly enter in the text box 1 to 100000000 hexadecimal number Converted sections Specify the section to be converted to the hex file Add one section in one line When this property is omitted all the sections with the section type other than NOBITS and section attribute A are converte
361. fied number Command file This option specifies a command file specification Table B 5 Mark Used in Option Descriptions V850E2 This option is only for devices with the V850E2 core and V850E2 instruction set architecture V850E2V3 This option is only for devices with the V850E2 core and V850E2V3 instruction set architecture R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 425 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Version help display specification The version help display specification options are as follows V h V This option displays the version information of the cx Specification format mo Interpretation when omitted Assembling is performed without displaying the version information of the cx Detailed description This option outputs the version information of the cx to the standard error output It does not execute assembling Example of use To output the version information of the cx to the standard error output describe as gt CXx CF3746 V R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 426 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE h This option displays the descriptions of the cx options Specification format Interpretation when omitted The descriptions of the cx options are not displayed Detailed description This option outputs the descriptions of the cx options to the standard e
362. file free This is a text file that the conversion results is output This file is output when the r option is specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 552 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 3 2 Method for manipulating This section explains how to manipulate the source converter With CubeSuite you can perform this conversion processing when creating a new project with CX as the build tool by reusing the project with CA850 as the build tool See CubeSuite Start for details Caution The option cannot be set in CubeSuite Manipulate on the command line to set the option 1 Startup from the command line Enter the following on the command line gt cnv8s50 Afile name Aoption Can be omitted Pattern in proceeding can be repeated A One or more spaces When a file name including a parameter of an option is specified it can include the path absolute path or rel ative path When a file name without the path or a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the current folder When a file name including a parameter of an option includes a space such as a path name enclose the parameter in a pair of double quotation marks The length that can be specified for a file name including option parameters is 259 characters including the path Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the alphabe
363. file name property by directly entering in the text box ProjectName sfg is set by default ProjectName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the project name Remark See 3 3 Symbol Information File for details about the symbol information file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 37 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 Set Compile Options To set options for the compile phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various compile options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 33 Property Panel Compile Options Tab Property Aa Le Froperty El Debugintormaton Add debug information El Optimization Level of optimization El Optimization D eta Sort external variables Yesf g Default Optimization O default No Perform inline expansion of strcpy strempymemcpy memset Use prologueepilogue library Prohibit the operation that changes memory access size Perform inline expansion of library No Yeg No Yeg Preprocess Additional include paths System tclide paths Macro definition Macro undetinitian C Language Character Encodng Output Code Output File Symbol Information Assemble List Additional include paths U System mclude paths O Macro detinition 0 Macro undetinition O H H HAHAHAHAH A 0 Add debug informaton Species whether to generate the debug in
364. for build are mistaken as required files In the example below header1 h and header5 h are judged as required for build if include else include endif define ifdef include else include Hendif include st 4 0 headerl header2 AAA AAA header3 header4 headers Dependence zero Dependence Dependence Dependence Dependence relationship relationship relationship relationship relationship judged to exist to exist to exist to exist judged to exist During checking of dependence relationships of include files with CubeSuite include statements described after comments are ignored R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 31 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Therefore include files required for build are mistaken as no required files In the example below header6 h and header7 h are judged as no required for build comment include header6 h Dependence relationship judged not to exist comment include header7 h Dependence relationship judged not to exist R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 32 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 Set the Type of the Output File Set the type of the file to be output as the product of the build Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Op
365. for which values are set automatically See APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Directive File Generation dialog box for details about each item and how reserved sections are handled Figure 2 7 Segment Detail When SCONST Is Selected Segment Section list Segment Section detail blemon Mame Start Address EndAddress EO Segment OxOO000000 Ox000 ttt Attribute Read oril Fi e Start address HEX a5 TEXT Masimum memory size HEX 2 pro_epi_runtime Hole size Her 2 text i Filling value HEH Non Mapping ceOO08o000 Chet ffl Alignment value Hex GE DataFlash i CONST ai const Non Mapping BE Internal RAM o2 DATA Ox02000000 Ox0200 tt Oxtedt5ttt Oxhecttttt Ox02005000 Oshedt6O00 Oshedt6O00 Figure 2 8 Section Detail When Segment Section list Hame Specifies the segment name The following characters can be used only 0 9 A Z az A sconst Is Selected Segment Section detall Memory Mame Start Address End Address O Section SE Internal ROM OxOO000000 OOOO rrr Name const Start address HEX 2 pro epi runtime Hole size HES 9 test Alignment value HE Non Mapping if DataFlash i CONST e canst E Non Mapping El Internal RAM El DATA O01 Fret Ox0200 tt Ox000s0000 Ox02000000 Oxtedtottt Ostedttttt Ox02008000 Ostedt6 O00 OxhedtbO00 Segments and sections can also be added hal Input section name sconst Object fle names Object file
366. format and outputs them Specification format Xhex_section section section Interpretation when omitted All sections which have the section type other than NOBITS and section attribute A are converted in hex format and output them Detailed description This option converts the codes in section section in hex format and outputs them An error will occur if section does not exist An error will occur if section is omitted This option can not be specified together with the Xhex_fill option This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Converted sections in the Hex Format category Example of use To convert the codes in section sec in hex format and outputs them describe as gt CX CF3746 Xhex section sec main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 503 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_block_size This option specifies the maximum length of the block Specification format Xhex block _size num Interpretation when omitted The default value defined for each hex format is regards as the maximum block length Detailed description This option regards the value specified for num as the maximum block length or in the case of the Intel expanded hex format or Motorola S type hex format the number of bytes of the code indicated in one data record The range that can be
367. formation Such information i generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option comresponds to the g option of the cx command ROMize Options A Hex Gubpuk Options f F Remark Often used options have been gathered under the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 5 1 Perform optimization with the code size precedence Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To perform optimization with the code size precedence select Code Size Precedence Osize in the Optimization Level property in the Optimization category default Default Optimization Odefault Figure 2 34 Level of optimization Property Code Size Precedence Remarks 1 You can also set the option in the same way with the Optimization Level property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 See B 1 5 Optimization function for details about the optimization function R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 38 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 2 Perform optimization with the execution speed precedence Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To perform optimization with the execution speed precedence select Speed Precedence Ospeed i
368. functions strcpy stremp Memcpy of strcpy stremp and memset calls with regarding the alignment conditions of the array including character memcpy memset strings and the structure as 4 bytes This improves the execution speed of the program to be generated but it increases the code size This corresponds to the Xinline_strcpy option of the cx command This property is displayed only when No in the Structure packing property in the Output Code category from the Compile Options tab is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xinline_strcpy Performs inline expansion of functions strcpy stremp memcpy and memset calls Does not specify inline expansion of functions strcpy stremp memcpy and memset calls Use prologue epilogue library Specify whether to perform prologue epilogue processing of functions through runtime library calls This corresponds to the Xpro_epi_ runtime option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Speed Precedence Ospeed in the Level of optimization property in the Optimization category is selected Restriction Performs prologue epilogue processing of the function through runtime library calls No Does not perform prologue epilogue processing Xpro_epi_runtime off of functions through runtime library calls Prohibit the opera
369. g box or a stack size specification file The stack usage tracer has not acquired any stack information for this function Other than the above 2 18 3 Check the stack information a Recursive function You can check the stack information function name total stack size frame size additional margin and file name from the list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window Total stack size including stack size of callee functions Frame size not including stack size of callee functions Additional margin value mandatorily added to frame size Figure 2 117 List Display Area Total Stack Size Additional Margin 4 main 576 Diiprot STEN H stabi 4 4 DsorojSTE sub 572 424 DsiprojiSTk th subii 4 4 DiiprojiSTEN H subiz amp 5 4 D iproj STE L sample c 4 4 DeiprojiSTe LJ subi 4 4 DsorojSTk R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 89 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark If you make changes to the project that will affect the total stack size while the stack usage tracer is running e g you edit the files in your project so that the total stack size changes then after rebuilding the project click to update the display 2 18 4 Check unknown functions You can check functions for which the stack usage tracer could not obtain stack information in the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box under Unknown Functions Figure 2 118 Stack Si
370. g the output folder is made with the Output folder for hex file property by directly entering in the text box or by the button Up to 247 characters can be specified in the text box BuildModeName is set by default BuildModeName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the build mode name 2 Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Hex file name property by directly entering in the text box Up to 259 characters can be specified in the text box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 50 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS ProjectName hex is set by default ProjectName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the project name You can also set the format of the hex file Select the format in the Hex file format property in the Hex Format category Figure 2 60 Hex file format Property Intel expanded hes forrmat Mone Mo pect converted address range Converted sections Converted sections 0 Specify masimum length of blockrecord Ho Specify offset of output address Ho Initialize section of data without initial value to zerg Ho You can select any of the formats below Format Configuration Intel expanded hex format None Start address record expanded address record data record and end record Start linear address record expanded linear start address record start address record expanded address record data record and end record
371. granted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document
372. h is displayed as the subproperty When the include path is added to the project tree the path is added to the top of the subproperties Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Change the specified order of the include paths which the system set during assembling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder The system include path is searched with lower priority than the additional include path The reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the option of the cx command The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Specify the name of the macro to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined
373. h2 asm Xlink directive flash dir R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 442 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Multi core support specification The multi core suppor specification options are as follows Xmulti Xmulti This option specifies the generation of a subprogram of a multi core program Specification format Xmulti type Interpretation when omitted A single core program is generated Detailed description This option specifies the subprogram type when generating a subprogram of a multi core program If this option is specified for a target that is not a multi core CPU a warning will be output and this option will be ignored The items that can be specified as type are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified pen Generates a program for core n The value that can be specified for nis an integer in the range of 1 to the number of cores on the target CPU An error will occur if any other value is specified cmn Generate the common module An error will occur if a pragma pic directive is described An error will occur if the data be allocated to a section with relocation attributes other than data const or sconst e g sdata is specified When this option is specified the following preprocessor macros are set automatically Preprocessor Macro to Define Value is 1 MULTI CORE _ MULTI PEn MULTI
374. having the same name in the specified library file this key replaces the member with the specified object module file If the member with the same name as the specified object module file does not exist in the specified library file the object module file is added to the end of the library file If the specified library file does not exist a new library file that contains the specified object module file will be cre ated Example of use When the specified object module file has been updated more recently than the member having the same name in the specified library file to replace the member with the specified object module file describe as gt lb ru libarc lib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 544 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Member output specification The member output specification key is as follows t This key outputs the names of the members which exist in the specified library file to the standard output Specification format Interpretation when omitted Members are not output Detailed description When the member name is specified this key outputs the name of that member which exists in the specified library file to the standard output When the member name is not specified this key outputs the names of all members which exist in the specified library file to the standard output Example of use To output the names of
375. he Output folder for assemble list file property by directly entering in the text box or by the button BuildModeName is set by default BuildModeName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the build mode name The file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by prn Remark See 3 1 Assemble List File for details about the assemble list file 2 4 3 Output map information The map information the information of the link result is output to the link map file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel To output the link map file select Yes Xmap in the Output link map file property in the Link Map category Figure 2 31 Output link map file property Link map file name Project ame map When outputting the link map file you can set the output folder and output file name 1 Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder for link map file property by directly entering in the text box or by the button BuildModeName is set by default BuildModeName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the build mode name 2 Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Link map file name property by directly entering in the text box ProjectName map is set by default ProjectName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the project name Remark See 3 2 Link Ma
376. he Start address property and Size property The range that can be specified is 0 to FRFFFFFFF hexadecimal number for the Start address property and 1 to 100000000 hexadecimal number for the Size property Both are blank by default so specify both values If either of them is blank all the codes in the internal ROM area defined by the device file are converted into the hex format R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 52 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 Set Create Library Options To set options for the librarian select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various create library options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is displayed for the library project Figure 2 62 Property Panel Create Library Options Tab Property A Le Property El Output File Output folder 2B UildModeN amez Output file name lb FProjectN ame lib Message Others Output folder Specifies the folder to which the generated library are sawed This option corresponds to the q key of the lb command Common Options A Compile Options A F 2 10 1 Set the output of a library file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel The setting to output a library file is made with the Output File category Figure 2 63
377. he Japanese character Xcharacter_set none code in the source file 7 Output Code The detailed information on output codes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Structure packing Select whether to perform structure packing The specified alignment can be used without aligning structure members according to the type of each member This corresponds to the Xpack option of the cx command a ae Output comment to Select whether to output a C source program as a comment to the assembler source file to be assembler source file output This corresponds to the Xpass_source option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xasm_path in the Output assembler source file property in the Output File category or Yes Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xpass_ source Outputs a C source program as a comment to the assembler source file Does not output a C source program as a comment to the assembler source file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 158 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output code of switch Select the code output mode for switch statements in programs statement This corresponds to the Xswitch option of the cx command Default Auto None How to change Select from the drop down list if else Outputs the switch statements in the sa
378. he absolute path of that file 2 Newly added system include paths are added next to the last path of the list 3 When the path names are dragged and dropped the multiple path names which are next to each other can be selected together b Button R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 244 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Moves the selected path to down Remark Note that above buttons are disabled when any path is not selected Function buttons OK Sets the specified order of the paths to the compiler as the display order in the Path list dis olay area and closes this dialog box Cancels the specified order of the paths and closes the dialog box Help Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 245 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is being edited on the Editor panel Remark The target file name is displayed on the title bar Figure A 30 File Save Settings Dialog Box main c Save Settings Encode 1 Japanese 5 hift J1S Newline code 2 2 Keep current newline code 3 Reload the file The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select file name
379. he clipboard exist in the same project This menu is always disabled Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel 8 When a category node is selected Add Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file tyoe and add to the file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project Removes the selected category node from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copies the selected category node to the clipboard When the category name is in editing the characters of the selection are copied to the clipboard Inserts the contents of the clipboard directl
380. he different function names An image of re link function is shown below Assembly Source Described By User Assembler Image After Linking ext tCable ane Sext func func flasho 0 ext_func func flashi 1 ext_func Tine flash2 2 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 520 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assembly Source Described By User Assembler Image After Linking boot asm boot tmz sinclude ext table anc extern 6xt table head extern func flasho jarl __ext_table head 0x4 0 1p extern func flashi jarl __ ext_table_head 0x4 1 1p extern _func_flash2 jarl __ext_table head 0x4 2 1p jarl _func_flash0 Ip Jarl _fune _ flashi lp jarl _func_flash2 Ip flash asm flash obj Ssinclude ext Cable inc branch table spublic _ func flasho 6xt table cseg text public tfunc flash2 public ext table head _fune flasho extern func flasho extern _func flashi lp extern func flash2 _ xt Table head public func flashl Je _func flasho _func flashi J _func_flashl jr _func_flash2 function body public _func_flash0 _func_flash2 _func_flasho lp sPUbliG _ fung flashi _func_flash1 lp p blic _func flash2 _func_flash2 If the ext_func control instruction is specified as shown above a table is created with symbol ext_table and the first symbol of this table is ___ext_table_ head Code jarl__flash0 lp in
381. he following property in CubeSuite From the Individual Assemble Options tab Object module file name in the Output File category Example of use To output the load module file with sample Imf as the file name describe as gt cx CF3746 osample lmf main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 428 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xobj_path This option specifies where the object module file generated during assembling is to be saved Specification format Xobj path path Interpretation when omitted The object module file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by obj to the current folder However the object module file will not be saved if one source file is specified as input and the c option is not specified Detailed description This option saves the object module file generated during assembling to path If an existing file is specified as path If one object module file is output it will be saved with path as the file name If two or more object module files are output an error will occur If an existing folder is specified as path The object module file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by obj to path If the specified folder or file as path does not exist An error will occur If path is omitted The object module file is saved under the source file name with the extensi
382. he load module file non ROMized load module file hex file and library file output by the build tool are set to the following names by default ProjectName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the project name Load module file name ProjectName Imf Non ROMized load module file ProjectName _NonROMize Imf Hex file name ProjectName hex Library file name lib ProjectName lib The method to change these file names is shown below 1 When changing the load module file name and non ROMized load module file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel Enter the file name to be changed to in the Output file name property in the Output File category Figure 2 27 Output file name Property El Output File m lk Bialik Pollo test imf The non ROMized load module file name is the name specified in the Output file name property with string _NonROMize added Remarks 1 You can also change the option in the same way with the Output file name property in the Frequently Used Options for Link category on the Common Options tab 2 Ifthe target is a multi core CPU the load module for the common module and the load module for core n are generated and the final load module is then generated based on those n number of cores of the target CPU Load module for the common module input string without the extension _cmn mf Load module for the core n in
383. he load module file name that hex is added if the extension of the file name is not Imf Detailed description This option outputs the hex file by the name of file after linking If only the file name is specified for file the file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the spec ified file name An error will occur if file is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Output folder for hex file in the Output File category From the Hex Output Options tab Hex file name in the Output File category Example of use To output hex file sample hex after linking describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex sample hex main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 499 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_only This option executes only hex output Specification format Xhex only file Interpretation when omitted Processing is performed in the usual order of linking ROMization and hex output Detailed description This option generates the hex file from the load module file specified as the input file and outputs it by the name of file If only the file name is specified for file the file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the spec ified file name If file is omitted the file is output to the same folder as the load module file un
384. hed with higher priority If it is not found libxxx a is searched Specify only the xxx part example if you specify user libuser lib is assumed to be specified Add one file in one line The library files are searched from the library path This corresponds to the option of the cx command The specified library file is displayed as the subproperty Using libraries number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 249 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Additional library paths Specify the search folder of the library file to be used other than the standard libraries The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the project folder This corresponds to the L option of the cx command The specified library path is displayed as the subproperty Additional library paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters
385. hen clicking the button How to change Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Macro definition Specify the name of the macro to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the cx command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 4 Frequently Used Options for Assemble The detailed information on frequently used options during assembling is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 140 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This category is displayed when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Additional include paths System include paths Macro definition Specify the additional include paths during assembling The following macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build
386. hen an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe selected function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name 2 Frame Size Display the frame size not including the stack size of callee functions in bytes of the selected function Remark Ifthe frame size is not known then a question mark 7 is displayed if it is over the maximum limit then SIZEOVER is displayed 3 Additional Margin Specify the value to forcibly add to the selected function in bytes either as a decimal number or as a hexadeci mal number starting with Ox or OX 4 Recursion Depth Specify the recursion depth either as a decimal number or as a hexadecimal number starting with Ox or OX Remark If the selected function is not a recursive function then this item will be grayed out 5 Callee Function List for Indirect Call area a Callee Functions Display a list of callee functions called by the selected function functions called indirectly using a function pointer or the like This area generally displays callee functions in the following format function name total stack size frame size additional margin Remarks 1 If the callee function is written in assembly language or it is a system library function then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the func
387. his dia log box is called from Specify Boot Area Load Module File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the boot area load module file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Specify Far Jump File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the Far Jump file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Specify ROMization Area Reservation Code File This dialog box is used to select the ROMization area reservation code file dialog box and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Save As dialog box This dialog box is used to save the editing file or contents of each panel to a file with a name Open with Program dialog box This dialog box is used to select the application to open the file Stack Usage Tracer window This is the first window to be opened when the stack usage tracer is launched Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists This dialog box is used to display a list of functions for which the stack dialog box usage tracer could not obtain stack information functions for which informa tion was changed intentionally and functions for which the stack usage tracer forcibly set an additional margin Adjust Stack Size dialog box This dialog box is used to change the information for the selected function Open dialog box This dialog box is used to open an existing stack size specification file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 115 of 577 Oct 01 2010 Cub
388. iables Prohibit the operation that changes memory access size Ho Perform inline expansion of library es 2 5 6 Change the register mode Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select the register mode to on the Register mode property in the Register Mode category Figure 2 43 Register mode Property 2 register mode Hone You can select from the following register modes Register Mode Working Registers Registers for Register Variables 32 register mode None default r10 to r19 r20 to r29 26 register mode Xreg_mode 26 r10 to r16 r23 to r29 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 41 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Register Mode Working Registers Registers for Register Variables 22 register mode Xreg_mode 22 r10 to r14 r25 to r29 Universal register mode Xreg_mode common r10 to r14 r25 to r29 Remark See CubeSuite Coding for CX Compiler for details about the register mode R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 42 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 Set Assemble Options To set options for the assemble phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the Assemble Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various assemble options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Figure 2 44 Property Panel Assemble Options Tab Property
389. icons displayed in the tree display area list display area in the window Consequently you must be aware that even if the Jj icon function called directly by same func tion with greatest total stack size is displayed information with relatively low priority such as the E icon frame size unknown will be hidden by the GUI Determining the maximum stack size When the stack usage tracer searches for the path with the largest stack size it assumes that functions that are not analyzed have a stack size of zero Consequently when determining the maximum stack size you must make sure that there are no functions under Unknown Functions in the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists dialog box Tree display for recursive functions The window s tree display area only displays up to the second call of a recursive function Consequently the third and subsequent calls are hidden Library functions bsearch exit and qsort The stack usage tracer treats bsearch exit and qsort as unknown functions even if they are in a library file pro vided by the build tool Consequently if you are using these functions you must set the relevant information e g recursion depth and callee functions in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box Callee functions The stack usage tracer only allows the following types of callee functions to be added in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box functions contained in C source files and functions that are explicitly calle
390. igned for char type Xenum_type This option specifies which integer type the enumeration type handles This option handles tentative definition of variables as definition Variable information Xsymbol_file This option uses a symbol information file specification Japanese Chinese Xcharacter_set This option specifies the Japanese Chinese character code character control R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 310 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Optimization This option specifies the optimization level or the details of each specification optimization items This option sorts external variables Xinline_strcpy This option performs inline expansion of standard library functions strcpy strcmp memcpy and memset calls Xpro_epi_runtime This option specifies whether or not to perform prologue epilogue processing of the function through runtime library calls Xcall_ lib This option suppresses inline expansion of the library function Generated code This option performs the structure packing control Xpass_ source This option outputs a C source program as a comment to the assembler source file Xswitch This option specifies a mode in which the code of a switch statement is to be output This option generates a 4 byte branch table Xr This option specifies the register that external variables are allocated This option specifies the register mode Xs
391. ile of the object code of the link result This is the input file when a hex file is output pHex flee neet Jo This file is the load module file converted into hex format Link map fileNote 2 map This is the list file that has information of the link result This file is output when the Xmap option is specified Information file for CubeSuite free I O Information file which CubeSuite uses The extension is free but cref is recommended This file is output when the Xcube_suite_info option is specified Error message file free File which contains error messages This file is output when the Xerror_file option is specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 305 of 577 Oct 01 2010 File in which two or more object module files are included CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE FileType FileType Extension vo scription Description Command file free File which contains the parameters of the execution program This is created by the user Notes 1 The extension of the output file can be changed by specifying the option 2 See CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS for details about output files B 1 2 Method for manipulating This section explains how to manipulate the cx 1 Startup from the command line Enter the following on the command line gt cx Aoption Afile name Afile name or option Can be omitted Pattern in proceeding can be repeated A One or more spaces U
392. ile option of the cx command Error message file output Specify the folder which the error message file is output folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 221 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Error message file name Specify the error message file name The extension can be freely specified The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name If this is blank it is assumed that ProjectName err has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the cx command This property is displayed only
393. iled description This option performs linking according to the link directive in link directive file file dir is recommended as the extension of file An error will occur if file is omitted If this option is specified more than once the option specified last will be valid and the option specified first will be ignored See CubeSuite Coding for CX Compiler for details about the link directive file Example of use To perform linking according to the link directive in link directive file link dir describe as gt CX CF3746 Xlink directiave link dir main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 372 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xmap This option outputs the link map file Specification format Xmap file Interpretation when omitted The link map file is not output Detailed description This option outputs link map file file The contents of the link map file are shown below Allocation of input sections which are included in the specified object module file to the memory space Allocation of the output sections which composes the load module file to be generated by linking input sections to the memory space Address information of symbols If file already exists it will be overwritten If only the file name is specified for file the file is output under the specified file name to the same folder as the load module file
394. iles which are added directly to the project tree of the selected main project or subproject Remark The default order is the order that the files are added to the project Object module files generated from newly added source files and newly added object module files are added after the last object module file in the list Newly added library files are added to the end of the list By changing the display order of the files you can set the input order of the files to the linker To change the display order use the Up and Down buttons or drag and drop the file names After changing the display order click the OK button R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 67 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 2 Change the file build order of subprojects Builds are run in the order of subproject main project but when there are multiple subprojects added the build order of subprojects is their display order on the project tree To change the display order of the subprojects on the project tree drag the subproject to be moved and drop it on the desired location 2 15 3 Display a list of build options You can display the list of build options set currently on the Property panel for the project main project and subproject Select Build Options List from the Build menu The current settings of the options for the project will be displayed on the Build Tool tab from the Output panel in the build order
395. in the Output File category from the Individual Compile Options tab The changing the name of the assembler source file is made with the Object module file name property in the Output File category from the Individual Assemble Options tab See 2 11 2 Set build options at the file level for how to set the individual build options 2 Ifthe file with the extension of dr or dir is added to the project it is treated as the link directive file It is also treated as the link directive file if it is added below the Startup node When adding the link directive file to the project if the link directive file has already been added then only the latest link directive file to be added is targeted by a build any such files added prior to this one will not be targeted When setting the link directive file that is not targeted by a build as the build target if other link directive files have also been added then the file will be targeted by the build and the others will not be targeted 3 Upto 5000 files can be added to the main project or subproject When a new file is added an empty file is created in the location specified in the Add File dialog box By double clicking the file name on the project tree you can open the Editor panel and edit the file The files that can be opened with the Editor pane are shown below R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 26 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS C source
396. in the boot area overlaps in the boot area and flash area an error cannot be output when linking because the projects are different In other words the addresses can overlap However that only the last RAM area to be written is valid For this reason for the RAM area that must be referenced simultaneously in the boot area and flash area the addresses must be specified so that they do not overlap Use the same address values in the boot area and flash area for the tp gp and ep values These values may be different but in this case the values must be set each time control has been transferred between an instruction code in the boot area and one in the flash area Allocation to the branch table ext_table does not have to be described in the link directive file It is automatically allocated to an address specified by the Xflash_ext_table option However the following points must be noted If a vacant area of the size of the branch table is at the address specified by the Xflash_ext_table option the link directive file is allocated as is The other segments are not affected This is the most ideal case If a vacant area of the size of the branch table is not at the address specified by the Xflash_ext_table option an error will occur This applies for example if a code has been already allocated to the address specified by the Xflash_ext_table option in a TEXT segment for which an address is specified The example is as follows
397. ing Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 171 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Link Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the link phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Debug Information 1 2 Input File 3 Output File 4 Library 5 Link Map 6 Symbol Information 7 Others Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure A 7 Property Panel Link Options Tab Property A Le Property El Debug Informabon Delete debug information El Input File Use standard startup routine Yes Output File Output folder 2B UildModeN amez Output file name Project ame Inf Output relocatable object module file No Library Using libraries Using libranes 0 System libraries System libranes U Additional library paths Additional library paths O System library paths System library paths 0 Link standard library es Link Map Symbol Information Others El Delete debug information Selects whether to delete debug information line number information and global pomter tables when generating an load module file Common Options A Compile Options A A Hex Output Options R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 172 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REF
398. ing of the command line before the key Example of use Member sub obj is deleted from library file libmain lib At this time to overwrite and save error messages to the file err describe as gt lb err fileserr d libmain lib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 551 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 3 Source Converter The source converter converts source files C source file assembler source files etc created for CA850 into formats that can be used by CX The converted files are output retaining the code for CA850 as a comment Note that an option can be specified to output the conversion results to a text file Figure B 11 Operation Flow of Source Converter C source file Assembler source file Conversion results file B 3 1 I O files The I O files of the source converter are shown below Table B 14 I O Files of Source Converter Filetype a Description C source file The source converter enters C source files that contain code for CA850 and outputs files containing code for CX Header file The source converter enters CA850 header files and outputs files contain ing code for CX Assembler source file S I O The source converter enters CA850 assembler source files and outputs files containing code for CX Include file INC I O The source converter enters CA850 include files and outputs files contain ing code for CX Conversion results
399. ink function is not used normal link processing is performed Detailed description This option generates the load module file for the flash area when the boot flash re link function is used At this time symbol information of load module file for the boot area file is referred and link processing is performed Specify the load module file for the boot area that is generated using the boot flash re link function as file The load module file specified here must be the file before ROMization processing generated with the Xno_romize or Xlink_output option specified An error will occur if a nonexistent file is specified as file An error will occur if file is omitted This option must be specified together with the Xflash_ext_table option This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Load module file type in the Flash Correspondence category From the Common Options tab Boot area load module file name in the Flash Correspondence category Example of use To generate load module file for the boot area boot Imf with 0x200 as the start address of the branch table for the flash area describe as gt CX CF3746 Xfilash ext table 0x200 Xlink output boot 1imf bootl obj boot2 ob Xlink directive boot dir To create the branch table at address 0x200 and generate load module file for the flash area flash Imf describe as At this time symbol infor
400. int or signed long then it will be long Example typedef signed int SI In the debug information the original type in SI will be long If the original type is signed short then it will be short Example typedef signed short SS In the debug information the original type in SS will be short If the original type is signed char then it will be char Example typedef signed char SC In the debug information the original type in SC will be char If the original type is char and the Xchar unsigned option is specified then it will be unsigned char Example typedef char SC In the debug information the original type in SC will be unsigned char R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 532 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 2 Librarian The librarian couples specified relocatable object module files and creates a library file Therefore this utility is used to combine two or more object module files to create a library In the CX Ib is the librarian Figure B 9 Operation Flow of Librarian ne S Library file Object module file Details about the functions of the librarian are shown below Performing the library formation for object modules The cx creates one file for one output module Therefore if many modules exist the number of files will increase For this reason the cx provides a function that two or more
401. ion Lists Unknown Functions Adjusted Functions subl 1 4 4 sub 26 amp 4 System Library Functions The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Function buttons On the Stack Usage Tracer window select the Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists from the Option menu Description of each area 1 Unknown Functions Display a list of Unknown functions functions for which the stack usage tracer could not obtain stack informa tion This area generally displays unknown functions in the following format function name total stack size frame size Remarks 1 Ifthe unknown function is written in assembly language then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe unknown function is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ENESAS Oct 01 2010 Page 296 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Ifthe unknown function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe unknown function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name 2 Adjusted Functions Disp
402. ion Opens Output Makefile Information File dialog box to output a text file described File information for creating a Makefile Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Create Link Directive File Opens the Link Directive File Generation dialog box to create the link directive file Property Displays the selected build tool s property on the Property panel 4 When the Files node is selected Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added directly below this node Add File The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added directly below this node The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a category node directly below this node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project This menu is always disabled This menu is aways disabled Pas
403. ion handles file as a command file See 2 Startup from a command file for details about a command file Example of use To handle command as a command file describe as gt lb command R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 549 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error output control The error output control option is as follows err_file err_file err_file This option adds and saves error messages to the specified file Specification format err file file Interpretation when omitted An error message file is not created Detailed description This option adds and saves error messages to file file This option must be specified at the beginning of the command line before the key Example of use Member sub obj is deleted from library file libmain lib At this time to add and save error messages to file err describe as gt lb err file err d libmain lib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 550 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE err_file This option overwrites and saves error messages to the specified file Specification format err Tile 2i1 6 Interpretation when omitted An error message file is not created Detailed description This option overwrites and saves error messages to file file This option must be specified at the beginn
404. ion is displayed and the configuration can be changed Commands executed Specify the command to be executed before compile processing before compile The following macro names are available as embedded macros processing ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of the compile option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 214 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after compile processing after compile processing The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absol
405. ions for Link category Link Options tab Frequently Used Options for Hex Output category Hex Output Options tab R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 136 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 4 Property Panel Common Options Tab Property A Le Property El Build Hode Build mode El Output File Type andPath Output file type Intermediate file output folder El Frequently Used Options for Compie Level of optimization Additional include paths Sistem mclude paths Macro definition Frequently Used O ptions for Link Using libraries Additional library paths Output folder Output fle name Frequently Used O ptions for Hex 0 uput Hex file format Register Hode Flash Correspondence Error Qutput Warning Message Build Method Version Select Hotes Others Build mode T Ae Oe H H HAAA A Selects the build mode name to be used during build Link Options Description of each category 1 Build Mode DefaultBuild Execute Module Load Module File 2B uildModeN anes Default Optimization Odetautt Additional include paths 0 System mclude patha 0 Macro detinition U Using libranes 0 Additional library pathe O builded odeN anes 2Projecthl ame lt Imt Intel expanded hes format Hone ROMize Options Hex Output Options The detailed information on the build mode is displayed and the configuration can be changed Build mode Selec
406. irst will be ignored An error will occur if labelis omitted Example of use To regard the value of label romp_ start as the start address of the rompsec section to be created describe as gt cx CF3746 Xrompsec start romp Start main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 391 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xrompsec_data This option specifies the data section included in the rompsec section Specification format Xrompsec data section section Interpretation when omitted All sections with the data or sdata attribute and the sections allocated to the internal instruction RAM are included in the rompsec section Detailed description This option specifies the data section included in the rompsec section The contents of section section and the corresponding address and size information are included in the rompsec section This option is related to the section with the data or sdata attribute If section does not exist in the load module file an error will be output and processing will be stopped section cannot include a space An error will occur if section is omitted If this option is specified more than once each data section will be included in the rompsec section in the order which they are specified Example of use To include section data1 and data2 in the rompsec section describe as gt cx CF3746 Xrompsec_d
407. is disabled when the build tool is in operation Context menu 1 When the Project node is selected Build active project Runs a build of the active project If the active project is the main project a build of its Subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Rebuild active project Runs a rebuild of the active project If the active project is the main project a rebuild of its Subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Clean active project Runs a clean of the active project If the active project is the main project a clean of its Subproject is not run Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the project file of the selected project with Explorer Add Displays the cascading menu to add subprojects and files to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to the project Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file tyoe and add to the file to the project Add New File The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension
408. is hovered over a file name the path of the file appears in a popup If the file is on the same drive as the project file then it appears as the relative path if it is on the different drive then it appears as the absolute path 2 Object module files which are generated from newly added source files and newly added object module files are added after the last object module file in the list Newly added library files are added to the end of the list 3 When the file is dragged and dropped the multiple files that are next to each other can be selected together b Button Remark Note that above buttons are disabled when any file is not selected Function buttons OK Sets the input order of the files to the linker as the display order in the File list display area and closes this dialog box Cancels the link order settings and closes the dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 262 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output Makefile Information File dialog box This dialog box is used to output a text file described information for creating a Makefile Figure A 35 Output Makefile Information File Dialog Box Output Makefile Information File o savin 20 e m My Recent Documents 3 le name Makefile tst t _ 4 thy Hetero Save as Woe Text file txt s Function buttons The following items are explained here
409. is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output code of switch statement in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output code of switch statement in the Output Code category Example of use To output a code for the switch statement in the binary search format describe as gt cx CF3746 Xswitch binary main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 353 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xword case This option generates a 4 byte branch table Specification format Xword_ case Interpretation when omitted One 2 byte branch table per case label in a switch statement is generated Detailed description This option generates one 4 byte branch table per case label in a switch statement Specify this option when a compile error occurs because the switch statement is long If this option is specified together with the Xswitch ifelse or Xswitch binary option this option will be invalid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Label size of switch table in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Label size of switch table in the Output Code category Example of use To generate one 4 byte branch table per case label in a switch statement describe as
410. isplayed and the configuration can be changed 7 Register Mode R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 143 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE y Note Register mode Select the register mode number of registers used by the Compiler of the software register bank function This corresponds to the Xreg_mode option of the cx command Universal register mode Sets the register mode to 22 Xreg_mode common Use this item to generate the object module file that does not depend on the register mode Note The register modes provided by CX are shown below 32 register mode r20 to r29 8 Flash Correspondence The detailed information on the flash correspondence is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for the library project Use boot flash re linking Select whether to use the boot flash re linking function This must be specified for both the flash area and the boot area Does not use the boot flash re linking function Load module file type Select the type of the load module file to be generated This corresponds to the Xflash option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes in the Use boot flash re linking property is selected Default Boot area load module file None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Boot area load module Generates the load module file for the boot area file
411. items are all invalid Undo Cancels the previous operation on the Editor panel and restores the characters and the caret position max 100 times Redo Cancels the previous Undo operation on the Editor panel and restores the characters and the caret position Cut Cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clip board Copy Copies the selected characters to the clipboard Paste Insert insert mode or overwrite overwrite mode the characters that are copied on the clip board into the caret position When the contents of the clipboard are not recognized as characters the operation is invalid Delete Deletes one character at the caret position When there is a selection area all the characters in the area are deleted Select All Selects all the characters from the beginning to the end in the currently editing text file Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with the Quick Search tab target When there is a selection area search is only taken place in the selection area Replace Opens the Search and Replace dialog box with the Quick Replace tab target When there is a selection area replace is only taken place in the selection area Move To Opens the Go to the Location dialog boxto move the caret to the designated line Context menu Characters area Line number area Jump To Function Jumps to the function regarding the selected characters and the words at the caret position as a function
412. its in the base address of the section is 2 the base address of the section is 40 the number of digits in the length of the section is 2 and the length of the section is C6 7 Symbol definition field 22CR1D 140PEN250 14READ258 1 5WRITE260 37 3 C8 8SVCSTUFF 15CLOSE26814EXIT27029BUFLENGTH28013BUF278 NL 1 2 3 4 5 6 Header character Block length Type of block 3 The number of the characters of the section name is 8 and the section name is SVCSTUFF 6 Symbol definition field 15CLOSE268 1 4EXIT270 29BUFLENGTH280 13BUF278 Termination block This indicates the entry point address ltem Description Header character 5 Number of digits in the entry point address and the entry point address 2 to 17 bytes R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 112 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Example Item Description Number Header character Block length ES Type of block 8 ee The number of digits in the entry point address is 2 and the entry point address is 80 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 113 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This appendix explains windows panels dialog boxes used in build process A 1 Description The following lists the windows panels dialog boxes used in build process Table A 1 List of Windows Panels Dialog Boxes Window Panel Dial
413. ives and creating a link directive file On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Create Link Directive File from the context menu The Link Directive File Generation dialog box opens Figure 2 6 Link Directive File Generation Dialog Box Link Directive File Generation Segment Section list Segment Section detail bemor Mame Start Address End Address Ei Internal ROM UxOOQ000000 OOO tree i SCONST const gag TEXT pro_epi_runtime al test Non Mapping UxDUUSO000 U7 FFF BE DataFlash UxO02000000 O 0200 Ft i CONST a Const Non Mapping 002008000 Ostedtottt BE Internal RAM UstedF6O0U Ushecttttt Si DATA Uxfecdt6O00 Symbol Symbol list Symbol detail Name Type Address Ce tp TEST TP symbol ATP_S MBOL Car op CATA GP symbol 2GP_Sy MBOL Cer ep DATA EP spmboll EP_SYMBOL Edit the segments sections and symbols in the dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 18 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Edit segments sections The Segment Section list area displays the device memory allocation information and a list of the currently configured segments and sections When a segment section is selected from the list detailed information on that segment section is displayed in the Segment Section detail area Edit the items in the Segment Section detail area Remark Some items in reserved sections cannot be edited items
414. ization describe as gt cx CF3746 Xlink output sample lmf main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 322 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Source debugging control The source debugging control options are as follows g Xkeep access size g This option outputs information for source debugging Specification format C Interpretation when omitted Information for source debugging will not be output Detailed description This option outputs information for source debugging to the output file Source debugging can be performed by specifying this option If this option and an optimization option are specified at the same time the ease of debugging could be affected See 2 Effects of optimization on debugging for details This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Add debug information in the Debug Information category From the Individual Compile Options tab Add debug information in the Debug Information category Example of use To output information for source debugging to the output file describe as gt cx CF3746 g main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 323 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xkeep_access size This option prohibits changing the memory access size Specification format Xkeep_ acc
415. k Continues link processing when the memory overflows Terminates link processing when the memory overflows R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 179 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Display GP information Link in 2 pass mode Filling value of holes Ignore illegal relocation R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 Restriction Yes Displays the information used as a yardstick in the value Xsdata_info setting in Size threshold of sdata sbss section allocation Bytes property APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to display the information used as a yardstick in the value setting in Size threshold of sdata sbss section allocation Bytes property in the Output Code category from the Compile Options tab on the Output panel This corresponds to the Xsdata_info option of the cx command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Does not display the information used as a yardstick in the value setting in Size threshold of sdata sbss section allocation Bytes property Select whether to perform linking in the 2 pass mode The 2 pass mode is slower than the 1 pass mode but it is able to process larger sized files The filling value for holes can also be specified This corresponds to the Xtwo_pass_link option of the cx command Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xtwo_pass_link Performs linking in th
416. l message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 02042 02107 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 02222 02554 02699 02782 If the same number is specified on the Undisplayed warning message property and this property the number specified on this property takes precedence This corresponds to the Xwarning option of the cx command Default How to change Configuration of the common option Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters Undisplayed warning Specify the warning message number to not be displayed regardless of the warning level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 02042 02107 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 02222 02554 02699 02782 If the same number is specified on the Displayed warning message property and this property the number specified on the Displayed warning message property takes precedence This corresponds to the Xno_warning option of the cx command Default Configuration of the common option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters 12 Others Other detailed information on compilat
417. lay a list of functions for which information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modified intentionally via the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file This area generally dis plays modified adjusted functions in the following format function name total stack size frame size additional margin Remarks 1 If the adjusted function is written in assembly language then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe adjusted function is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name 3 Ifthe adjusted function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe adjusted function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the function name 5 Ifthe only action performed in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box was adding callee functions then the display format of this area will be as follows function name total stack size frame size 3 System Library Functions Display a list of automatically configured system library functions for which the frame size is unknown and the stack usage tracer has forcibly set an additional margin This area generally displays modified system library func tions in the following fo
418. lay specification options are as follows V h V This option displays the version information of the source converter Specification format moon Interpretation when omitted Conversion is performed without displaying the version information of the source converter Detailed description This option outputs the version information of the source converter to the standard error output It does not execute conversion If this option and other option are specified at the same time other option will be ignored without displaying a warn Ing Example of use To output the version information of the source converter to the standard error output describe as gt cnvsg50 V R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 556 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE h This option displays the descriptions of the source converter options Specification format Interpretation when omitted The descriptions of the source converter options are not displayed Detailed description This option outputs the descriptions of the source converter options to the standard error output It does not execute conversion If this option and other option except V are specified at the same time other option will be ignored without dis playing a warning If this option and the V option are specified at the same time the V option will be valid Example of
419. le An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted An error will occur during linking if the function is in the range that cannot be branched to by the jarl or jr directive t2MB or more In this case recompile by using this option If this option is specified more than once the option specified last will be valid The example of the output code is shown below C source far func jarl far func lp is output by default Output assembler source V850E movea far func tp 210 movea BB LABEL 15 tp 1p jmp r10 BB LABEL 15 Output assembler source V850E2 and V850E2V3 jarl32 far func lp This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Far Jump file names in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Far Jump file names in the Output Code category Remark Cautions about are the format of the far jump calling function list file as follows Describe with one function name per line If two or more function name is described the first name will be valid Describe the function name label name in an assembler source by prefixing _ to that in C language However the following formats can be specified instead of function names R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 362 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE all function A
420. le Property Uutout Mon AUM ized load module tile Mo b Set using the standard ROMization area reservation code file Select Yes default in the Use standard ROMization area reservation code file property in the Input file category Figure 2 57 Use standard ROMization area reservation code file Property 3 Runa build Run a build to generate the ROMization load module file At this time files are linked according to the following sequence Object module file of the startup routine cstart obj Library file that stores copy functions libc lib ROMization area reservation code file rompcrt obj Remark The ROMization area reservation code file should be linked last However if Yes Xrescan in the Rescan library files property in the Others category on the Link Options tab is specified the library file is linked after the ROMization area reservation code file and an error may be output during ROMization processing In such a case explicitly secure the rompsec section area See CubeSuite Coding for CX Compiler for details CubeSuite performs hex output processing after ROMization processing Therefore a hex file is also generated Load the generated hex file to the target using a ROM writer R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 49 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 Set Hex Output Options To set options for the hex output phase select the Build tool node on the
421. le file and hex file ROMized Load Module during a build File When ROMization processing is performed the non ROMized load module file will be the debug target This item is displayed only when Yes in the Output ROMized load module file property and Yes in the Output Non ROMized load module file property in the Output File category from the ROMize Options tab is selected Execute Module Hex File Generates a load module file and hex file during a build The hex file will be the debug target Generates a library file during a build Select whether to output the object module file common to the various devices Output common object module file for various devices This corresponds to the Xcommon option of the cx command This property is displayed only for the library project Default No specific device None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes V850E ES core Outputs the object module file compatible common with models having the instruction set Xcommon v850e architecture superior to V850E V850E V850E2 or V850E2V3 Yes V850E2 core Outputs the object module file compatible common with models having the instruction set Xcommon v850e2 architecture superior to V850E2 V850E2 or V850E2V3 Yes V850E2V3 Outputs the object module file compatible architecture common with models having the V850E2V3 instruction Xcommon v850e2v3 set architecture
422. le option 365 Xasm_option Compile option 422 Xasm_path Compile option 319 Xcall_lib Compile option 350 Xchar Compile option 339 Xcharacter_set Assemble option 439 Xcharacter_set Compile option 343 Xcommon Assemble option 433 xcommon Compile option 326 Xcommon Link option 468 Xcube_suite_info Compile option 409 Xdef_var Compile option 341 Xdev_path Assemble option 435 Xdev_path Compile option 328 Xdev_path Link option 457 Xdiv Compile option 364 Xentry_address Compile option 374 Xentry_address Link option 463 Xenum_type Compile option 340 Xerror_file Assemble option 445 Xerror_file Compile option 419 Xerror_file Link option 485 Xfar_jump Compile option 362 Xflash Assemble option 442 Xflash Compile option 386 Xflash Link option 480 Xflash_ext_table Compile option 387 Xflash_ext_table Link option 478 Xfloat Compile option 361 Xforce_link Compile option 377 Xforce_link Link option 462 Xhex Compile option 396 Xhex Hex output option 499 Xhex_ offset Compile option 402 Xhex_ offset Hex output option 505 Xhex_ symtab Compile option 404 Xhex_ symtab Hex output option 507 Xhex_block_size Compile option 401 Xhex_block_size Hex output option 504 Xhex_fill Compile option
423. led 0 Projects Thursday September 24 2009 5 19 48 PM File name This is the name of the file to which the information of this main project is to be saved The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area How to open Select Windows start gt gt All programs gt gt NEC Electronics CubeSuite gt gt CubeSuite DISCONNECT R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 2rCENESAS Page 116 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Menu bar The menus used in build process are displayed a Project The Project menu shows menu items to operate the project and others Add New Subproject Closes the current project and opens the Create Project dialog box to create a new project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Open Project Closes the current project and opens the Open Project dialog box to open the existing project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Favorite Projects Displays a cascading menu to use to open or save your favorite project 1 path Opens your favorite project registered with Favorite Projects gt gt 1 Register to Favorite Project
424. les between sections of the load module file to be generated describe as gt cx CF3746 Xalign fill OxFFFF Xtwo_path_ link main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 383 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xrescan This option rescans the library file specified by the lI option Specification format Xrescan Interpretation when omitted The library file specified by the I option is not rescanned Detailed description This option rescans the library file specified by the l option When this option is specified symbols that are unresolved through the link sequence of the library can be prevented Example of use To rescan library file libtest1 lib and libtest2 lib describe as gt cx CF3746 Xrescan main c ltestl ltest2 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 384 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xstrip This option generates the load module file from which the debug information line number information and global pointer table have been removed Specification format Interpretation when omitted If the debug information line number information and global pointer table exist in the load module file to be generated they are not removed Detailed description This option generates the load module file from which the debug information line number information and global poi
425. linking separately lt 1 gt file1 c is read and then object module file file obj is generated gt cx CF3746 c filel c lt 2 gt file2 asm is read and then object module file file2 obj is generated gt cx CF3746 c file2 asm lt 3 gt file1 obj file2 obj and file3 obj are linked and then load module file a lmf is generated Hex file a hex is also generated gt cx CF3746 filel obj file2 obj file3 obj Oct 01 2010 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 2 Startup from a command file A command file is a file that options and file names specified for the cx command are described The cx command treats the contents of a command file as if they were command line arguments Use a command file when the arguments will not fit on the command line or when same options are specified repeatedly each time the command is executed a Cautions about description of a command file The arguments to be specified can be coded over several lines However you cannot start a new line within the name of the option or file A command file cannot be nested The character code contents of a command file cannot be specified by using the Xcharacter_set option If you use characters other than ASCII in the command file use the UTF 8 file with BOM The following characters are treated as special characters These special characters themselves are not included in the
426. ll functions are called all interrupt All interrupt functions are called Rutime routines can be specified instead of functions In this case describe the runtime routine name as is as the function name A space and tab can be inserted before and after function names Only ASCII characters can be used Therefore characters that cannot be used as a function name in C language are ignored Comments cannot be inserted Up to 1023 characters can be specified per line including a space and tab The example when specifying functions is shown below _fune led _ func beep _func_motor _func_ switch Example of use To generate the code that uses jmp directive to branch to the function specified in func fjp describe as gt CX CF3746 Xfar_jump func fjp main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 363 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xdiv V850E2V3 This option generates the div and divu instructions for division Specification format Interpretation when omitted The divg and divqu instructions are generated for division Detailed description This option generates the div and divu instructions instead of the divq and divqu instructions for division Although the divg and divqu instructions are fast the number of execution cycles will differ depending on the values of the operands For this reason specify this option if it is necessary t
427. ll occur if symbol is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Entry symbol in the Others category Example of use To regard the value of symbol _my_ start as the entry point address value for the load module file to be generated describe as gt cx CF3746 Xentry address my start main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 463 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link map file output specification The link map file output specification option is as follows Xmap Xmap This option outputs the link map file Specification format Xmap file Interpretation when omitted The link map file is not output Detailed description This option outputs link map file file The contents of the link map file are shown below Allocation of input sections which are included in the specified object module file to the memory space Allocation of the output sections which composes the load module file to be generated by linking input sections to the memory space Address information of symbols If file already exists it will be overwritten If only the file name is specified for file the file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the specified file name If file is omitted the file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the load module file name
428. llowing macro names are available as embedded macros BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name ProjectName Replaces with the project name CubeSuitePath Replaces with the absolute path of the CubeSuite install folder The specified include path is searched with higher priority than the standard include file folder of CX The reference point of the path is the project folder When this property is omitted only the standard folder of CX is searched This corresponds to the option of the cx command The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Default Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Select whether to compile using the include path specified in the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category from the Compile Options tab of the build tool to be used The include paths are added by the following procedure Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from this tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from the Compile Options tab Paths displayed in the System include paths property from the Compile
429. location to the internal ROM area Select No Xlink_check_off irom when the ROM less mode is used This corresponds to the Xlink_check_off option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Checks for the allocation to the internal ROM area Does not check the allocation to the internal Xlink_check_off irom ROM area R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 181 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Rescan library files Select whether to rescan the library file specified in the Using libraries and System libraries properties in the Library category When this property is specified symbols that are unresolved through the link sequence of the library can be prevented This corresponds to the Xrescan option of the cx command Specify the command to be executed before link processing Commands executed before link processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file Y LinkedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under link processing The specified command is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed on
430. lows Xwarning Xno_warning Xwarning This option outputs the specified warning message Specification format Xwaning num num Xwaning numl1 num2 Interpretation when omitted Severe warning messages are output Same as when Xwarning_level 1 is specified Detailed description This option outputs the specified warning message Specify the error numbers as num num1 and num2 If the error number that does not exist it will be ignored An error will occur if num or num and num7 is omitted If num1 num2 is specified it is assumed that error numbers within the range have been specified The error number specified by this option is the rightmost 5 digits of the 7 digit number following the W See CubeSuite Message for error numbers Example of use To output warning message W0566002 describe as gt cx CF3746 Xwaning 66002 main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 486 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xno_warning This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Specification format Xno_waning num num Xno_waning numl1 num2 Interpretation when omitted Severe warning messages are output Same as when Xwarning_level 1 is specified Detailed description This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Specify the error n
431. ly when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Default Commands executed before link processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Commands executed after link processing Specify the command to be executed after link processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file LinkedFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under link processing The specified command is displayed as the subproperty This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Default Commands executed after link processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 ite
432. mation tab c When the category node Files node Build tool generated files node or Startup node is selected on the Project Tree panel Category Information tab Remark When multiple components are selected on the Project Tree panel only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed If the value of the property is modified that is taken effect to the selected components all of which are common to all R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 134 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu only available for the Property panel Undo Cancels the previous edit operation of the value of the property Cut While editing the value of the property cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clipboard Copies the selected characters of the property to the clipboard While editing the value of the property inserts the contents of the clipboard While editing the value of the property deletes the selected characters Select All While editing the value of the property selects all the characters of the selected property Context menu Undo Cancels the previous edit operation of the value of the property Cut While editing the value of the property cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clipboard Reset to Default Restores the configuration of the selected item to the default configuration of the project For the Individual Compile Options t
433. mation of load module file for the boot area boot Imf is referred and link processing Is performed gt cx CF3746 Xflash_ ext table 0x200 Xflash boot lmf oflash lmf flashl obj flash2 obj Xlink directive flash dir R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 480 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Non ROMized load module file save specification The non ROMized load module file save specification option is as follows Xlink_output Xlink_output This option saves the load module file before ROMization processing Specification format Xlink oulput f2le Interpretation when omitted The load module file is not saved before ROMization processing Detailed description This option saves the load module file with file as the file name before ROMization processing The load module file before ROMization processing is normally deleted but you can specify this option if you wish to save it Imf is recommended as the extension of file An error will occur if file is omitted If this option and the Xno_romize option are specified at the same time a warning will be output and this option will be ignored This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the ROMize Options tab Output Non ROMized load module file in the Output File category Example of use To save the load module file with sample Imf as the file name b
434. mber of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 155 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Macro definition Specify the name of the macro to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the cx command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Macro undefinition Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the U option of the cx command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro undefinition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256
435. mbol Specify the symbol to be set as the entry point address of the load module file to be generated If this is blank the entry point address is determined in the following sequence 1 Address of symbol _ start 2 If start does not exist the start address of the text attribute section that is allocated to the lowest address area in the load module file to be generated 3 Address 0 This corresponds to the Xentry_address option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 1022 characters Check register mode Select whether to check all input object module files for mixing different register modes and display detailed information This corresponds to the Xregmode_info option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xregmode_info Checks for mixing different register modes and displays detailed information Checks for mixing different register modes and does not display detailed information Force linking against Select whether to continue link processing when the memory overflows error Information about low memory is displayed on the Output panel Even if forced linking is performed the final file will not be generated This corresponds to the Xforce_link option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xforce_lin
436. me format Xswitch ifelse as the if else statement along a string of case statements in programs Select this item if the case statements are written in the order of frequency or if only a few labels are used Because the case statements are compared starting from the top unnecessary comparison can be reduced and the execution speed can be increased if the case statement that most often matches is written first Binary search Outputs the code in the binary search format for Xswitch binary switch statements in programs Searches for a matching case statement by using a binary search algorithm If this item is selected when many labels are used any case statement can be found at almost the same speed Table jump Outputs the code in the table jump format for Xswitch table switch statements in programs References a table indexed on the values in the case statements and selects and processes case labels from the switch statement values The code will branch to all the case statements with about the same speed However if case values are not used in succession an unnecessary area will be created Select the size per label of the branch table for the case labels in switch statements Label size of switch table This corresponds to the Xword_case option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Auto None or Table jump Xswitch table in the Output code of switch statement property is selected If Auto None
437. ment or section After selecting a segment or section press the Ctrl C key to copy it then the Ctrl V key to paste it The copy of the row is pasted immediately below the row that is selected when the Ctrl V key is pressed Copy_ is added to the head of the name of the copy of the segment or section Remarks 1 If a segment is copied the section included in the segment is also copied 2 The start address of the copy of the segment or section is blank 3 Ifthe copy cannot be performed due to the attributes of the segment being copied to an error will occur 2 Segment Section detail area This area displays detailed information on the segment or section selected in the Segment Section list area and you can edit it a Detailed information of segments Specify the segment name The following characters can be used only 0 9 A Z a z _ p box which appears when clicking the button Attribute Select the attribute of the segment If a segment contains a reserved section then this is only available if the segment attributes can also be set according to the section attributes In this case the attributes that cannot be set are not appeared in the drop down list Default When adding the segment to the internal ROM area or non mapping area Executable RX When adding the segment to the internal ROM area Read Write RW When adding the segment to the DataFlash area Read only R All
438. modules are combined into a file This function is called the module library formation A file which is organized as a library is called a library file The library file created by the librarian can be specified as an input file to the cx If a library file is specified the cx searches the necessary object module file from the specified library file and links only the object module file that can be found Therefore by creating a library file consisting of modules common to many programs users can make file man agement and operation efficient and easy when performing modular programming Editing a library file The librarian provides the following edit functions for a library file Addition of an object module file to a library file Deletion of an object module file from a library file Movement of an object module file in a library file Replacement of object module files in a library file Retrieval of an object module file from a library file B 2 1 I O files The I O files of the librarian are shown below Table B 11 I O Files of Librarian Object module file Binary file including machine language information relocation information relat ing to machine language allocation addresses and symbol information Library file jib JO File in which two or more object module files are included Remark Extension above is the default It can be freely changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 533 of 577 Oct 01 2010
439. mpile Options tab for a C source file and Individual Assemble Options tab for an assembler source file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 14 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 6 Save the project Save the setting contents of the project to the project file Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about saving the project 2 2 Change the Build Tool Version You can change the version of the build tool compiler package used in the project main project or subproject Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel Select Always latest version which was installed or the version in the Using compiler package version property in the Version Select category Figure 2 1 Using compiler package version Property O Yersion Select Remarks 1 When the build tool used in the main project and subprojects is the same you can collectively change the build tool version by selecting all of the Build tool nodes and setting the property 2 If you have selected a compiler package that has not been installed e g if you open a project created in another execution environment then that version is also displayed 3 Ifthe options change depending on the compiler package then the display of the build tool s properties will change according to the selected version Properties that are hidden when the version is changed are saved in the projec
440. ms can be specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 182 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Other additional options Input the link option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the link options group This property is displayed only when No in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 183 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE ROMize Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the ROMize phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Output File 1 2 Input File 3 Section 4 Others Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure A 8 Property Panel ROMize Options Tab Property A Le Property El Output File Output AOMized load module file Output Non ROMized load module file El Input File Use standard ARUMization area reservation code file Section Others Output RO Mized load module fle Selects whether to output a load module file for RUMization This option conmesponds to the no_romize option of the cx command Common Options A Compile Options
441. n If no locations requiring conversion is detected None When an error occurs Error Remark When two or more files are specified using the I option the outline will be displayed for each file b Detail Details of the conversion results are displayed in the format below for each location requiring conversion The detail is output to the standard output by default When the r option is specified it is output to a file file name line number Amessage number information type Acontents file name This is the image of command line specification of the converted file name line number This is the number of the converted lines message number This is the number of output message information type One of the following is displayed The target line has been deleted The target line has been inserted The target line has been changed The user must convert the corresponding line manually contents This is the contents of output message R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 554 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 3 3 Option The types and explanations for options of the source converter are shown below Table B 15 Source Convert Options Se C gt Tisonenepesisnecupatinrane R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 555 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Version help display specification The version help disp
442. n at the same time R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 302 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 5 ROMization processor Performs ROMization processing for a load module file This does not run when the Xno_romize option is specified Remark By default the Xno_romize option is not specified The cx generates a load module file after ROMization processing 6 Object converter Performs hex conversion processing for a load module file and then generates a hex file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 303 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Figure B 1 Operation Flow of cx C source file user created file Symbol information file Xsymbol_ file s ecified y i Preprocessed file Symbol file generator Xsfg Xsfg_opt and Xcube_suite_info specified Assembler source file user created file Assembler source file Link directive file user created file Object module file ee Library file Xno_romize specified Load module file aw Xno_romize not specified ROMization processor ROMization load module file Object converter Hex file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 304 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 1 1 I O files The I O files of the cx are shown below Table B 1 I O Files of cx C source file C Source file described in C language
443. n be specified as code are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified Operation is not guaranteed if the specified character code differs from the character code of the source file Does not process the Japanese and Chinese character code Traditional Chinese gb2312 Simplified Chinese An error will occur if code is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Character encoding in the Character Encoding category From the Individual Compile Options tab Character encoding in the Character Encoding category Example of use To specify EUC as the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the input file describe as gt CX CF3746 xXcharacter set euc jp main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 343 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Optimization specification The optimization specification options are as follows O Xsort_var Xinline_strcpy Xpro_epi_runtime Xcall_ lib O This option specifies the optimization level or the details of each optimization items Specification format O level O item value item value Interpretation when omitted Only optimization that debugging is not affected is performed It is the same result as when Odefault option is specified Detailed description Thi
444. n illegality is found during relocation processing when linking Xmultiple_ symbol This option outputs an error message for all multi defined external symbols Xlink_check_off This option suppresses checking when linking Xalign_fill This option specifies the filling value of align holes This option rescans the library file specified by the I option Xstrip This option generates the load module file from which the debug information line number information and global pointer table have been removed Xflash This option generates the load module file for the flash area Xflash_ext_table This option specifies the start address value of the branch table for the boot flash re link function ROMization control This option suppresses ROMization processing This option specifies the ROMization area reservation code file Xrompsec_ start This option specifies the start address of the rompsec section Xrompsec_data This option specifies the data section included in the rompsec section Xrompsec_text This option specifies the text section included in the rompsec section Xrompsec_ only This option generates the load module file that has only the rompsec section Xromize_check_off This option omits error checking under ROMization R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 312 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_section This option converts the codes in the sp
445. n omitted Severe warning messages are output Same as when Xwarning_level 1 is specified Detailed description This option outputs the specified warning message Specify the error numbers as num num1 and num2 If the error number that does not exist it will be ignored An error will occur if num num1 or num2 is omitted If num1 num2 is specified it is assumed that error numbers within the range have been specified The error number specified by this option is the rightmost 5 digits of the 7 digit number following the W See CubeSuite Message for error numbers This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Individual Assemble Options tab Displayed warning message in the Warning Message category Example of use To output warning message W0566002 describe as gt cx CF3746 Xwaning 66002 main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 446 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xno_warning This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Specification format Xno_waning num num Xno_waning numl1 num2 Interpretation when omitted Severe warning messages are output Same as when Xwarning_level 1 is specified Detailed description This option suppresses outputting warning messages of the specified number Specify the error numbers as num num1 and num2 If the
446. n on the optimization is displayed and the configuration can be changed Maximum number of Specify the maximum number of times to expand the loops such as for and while loop expansions If O or 1 is specified expansion is suppressed If this is blank it is assumed that 4 has been specified This corresponds to the O unroll option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Detail Setting in the Level of optimization property is selected How to change Directly enter in the text box 0 to 999 decimal number or blank Select whether to remove the static functions which are not called Remove unused static functions This corresponds to the Odelete_static_func option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Detail Setting in the Level of optimization property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Restriction Removes the unused static functions which are Odelete_static_func on not called Does not remove the unused static functions which are not called Perform inline expansion Specify whether to perform inline expansion at the location calling functions This corresponds to the Oinline option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Detail Setting in the Level of optimization property is selected Yes Only Specified Functions None Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Only Specified Performs inli
447. n once This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category From the Individual Compile Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category Example of use To delete the definition of preprocessor macro test by the D option describe as gt cx CF3746 Utest main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 333 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE This option specifies the folder to search include files Specification format Ipath path Interpretation when omitted The include file is searched from the standard include file folder Detailed description This option specifies the folder to search include files that are read by preprocessor directive include as path Include files are searched according to the following sequence 1 Folder with source files When files are specified by using 2 Path specified by the I option 3 Standard include file folder te Note CubeSuite install foldeACubesuite CX V x xx inc If path does not exist a warning will be output An error will occur if path is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Additional include paths in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category From the Common Options tab System include paths in th
448. n the Optimization Level property in the Optimization category default Default Optimization Odefault Figure 2 35 Level of optimization Property Execution Speed Precedence Remarks 1 You can also set the option in the same way with the Optimization Level property in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category on the Common Options tab 2 See B 1 5 Optimization function for details about the optimization function 2 5 3 Add an include path Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel The include path setting is made with the Additional include paths property in the Preprocess category Figure 2 36 Additional include paths Property i Macro definition Macro definition 0 Macro undetinitian Macro undetinitian 0 If you click the button the Path Edit dialog box will open Figure 2 37 Path Edit Dialog Box Path Edit Path One path per one line ru Browse Subfolders are automatically included Enter the include path per line in Path One path per one line You can specify up to 259 characters per line up to 256 lines R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 39 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark You can also specify the include path by dragging and dropping from Explorer or the like or by the Browse button Select the Subfolders are automatically included ch
449. nN Note The format of the line number information is shown below line line number file name line number is a decimal number and the maximum value is the maximum number of unsigned int In the full path of file name is converted to and to Other than printable characters including spaces are output as 3 digit octal number e g 030 Line feed characters are converted to n If an input source file contains the preprocessor directive number string or line number string number is used as line number and string as file name then An error will occur if string is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output C source comments to preprocessed file in the Preprocess category From the Compile Options tab Output line number information to preprocessed file in the Preprocess category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output C source comments to preprocessed file in the Preprocess category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output line number information to preprocessed file in the Preprocess category Example of use To output the comments and line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file describe as gt cx CF3746 Xpreprocess comment line P main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 335 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX
450. name variable name or label in C language If a single line contains multiple statements then it may not be possible to jump to the correct location Forward To Next Cusor Position Forwards to the position before operating Back To Last Cusor Position Tag Jump Jumps to the caret line in the editor indicated by the message file line and column Cut Cuts the selected characters and copies them to the clip board Copy Copies the selected characters to the clip board Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the caret position Open in New Panel Opens a new Editor panel with the same contents as the current Editor panel the title bar of the newly opened Editor panel displays the file name and ID number The Editor panel can be opened up to 100 panels R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 229 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output panel This panel is used to display the message that is output from the build tool Messages are shown individually on the tab categorized by the output tool Figure A 22 Output Panel Start build all Thursday September 4 009 3 34 41 PH Start build sample DetaultBuild gt sreystart asm gt sre main c Build endedt Error 0 Warning 0 1 Ended Success l Projects Failed 0 Projects Thursday September 4 z009 3 34 43 PH EOF 2 D All Messages A Rapid Build Build Tool The following items are explained h
451. nd error messages R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 232 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Figure A 23 Add File Dialog Box Add File File type C source file c Header file Az inc Assemble file asm s Link directive file dir dr Symbol mformatior file stg Text file txt Empty C source file Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Add gt gt Add New File On the Project Tree panel select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or Category node and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu Description of each area 1 File type area Select the type of the file to be created When the file type is selected the description is displayed at the lower box The file types to be displayed are as follows C source file c Header file h inc Assemble file asm s Link directive file dir dr Symbol information file sfg Text file txt R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 233 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 File name area Directly enter the name of the file to be created
452. ne RoMize Options o Hex Output Options F R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 309 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 1 Compile options The types and explanations for options of the compile phase are shown below Table B 2 Compile Options specification p Xobj_path This option specifies where the object module file generated during compilation is to be saved Xasm_path This option specifies where an assembler source file generated during compilation is to be saved Xprn_path This option specifies where an assemble list file is to be saved Xtemp_path This option specifies the temporary folder Xlink_output This option saves the load module file before ROMization processing Source debugging oo This option outputs information for source debugging control This option prohibits changing the memory access size Device specification This option specifies the target device This option specifies that an object module file common to the various devices is generated sc ee 2 Processing interrupt specification control E This option deletes the preprocessor macro definition by the D option This option specifies the folder to search include files This option controls outputting the result of preprocessing C language control Xansi This option processes as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard This option specifies s
453. ne expansion at the location calling Functions None the function for which pragma inline is specified Yes Auto detect Distinguishes the function that is the target of Oinline 2 inline expansion automatically and expands it No Oinline 0 Does not specify inline expansion of the function Select whether to improve the program s execution performance by reordering instructions at the machine language level Perform pipeline optimization This corresponds to the Opipeline option of the cx command This property is displayed only when the project uses a device with the V850E2V3 architecture and when Detail Setting in the Level of optimization property in the Optimization category is selected R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 153 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 Sort external variables Perform inline expansion of strcpy stremp memcpy memset Use prologue epilogue library Prohibit the operation that changes memory access size R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select whether to sort external variables This property is for reducing the RAM capacity This corresponds to the Xsort_var option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xsort_var Rearranges external variables allocated to a section other than const sconst sequentially starting from the largest alignment size No Does not specify
454. nel The Xsdata option allocates data of less than num bytes to the sdata or sbss section The cx outputs codes in compliance with the following rule for the data allocated to the sdata sbss data and bss areas The cx first tries to allocate the data to the sdata attribute section or sbss attribute section which are areas that can be accessed with a single instruction from the gp register data with an initial value is allocated to the sdata attribute section and data without an initial value is allocated to the sbss attribute section Because these areas are accessed by a code that uses gp and a 16 bit displacement for access data can be allocated only in a range of 32 KB from gp If the data does not fit in these areas the cx tries to allocate the data to the data attribute section or bss attribute section which are areas that can be accessed with two instructions from the gp register data with an initial value is allocated to the data attribute section and data without an initial value is allocated to the bss attribute section In these areas the address of the access area is first generated and a code using gp and a 32 bit displacement for access is generated Consequently the entire 4 GB space can be accessed Figure B 8 Memory Allocation Image of gp Offset Reference Section Upper address bss attribute section gt Data without initial value sbss attribute section gp gt sdata attribute section gt Data with
455. nformation to the symbol information file This corresponds to the Xsfg_opt option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xsfg in the Output symbol information file property is selected Default Yes Xsfg_opt How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xsfg_ opt Sorts variables in the order starting from highest use frequency for each section and outputs the optimum allocation information to the symbol information file No Sorts variables in the order starting from highest use frequency and outputs the allocation information to the symbol information file Size of tidata section Specify the upper size variables allocated to the tidata section This corresponds to the Xsfg_size_tidata option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xsfg_opt in the Output optimized allocation information property is selected Default 256 decimal number How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction O to 256 decimal number Size of tidata byte section Specify the upper size variables allocated to the tidata byte section This corresponds to the Xsfg_size_tidata_byte option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xsfg_opt in the Output optimized allocation information property is selected Default 128 decimal number How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction O to 128 decimal number
456. ng the Option dialog box Display fonts Tab interval Display hide and colors of control characters control codes including a blank symbol Colors of reserved words and comments File menu only available for the Editor panel The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Editor panel other items are common to all the panels Close file name Closes the currently editing the Editor panel When the contents of the panel have not been saved a confirmation message is shown Save file name Overwrites the contents of the currently editing the Editor panel Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save file name As file name Save Settings This dialog box is used to open the File Save Settings dialog box to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is editing on this panel R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 228 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save file name As Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of the currently editing the Editor panel Page Setup Opens the Page Setup dialog box of Windows Opens the Print dialog box of Windows for printing the contents of the currently editing the Editor panel Edit menu only available for the Editor panel The following items are exclusive for the Edit menu in the Editor panel other
457. not Imf Detailed description This option outputs the hex file by the name of file after linking If only the file name is specified for file the file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the specified file name An error will occur if file is omitted Example of use To output hex file sample hex after linking describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex sample hex main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 396 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_only This option executes only hex output Specification format Xhex only file Interpretation when omitted Processing is performed in the usual order of linking ROMization and hex output Detailed description This option generates the hex file from the load module file specified as the input file and outputs it by the name of file If only the file name is specified for file the file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the specified file name If file is omitted the file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the load module file name with the extension replaced by map Use this option when only hex output is executed after generating the load module file An error will occur if a load module file is not specified as the input file Example of use To generate hex file sample hex from load module file a lmf
458. nter table have been removed Example of use To generate the load module file from which the debug information line number information and global pointer table have been removed describe as gt cx CF3746 Xstrip main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 385 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xflash This option generates the load module file for the flash area Specification format Xflash file Interpretation when omitted When the boot flash re link function is used the load module file for the boot area is generated When the boot flash re link function is not used normal link processing is performed Detailed description This option generates the load module file for the flash area when the boot flash re link function is used At this time symbol information of load module file for the boot area file is referred and link processing is performed Specify the load module file for the boot area that is generated using the boot flash re link function as file The load module file specified here must be the file before ROMization processing generated with the Xno_romize or Xlink_output option specified An error will occur if a nonexistent file is specified as file An error will occur if file is omitted This option must be specified together with the Xflash_ext_table option Example of use To generate load module file for the boot area
459. o Compile option 378 Xsdata_info Link option 469 Xsfg Compile option 412 Xsfg_opt Compile option 413 Xsfg_size_sdata Compile option 418 Xsfg_size_sedata Compile option 417 Xsfg_size_sidata Compile option 416 Xsfg_size_tidata Compile option 414 Xsfg_size_tidata_byte Compile option 415 Xsort_var Compile option 347 Xstartup Compile option 370 Xstrip Compile option 385 Xstrip Link option 477 Xswitch Compile option 353 Xsymbol_file Compile option 342 Xtemp_path Compile option 321 Xtemp_path Link option 454 Xtwo_pass_link Compile option 379 Xtwo_pass _ link Link option 470 Xwarning Assemble option 446 Xwarning Compile option 420 Xwarning Link option 486 Xword_ case Compile option 354 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 tENESAS Page 573 of 577 Revision Record Description Rev Oct 01 2010 First Edition issued CubeSuite Ver 1 40 User s Manual Build CX Compiler Publication Date Rev 1 00 Oct1 2010 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation CENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited
460. o changed c Address This area displays the start address to allocate the symbol This ttem can be edited directly If the address is changed the value of Address in the Symbol detail area is also changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 254 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d Button Add symbol Adds a new symbol directly below the row selected in the list The symbol name is NewSymbol_XXxX by default XXX 0 to 255 in decimal numbers Make detailed symbol settings in Symbol detail area This button is invalid when 256 symbols are registered in the list Delete symbol Deletes the section that is selected in the list This area has the following functions Move a symbol row You can move symbol rows by dragging and dropping them 4 Symbol detail area This area displays detailed information on the symbol selected in the Symbol list area and you can edit it Name Specify the symbol name The following characters can be used only 0 9 A Z a z _ Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction TP sym Sets the TP symbol as the type of the symbol bol TP_SYMBOL GP sym Sets the GP symbol as the type of the symbol bol GP_SYMBOL EP sym Sets the EP symbol as the type of the symbol bol EP_SYMBOL Base symbol name Specify the base symbol TP symbol that
461. o maintain a constant number of execution cycles at all times e g in order to guarantee real time performance This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Generate div divu instructions in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Generate div divu instructions in the Output Code category Example of use To generate the div and divu instructions for division describe as gt cx CF3746 Xdiv main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 364 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assembler control specification The assembler control specification option is as follows Xasm_far_jump V850E2 V850E2V3 Xasm_far_jump V850E2 V850E2V3 This option controls outputting far jump for an assembler source file Specification format Interpretation when omitted Assembly is performed as a jarl or jr instruction Detailed description For an assembler source file this option assumes that all jarl and jr instructions described in the source are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and assembling is performed If you wish to control individual instructions add jarl22 jarl32 or jr22 jarl22 to the source This option does not affect the jump instruction If this option is specified for a C source file that will be ignored without displaying a warning This option is equivalent to the foll
462. o move member sub obj in library file libmain lib to the end of the file describe as gt lb m libmain lib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 538 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ma This key moves the specified member in the specified library file to the position immediately after the specified mem ber Specification format ma member Interpretation when omitted Members are not moved Detailed description This key moves the specified member in the specified library file to the position immediately after member mem ber If member is omitted processing will be stopped Example of use To move member sub obj in library file libmain lib to the position immediately after member main obj describe as gt lb ma main obj libmain 1lib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 539 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE mb This key moves the specified member in the specified library file to the position immediately before the specified mem ber Specification format mb member Interpretation when omitted Members are not moved Detailed description This key moves the specified member in the specified library file to the position immediately before member mem ber If member is omitted processing will be stopped Example of use To move member sub obj in librar
463. o the destination The Add Folder And File dialog box will open Specify the file tyoes and subfolder levels in the folder to be added Caution You cannot drag and drop a folder and file onto this area simultaneously g Editing the display of the subproject build order Subprojects are displayed in order of build from the top Therefore the build order can be changed by changing the display order of subprojects Builds of the project are run from the subprojects then the main project h Setting the standard build options On the Property panel if you add a change to the settings for the standard build options the value of the property will be displayed in boldface You can change the current build options to the standard setting cancel boldface by the following procedure Select the Build tool node and then select Set to Default Build Option for Project in the context menu Remark The setting of the standard build options takes effect to the whole project main project and subprojects R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 123 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE i Sorting files and categories You can sort files and category nodes in order of the file name time stamp or user definition by the following procedure Select one of the buttons on the toolbar The description of each button is shown below is selected by default Sorts category nodes and files in order of their name
464. obj ROMization area reser This property is displayed only when Yes in the Output ROMized load module file prop vation code file erty in the Output File category is selected Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Uses the standard ROMization area reservation code file Does not use the standard ROMization area reservation code file Make the ROMization area reservation code file and specify the file for the ROMization area reservation code file name property ROMization area reser Specify the name of the ROMization area reservation code file vation code file name If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or sub project folder unless the drives are different If this is blank a link error will occur Be sure to specify this property This corresponds to the Xrompcrt option of the cx command This property is displayed only when No in the Use standard ROMization area reservation code file property is selected Default How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Specify ROMization Area Res ervation Code File dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 259 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 185 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WIND
465. ocated to the const section Detailed description This option allocates data of less than num bytes to the sdata or sbss section Data specified the sdata or sbss section by the pragma section directive is allocated to that section regardless of the size This option is not applicable for arrays of incomplete types arrays whose size is indeterminate within the file Specify 0 to 65535 as num An abort error will occur if a value outside the range is specified An error will occur if num is omitted The yardstick for the value to be specified as num can be output by the Xsdata_info option If a different option is specified for each file a code of a different method of placing and referencing variables may be generated and an error or warning may be output during linking This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Size threshold of sdata sbss section allocation Bytes in the Output Code category Example of use To allocate data of less than 16 bytes to the sdata or sbss section describe as gt cx CF3746 Xsdata 16 main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 440 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Assembler control specification The assembler control specification option is as follows Xasm_far_jump V850E2 V850E2V3 Xasm_far_jump V850E2 V850E2V3 This option controls
466. ocated to the sedata section to 32768 bytes Detailed description This option calculates the frequency of variable use limiting the size of variables allocated to the sedata section to num bytes Specify 0 to 32768 as num An error will occur if a value outside the range is specified An error will occur if num is omitted This option is valid only when the Xsfg_opt option is specified If the Xsfg_opt option is not specified this option will be ignored This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Size of sedata section in the Symbol Information category Example of use To calculate the frequency of variable use limiting the size of variables allocated to the sedata section to 16384 bytes describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 417 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xsfg_size_sdata This option specifies the size of sdata section Specification format Xsfg size sdata num Interpretation when omitted The frequency of variable use is calculated limiting the size of variables allocated to the sdata section to 65536 bytes Detailed description This option calculates the frequency of variable use limiting the size of variables allocated to the sdata section to num bytes Specify 0 to 65536 as num An error will occur if a value outside the range is specified An error
467. ode Interpretation when omitted The check for mixing of 32 register modes is performed Detailed description This option checks whether register mode mode specified as the compile option or assemble option is mixed The items that can be specified as mode are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Register Mode mode Working Registers Registers for Register Variables If common is specified as mode mix checking is not performed An error will occur if mode is omitted If there are object module files with different register modes a warning will be output and link processing will be continued Example of use To perform the check for mixing of 22 register modes describe as gt cx CF2746 xXreg mod 22 main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 466 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xregmode_info This option outputs detailed information when different register modes are mixed Specification format Xregmode_info Interpretation when omitted Detailed information is not output when different register modes are mixed Detailed description This option outputs detailed information and specifies the input object module file that causes a warning when different register modes are mixed for all input object module files No information will be output if the register modes match This option is equivalent
468. og Box Name Function Description This is the first window to be opened when CubeSuite is launched Project Tree panel This panel is used to display the project components in tree view Property panel This panel is used to display the detailed information on the Build tool node file or category node that is selected on the Project Tree panel and change the settings of the information Editor panel This panel is used to display and edit text files and source files Output panel This panel is used to display the message that is output from the build tool Add File dialog box This dialog box is used to create a new file and add it to the project Add Folder And File dialog box This dialog box is used to add existing files and folder hierarchies to the project Character String Input dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit characters in one line Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input and edit texts in multiple lines Path Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to edit or add the path or file name including the path System Include Path Order dialog box This dialog box is used to refer the system include paths specified for the compiler and set their specified sequence File Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is editing on the Editor panel Link Directive File Generation dialog box This dialog box is used to generate a link directive file
469. ograms Optimization items which the cx executes are shown below Table B 10 Optimization Item Optimization of expressions Performs calculation of constants and deformation of expressions Optimization of control flow Rearranges instructions to reduce branch instructions Propagation of copy Replaces the referred variable with the value stored in the variable or other variable reference Recognition of common Holds the calculated value and reuses when same calculation is performed expressions repeatedly Deletion of unnecessary Deletes the operation and assignment which result is not used instructions Loop expansion Expands a loop such a for or while for the number of times specified Loop optimization Deletes a loop that is executed 0 or 1 time and performs optimization of expressions including a loop control variable Moving loop invariants Calculations whose values do not change within a loop are moved outside the loop R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 514 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Inline expansion for functions Expands a function at the location calling it The calling and called functions must be defined within the same source file If inter file optimization is also specified however they can be defined in different source files Deleting static variables inthe Deletes static variables in the unused file unused file Does not delete static vari
470. oject node When each component the node or file is selected the detailed information property is displayed on the Property panel You can change the settings R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 121 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Remark When multiple components are selected only the tab that is common to all the components is displayed When multiple files are selected and the values of their common properties are different then the corresponding value fields are displayed blank This area has the following functions a Adding a file You can add a file by one of the following procedures The files are added below the File node lt 1 gt Adding an existing file Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node or a file Then select Add gt gt Add File from the File menu The Add Existing File dialog box will open Select the file to be added Select either one of the Project node Subproject node File node Then select Add gt gt Add File from the context menu The Add Existing File dialog box will open Select the file to be added Copy the file using such as Explorer and then point the mouse to this area Select Paste from the Edit menu Drag a file using such as Explorer and drop it onto the location in this area where you want to add it to Remark If you drag the file using such as Explorer and drop it onto the empty spa
471. ol Xerror_file This option outputs error messages to a file Warning message Xwarning This option outputs the specified warning message output control p Xno_warning specified number Phase individual Xasm_option This option specifies the file to be assembled option specification XIk_option This option specifies the file to be linked Command file This option specifies a command file specification Table B 3 Mark Used in Option Descriptions V850E2 This option is only for devices with the V850E2 core and V850E2 instruction set architecture V850E2V3 This option is only for devices with the V850E2 core and V850E2V3 instruction set architecture R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 313 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Version help display specification The version help display specification options are as follows V h V This option displays the version information of the cx Specification format monn Interpretation when omitted Compilation is performed without displaying the version information of the cx Detailed description This option outputs the version information of the cx to the standard error output It does not execute compilation Example of use To output the version information of the cx to the standard error output describe as gt Cx CF3746 V R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 314 of 57
472. on replaced by obj to the current folder If two or more files with the same name even if they are in different folders are specified as source files then a warning is output and an object module file is only saved for the last source file to be specified Example of use To save the object module file generated during assembling with sample obj as a file name describe as gt cx CF3746 Xobj path sample obj main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 429 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xprn_path This option specifies where an assemble list file is to be saved Specification format Xprn_path path Interpretation when omitted An assemble list file will not be output Detailed description This option outputs an assemble list file when assembling and saves it to path If an existing file is specified as path If one assemble list file is output it will be saved with path as the file name If two or more assemble list files are output an error will occur If an existing folder is specified as path The assemble list file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn to path If the specified folder or file as path does not exist An error will occur If path is omitted The assemble list file is saved under the source file name with the extension replaced by prn to the current folder If two or more files
473. oops such as for and while loop expansions If O or 1 is specified expansion is suppressed If this is blank it is assumed that 4 has been specified This corresponds to the Ounroll option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Detail Setting in the Level of optimization property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box O to 999 decimal number or blank Remove unused static Select whether to remove the static functions which are not called functions This corresponds to the Odelete_static_func option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Detail Setting in the Level of optimization property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Removes the unused static functions which are Odelete_static_func on not called Does not remove the unused static functions which are not called R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 203 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Perform inline expansion Specify whether to perform inline expansion at the location calling functions This corresponds to the Oinline option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Detail Setting in the Level of optimization property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the d
474. opied to the Assemble Options tab If No is clicked the state before the Assemble Options tab was hidden will be displayed 2 16 6 Compile assemble individual files You can just compile or assemble for each source file added to the project 1 When compiling a C source file Select the C source file on the project tree and select the Compile from the context menu Figure 2 109 Compile Item 5 A File ral Build tool generated Files Startup p c EULESS PN ee j Open af Open with Internal Editor Fae Open with Selected Application Open Folder with Explorer Add pd Remove From Project Shifk Del ee Copy Chrl a_i E ak Rename R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 82 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 When assembling an assembler source file Select the assembler source file on the project tree and select the Assemble from the context menu Figure 2 110 Assemble Item a l File 1 Build tool generated Files Startup aam rut TE EA Assemble Open Open with Internal Editor Open with Selected Application 1 aa be Open Folder with Explorer Add Remove From Project Shift Del Copy Ctrl Rename Gt 3 E ka Ez Property 2 16 7 Stop running a build To stop running a build rebuild or batch build click on the toolbar R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 83 of 577 Oct 01 2
475. ops N is a constant and a loop including code expanded value times If the code size after expansion is too great or if the number of times of execution of the loop is too few the number of times of expansion may decrease or the loop may not be expanded at all In addition a loop having a complicated structure such as having inner loops may not be expanded If value is omitted it is assumed that 4 has been specified If the Ospeed option is specified this item is assumed that the Ounroll 4 option is specified inline 0 to 2 Inline expansion for functions Integer value value signifies the level of the expansion 0 Suppresses all inline expansion including the function for which pragma inline is specified 1 Performs inline expansion for only a function for which pragma inline is specified 2 Distinguishes a function that is the target of expansion automatically and expands it However if 1 or 2 is specified the function that is specified by pragma inline may not be expanded according to the content of the function and the status of compilation If value is omitted it is assumed that 2 has been specified If the Ospeed option is specified this item is assumed that the Oinline 2 option is specified If the Ospeed or Oinline option is not specified this item is assumed that the Oinline 1 option is specified If the Onothing option is specified this item is assumed that the Oinline 0 option is specifi
476. option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the ROMize Options tab Output ROMized load module file in the Output File category Example of use To suppress ROMization processing describe as gt cx CF3746 Xno_ romize main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 491 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE ROMization area reservation code file specification The ROMization area reservation code file specification option is as follows Xrompcrt Xrompcrt This option specifies the ROMization area reservation code file Specification format Xrompert file Interpretation when omitted When the Xno_romize option is not specified the standard ROMization area reservation code file rompcrt obj is linked at the end of input files Detailed description This option links file instead of the standard ROMization area reservation code file at the end of input files Specify the object module file as file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted If this option is specified together with the Xno_romize option this option will be invalid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the ROMize Options tab ROMization area reservation code file name in the Input File category Example of use To link rompack obj instead of the standard ROMization area rese
477. ore ROMization processing must be specified for the flash area project CubeSuite performs ROMization processing by default If ROMization processing is performed the load module file before ROMization processing must be output Select the ROMize Options tab and Yes in the Output Non ROMized load module file property in the Output File category The file name is the load module file name with string NonROMize added Figure 2 72 Output Non ROMized load module file Property El Output File R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 58 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Run a build of the boot area project When you run a build of the boot area project the load module file is generated The hex file is also generated Figure 2 73 Generated Files for Boot Area Project Tree Ed A rm a E boot Project FE UPOVOF3506 Microcontroller A CX Build Tool che YESOE2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool pE QB Frogrammer Flash Programming Tool lh File E 1 Build tool generated Files imt boot Inf hex boot hex s Startup c_ book c dir link _boot dir 2 12 3 Set the flash area project 1 Create the flash area project Create the project for the boot area and add the build target files to the project Add the startup routine directly below the Startup node Figure 2 74 Flash Area Project Project Tree Gal A Pin Configurator Design Tool
478. ore than once If both this option and U option are specified for the same preprocessor macro the option specified last will be valid This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Macro definition in the Frequently Used Options for Compile category From the Compile Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category From the Individual Compile Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category Example of use To define sample 256 as a preprocessor macro describe as gt cx CF3746 Dsample 256 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 332 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE U This option deletes the preprocessor macro definition by the D option Specification format Uname name Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This option deletes the definition of preprocessor macro name by the D option This is equivalent to adding undef name at the beginning of the C source program An error will occur if name is omitted This option cannot delete the definition by describing define name def This option can be used to undefine C language macros that have been defined already but it cannot undefine the following macros LINE FILE DATE _ TIME _ or_CX_ An error will occur if these are specified for name This option can be specified more tha
479. orresponds to the option of the cx command The include path is displayed as the subproperty Default System include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the System Include Path Order dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Changes not allowed Only the specified order of the include paths can be changed Specify the name of the macro to be defined Specify in the format of macro name defined value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the cx command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 141 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 5 Frequently Used Options for Link The detailed information on frequently used options during linking is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for the library project Using libraries Specify the library file libxxx lib or libxxx a to be used other than the standard library libxxx lib is searc
480. ot area is fixed to the internal ROM If a function is called between the flash area to be rewritten and the boot area and if the start address of the function is changed as a result of modifying the function in the flash area the function cannot be called correctly The boot flash re link function hereafter referred to as the re link function is used to prevent this and enable functions to be called correctly This function is realized as follows a A branch table where instructions to branch to the functions in the flash area are written is prepared in the flash area b When a function in the flash area is called from the boot area execution jumps to the branch table in the flash area and then the instruction used to branch to the intended function is executed and jump occurs This mechanism can be realized by the user If the re link function is used this can be done relatively easily To use this function however the functions to be called in the flash area must be determined when the boot area is created This mechanism is used to call a function from the boot area even if the function is modified in the flash area 2 Image of re link function A function is called as shown below when the re link function is used a To call function in the boot area from the boot area The function can be called without problem because addresses have been resolved before they are programmed to the boot area Figure B 4 In Boot
481. owing property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Use 32 bit branch instruction in the Output Code category Example of use To assume that all jarl and jr instructions described in the source are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and perform assembling describe as gt cx CF3746 Xasm_far_ jump main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 365 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Library link control The library link control options are as follows L Xno_stdlib Xno_startup Xstartup This option specifies the library file to be used during linking Specification format lstring string Interpretation when omitted Only the standard library mathematical library and standard startup routine are linked When the Xno_romize option is not specified the ROMization area reservation code file is linked Detailed description This option specifies library file libstring lib to be used during linking When the cx resolves an unresolved external symbol reference after linking all object module files the library file libstring lib is referenced An error will occur if string is omitted If this option and the L option are specified at the same time the library file is searched from the folder specified by the L option If the L option is not specified the library file is searched from the standard folder If the librar
482. own list Restriction Links the standard library o Xno_stdlib Does not link the standard library 5 Link Map The detailed information on the link map is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output link map file Select whether to output the link map file This corresponds to the Xmap option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xmap Outputs the link map file Does not output the link map file Output folder for link map Specify the folder which the link map file is output file If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xmap option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xmap in the Output link map file property is selected Default BuildModeName How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters Link map file name Specify the link map file name The extension other than map cannot be speci
483. p File for details about the link map file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 36 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 4 Output symbol information The symbol information the allocation section information of variables is output to the symbol information file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel To output the symbol information file select Yes Xsfg in the Output symbol information file property in the Symbol Information category Select Yes Xsfg_opt in the Output optimized allocation information property to output optimum allocation information for variables at the section level Figure 2 32 Output symbol information file and Output optimized allocation information Property Yes Astg ize of tidata section Size of tidata byte section 126 Size of sidata section 32512 Size of sedata section 268 Size of data section 65536 When outputting the symbol information file you can set the output folder and output file name 1 Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with the Output folder for symbol information file property by directly entering in the text box or by the button BuildModeName is set by default BuildModeName is an embedded macro It is replaced to the build mode name 2 Set the output file name Setting the output file is made with the Symbol information
484. p file to be output differs depending on whether the Xno_romize option is specified as follows When the Xno_romize option is specified The link map file is output after link processing When the Xno_romize option is not specified The link map file is output after ROMization processing 2 Output example When the Xno_romize option is specified and the following objects are linked the link map file shown below is out put test obj object module file specified by the user cstartN obj startup routine libc lib standard library R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 94 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 1 OUTPUT SEGMENT INT TEXT DATA 6 OUTPUT SECTION RESET kKkKEKKKKKKEK MEMORY ALLOCATION MAP kk 2 SEGMENT ATTRIBUTE RX RX RW 3 VIRTUAL ADDRESS Ox00000000 Ox00000080 oxofffco0o00 is SIZE 16 Ox0000007a Ox00000262 0x00000008 a SIZE 10 122 610 kxk xk xk x x x LINK EDITOR ALLOCATION MAP kee eee 7 INPUT SECTION RESET SECURITY ID SECURITY ID pro_epi_ runtime text data sbss bss spro epi runtime text text text data sbss bss Output segment 8 VIRTUAL ADDRESS o0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000070 0x00000070 Ox00000080 O0x00000080 0x00000260 0x00000260 0x000002d6 Ox000002e0 oxofffco000 oxofffco
485. pass_source Interpretation when omitted The C source program is not output as a comment to the assembler source file Detailed description This option outputs a C source program as a comment to the assembler source file The output comments are for reference only and may not correspond exactly to the code Additionally non executed lines may not be output as comments e g type declarations and labels For example comments concerning global variables local variables function declarations etc may be output to incorrect positions By specifying the optimization options the code may be deleted and only the comment may remain This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Output comment to assembler source file in the Output Code category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output comment to assembler source file in the Output Code category Example of use To output a C source program as a comment to the assembler source file describe as gt CX CF3746 Xpass_source main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 352 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xswitch This option specifies the format in which the code of switch statements is to be output Specification format Xswitch type Interpretation when omitted The cx selects the optimum output format for each switch statement
486. pecified Caution Checking the overflow of the internal ROM is not supported when the single chip mode is selected Invalidate checking the overflow of the internal ROM by specifying the Xlink_check_off irom option and check the overflow on the link map This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Check illegality of external symbol in the Others category From the Link Options tab Check illegality of undefined external symbol in the Others category From the Link Options tab Check allocation for internal ROM area in the Others category R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 473 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example of use Not to check the size and alignment conditions of the external symbol when it is linked describe as gt cx CF3746 Xlink check _off symbol main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 474 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Filling value specification The filling value specification option is as follows Xalign_fill Xalign_fill This option specifies the filling value of align holes Specification format Xalagn fill value Interpretation when omitted The filling value 0x0000 is used for align holes between sections of the load module file to be generated Detailed description This option specifies filling val
487. pilogue processing of the function through runtime library calls describe as Cx CF3746 Xpro epi_runtime on main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 349 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xcall_lib This option suppresses inline expansion of the library function Specification format Xcall_lib Interpretation when omitted If the conditions below are met at the same time then at locations where there is a call to the library function sarttf a sartf s instruction will be generated in the place of the function call instruction In other cases a function call instruction is generated One of the optimization options O Osize or Ospeed is specified The source file containing the call to sartf includes standard header file math h or contains a declaration of the sartf prototype Any one of the conditions below is met The C option specifies a device with a V850E2V3 FPU and the Xfloat soft option is not specified The Xcommon v850e2v3 and Xfloat fpu options are specified at the same time Caution If the sqrtf s instruction is generated directly then unlike the case of a library function call no exception processing will be performed It is therefore necessary to specify this option if you wish to perform exception processing in the same manner as the library function Specifically the following points differ Even if the argument is a negative real number
488. ply to All Build mode list DefaultBuild alae Buildh odez E Delete Rename Select the build mode to be changed from the build mode list The selected build mode will be displayed in Selected build mode Click the Apply to All button The build mode for the main project and all the subprojects which belong to the project will be changed to the build mode selected in the dialog box Caution For projects that the selected build mode does not exist the build mode is duplicated from DefaultBuild with the selected build mode name and the build mode is changed to the duplicated build mode Remarks 1 The build mode prepared by default is only DefaultBuild See 2 15 5 Add a build mode for the method of adding a build mode 2 You can change the name of the build mode by selecting the build mode from the build mode list and clicking the Rename button However you cannot change the name of DefaultBuild R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 72 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 7 Delete a build mode Deleting a build mode is performed with the Build Mode Settings dialog box Select Build Mode Settings from the Build menu The dialog box will open Figure 2 94 Build Mode Settings Dialog Box Build Mode Settings Selected build mode BuildMode Apply to All Build mode list DefaultB uild BuildMode u J Her Select the build mode to be deleted
489. ppercase characters and lowercase characters are distinguished for options When numerical values are specified as parameters of an option decimal or hexadecimal numbers which starts with Ox OX can be specified Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the alphabet of hexadecimal numbers However only hexadecimal numbers can be specified as the parameter of the Xhex_fill option When a file name is specified as a parameter of an option it can include the path absolute path or relative path When a file name without the path or a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the current folder When a parameter of an option includes a space such as a path name enclose the parameter in a pair of double quotation marks A file name supported by Windows can be specified However cannot be used at the beginning of a file name because it is regarded as the command file specification and cannot be also used at the beginning of a file name because they are regarded as the option specification The length that can be specified for a file name depends on Windows up to 259 characters Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the alphabet of a file name When the P option is specified one file can be specified as input An error will occur if two or more files are specified Otherwise two or more files can be specified as input
490. pragma inline is specified If the type of the return value or parameter is different but type conversion is possible between the specified function call and definition an error will occur If this option is not specified the type of the return value is converted to the type at the call side the parameters are converted to the type of the function definition and inline expansion is performed Binary constant An error will occur If this option is not specified a string that consists of Ob or OB followed by one or more 0 or 1 is treated as a binary constant This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Individual Compile Options tab Compile strictly according to ANSI standards in the C Language category From the Individual Compile Options tab Compile strictly according to ANSI standards in the C Language category R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 337 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Note This is a standard specified by ISO IE C9899 1990 C90 Although the cx also accepts some of the specifications added by ISO IE C9899 1999 C99 if this option is specified code in violation of the standard will cause an error Example of use To process as making C source program comply strictly with the ANSI standard and output an error or warning for a specification that violates the standard describe as gt cx CF3746 Xansi main c
491. project Create the project for the boot area and add the build target files to the project Add the startup routine directly below the Startup node R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 57 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 70 Boot Area Project Project Tree X E A Fin Configurator Design Tool Ei A CX Build Tool ee VES0E2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool ME OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool File F Startup c_ boot c dir link_boot dir 2 Set the build options for the boot area project Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Common Options tab on the Property panel The settings for the build options are made in the Flash Correspondence category Select Yes in the Use boot flash re linking property The Load module file type property and Branch table address property will be displayed Figure 2 71 Flash Correspondence Category in Boot Area Use boot flash re linking Tes Load module file type Boot area load module file Mone Branch table address Hee 0 Select Boot area load module file None default in the Load module file type property Specify the start address of the branch table address in the flash area in the Branch table address property The range that can be specified for the value is 0 to FFFFFFFF hexadecimal number 0 is set by default Caution The load module file bef
492. project tree and select the Build Settings tab on the Property panel Select No on the Set as build target property in the Build category Figure 2 20 Set as build target Property Remark The files that can be applied this function are C source files assembler source files object module files link directive files symbol information files and library files 2 3 6 Classify a file into a category You can create a category under the File node and classify files by the category This makes it easier to view files added to the project on the project tree and makes it easier to manage files according to function To create a category node select either one of the Project node Subproject node or File node on the project tree and then select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu Figure 2 21 Add New Category Item For File Node SAE File a ga 8 Add New File Add Eile Project Tree gt sample Project A CX Build Tool cs YESOE2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool pE QE Programmer Flash Programming Tool Ei File mi s s R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 Page 28 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 The default category name is New category To change the category name you can use Rename from the context menu of the category node 2 You can also add a category node with the same name as the exi
493. ption and the C option are specified at the same time the processing is shown below Parameter series of Device Specified by C Xcommon V850E V850E2 V850E2V3 v850e Normal processing Replaces with Replaces with Xcommon v850e2 Xcommon v850e2v3 Outputs a warning Outputs a warning v850e2 Normal processing Outputs a Normal processing Replaces with warning Xcommon v850e2v3 Outputs a warning v850e2v3 Normal processing Outputs a Normal processing Outputs a Normal processing warning warning If the instruction set architecture of the device specified by the C option is the one specified by this option both options are processed If the instruction set architecture of the device specified by the C option is inferior to the one specified by this option V850E2V3 gt V850E2 gt V850E ES a warning is output and both options are processed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 433 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If the instruction set architecture of the device specified by the C option is superior to the one specified by this option a warning is output and parameter series of this option is replaced by the instruction set architecture of the device specified by the C option Example of use To embed the magic number common to models with the instruction set architectures superior to V850E into the object module file to be generated describe as gt cx X
494. ption is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Initialize section of data without initial value to zero in the Hex Format category Example of use To generate as many null characters as the size of the section with the section type NOBITS and section attribute A describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex null main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 506 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_symtab This option converts the symbol table and outputs it Specification format Xhex_symtab string Interpretation when omitted The symbol table is not output Detailed description This option converts the symbol table and outputs it The items that can be specified as string are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified global Converts only global symbols pal Converts local symbols as well An error will occur if string is omitted This option is valid only when the Xhex_format T option is specified This option can not be specified together with the Xhex_fill option This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Convert symbol table in the Symbol Table category Example of use To convert the symbol table and outputs it describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex symtab Xhex_format T main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev
495. put string without the extension _pen mf 2 When changing the hex file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Hex Output Options tab on the Property panel Enter the hex file name to be changed to on the Hex file name property in the Output File category Figure 2 28 Hex file name Property 3 When changing the library file name Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Create Library Options tab on the Property panel Enter the library file name to be changed to on the Output file name property in the Output File category R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 34 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 29 Output file name Property El Output File R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 35 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 2 Output an assemble list The assemble list the code of the assemble result is output to the assemble list file Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Compile Options tab on the Property panel To output the assemble list file select Yes Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property in the Assemble List category Figure 2 30 Output assemble list file Property When outputting the assemble list file you can set the output folder and output file name 1 Set the output folder Setting the output folder is made with t
496. r a C source program and then generates an assembler source file a Preprocessor Performs processing of preprocess directives in a C source program When the P option is specified a preprocessed file is output Remark The P option is not specified by default b Syntax analyzer Performs syntax analysis processing of a C source program and then converts the program into an internal data expression of the compiler c Common optimization module Performs optimization for internal data expressions converted from the C source program d Code generation module Converts an internal data expression into an assembler source program 2 Assembler Converts an assembler source program into machine language instructions and then generates a relocatable object module file 3 Linker Links an object module file link directive file library file and then generates an executable object file load module file on the target system 4 Symbol file generator Generates a symbol information file This runs when the Xsfg option is specified If the generated symbol information file is specified by the Xsymbol_file option the compiler can use the file Remarks 1 The Xsfg and Xsymbol_file options are not specified by default 2 When the symbol information file is generated you need to specify the Xcube_suite_info option at the same time 3 When the symbol information file is generated you need to specify the Xcube_suite_info optio
497. r code __asm declarations or code between pragma asm and pragma endasm statements and following embedded functions in a C program __DI __ El __set_il __ nop _halt __Idsr __stsr __Idgr __ stor Unused static functions and static variables in the file are deleted by default Therefore deleting unused static functions can be suppressed by specifying the Odelete_static_func option Functions for which pragma inline is specified will not necessarily be performed inline expansion even if Oinline 1 or 2 is specified In the C language the pragma inline specification does not guarantee inline expansion instead it serves as a hint to the compiler As with the register inline keywords it is possible that the function will not be expanded depending on the contents and compilation status R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 516 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 1 6 Boot flash re link function 1 Outline Some systems are equipped with flash area or detachable ROM To upgrade the version of the program the contents of the flash area may be rewritten or the detachable ROM may be replaced with a new ROM When changing the program even partially basically the project itself is reorganized or rebuilt However it would be convenient if the allocation to be upgraded was limited to the flash area or external ROM and if it was not necessary to reorganize the project The bo
498. r directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified Output C source Select whether to output the comments of the C source to the preprocessed file comments to This corresponds to the Xpreprocess option of the cx command preprocessed file This property is displayed only when Yes P in the Output preprocessed source file property in the Output File category is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xpreprocess comment Outputs the comments of the C source to the preprocessed file Does not output the comments of the C source to the preprocessed file Output line number Select whether to output the line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file information to This corresponds to the Xpreprocess option of the cx command preprocessed file This property is displayed only when Yes P in the Output preprocessed source file property in the Output File category is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xpreprocess line Outputs the line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file No Does not output the line number information of the C source to the preprocessed file 5 C Language The detailed information on C language is displayed and the configuration can be changed
499. r panel appears and the destination line number of the file is displayed You can jump to the line of the source file that generated the error from the error message output when build ing b Display help If you select the Help for Message from the context menu or press the F1 key when the cursor is on a line displaying the warning or error message the help related to that line s message is displayed c Save log The contents displayed on the currently selected tab can be saved in a text file txt by selecting Save Output tab name As from the File menu to open the Save As dialog box messages on the tab that is not selected will not be saved 2 Tab selection area Select tabs that messages are output from Tabs that are displayed are as follows All Messages Displays all the messages by order of output except while executing a rapid build Rapid build Displays the message output from the build tool by running a rapid build Build Tool Displays the message output from the build tool by running a build rebuild or batch build Caution Even if anew message is output on a deselected tab tab selection will not automatically switch In this case a mark will be added in front of the tab name indicating that a new message has been output File menu only available for the Output panel The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Output panel other items are common to all the panels Sav
500. r value by auto matically adding one If this field is blank the value is considered as 0x8 by the link function of the compiler How to change Directly enter in the text box 0x0 to OxFF hexadecimal number b Detailed information of sections Name Specify the section name The following characters can be used only 0 9 A Z a Z _ Default NewSection_XXxX XXX 0 to 255 in decimal numbers How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 1022 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 251 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Type Select the type of the section Select Exist data PROGBITS when a object file contains sections with actual values text data etc Select No data NOBITS when a object file contains sections without actual values bss sbss etc Exist data PROGBITS How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Exist data Sets the section with a default value PROGBITS No data Sets the section without a default value NOBITS Attribute Select the attribute of the section Default When the attribute of the parent segment is Executable AX Executable AX When the attribute of the parent segment is Read only A Read only A When the attribute of the parent segment is Read Write AW Read Write
501. r_set euc_jp Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as EUC UF T 8 Xcharacter_set utf8 Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as UFT 8 Big5 Xcharacter_set big5 Interprets the Chinese character code in the source file as Traditional Chinese GB2312 Interprets the Chinese character code in Xcharacter_set gb231 2 the source file as Simplified Chinese No process Does not process the Japanese character Xcharacter_set none code in the source file The detailed information on output codes is displayed and the configuration can be changed 4 Output Code R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 219 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use 32 bit branch Select whether to use the far jump function for the jarl and jr instructions instruction By using the far jump function it is assumed that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and assembling is performed This corresponds to the Xasm_far_jump V850E2 V850E2V3 option of the cx command This property is displayed only for the project using a device with the V850E2 core and V850E2V3 architecture Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Select from the drop down list Rest
502. r_set option of the cx command Select from the drop down list Restriction SJIS None Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS EUC Xcharacter_set euc_jp Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as EUC UF T 8 Xcharacter_set utf8 Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as UFT 8 Big5 Xcharacter_set big5 Interprets the Chinese character code in the source file as Traditional Chinese GB2312 Interprets the Chinese character code in Xcharacter_set gb231 2 the source file as Simplified Chinese No process Does not process the Japanese character Xcharacter_set none code in the source file 4 Output Code The detailed information on output codes is displayed and the configuration can be changed Size threshold of sdata Specify the upper limit size of the data length allocated to the sdata sbss sections sbss section Data specified the sdata or sbss section by the pragma section directive is allocated to that allocation Bytes section regardless of the size This corresponds to the Xsdata option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction 0 to 65535 decimal number R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 169 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use 32 bit branch Select whether to use the far jump function for the jarl and jr instructions instruction By using th
503. ranch table address property 3 Run a build of the flash area project When you run a build of the flash area project the load module file which implements the re link function is created The boot area hex file the same content as the file generated in 2 12 2 Set the boot area project and flash area hex file are also generated Figure 2 76 Generated Files for Flash Area Project Tree z JFS uPD7OF3506 Microcontroller A Fin Configurator Design Tool FH Code Generator Design Tool A CX Build Tool es YESOE2M Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool pE OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool File tl Build tool generated Files m Flash Inn hex Flash hex F Startup c_ Flash c die link_flash dir R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 60 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 13 Allocate Variables to Optimum Section To allocate the variables to the optimum section the symbol information file a text format file that allocation information for the variable defined in the C source file is described can be used The variables can be allocated to the optimum section without editing the C source file by generating the symbol information file and referencing the file when compiling The procedures for performing this operation are described below Generating the symbol information file automatically and relocating the variables Editing and using the
504. ration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list if else Outputs the switch statements in the same format Xswitch ifelse as the if else statement along a string of case statements in programs Select this item if the case statements are written in the order of frequency or if only a few labels are used Because the case statements are compared starting from the top unnecessary comparison can be reduced and the execution speed can be increased if the case statement that most often matches is written first Binary search Outputs the code in the binary search format for Xswitch binary switch statements in programs Searches for a matching case statement by using a binary search algorithm If this item is selected when many labels are used any case statement can be found at almost the same speed Table jump Outputs the code in the table jump format for Xswitch table switch statements in programs References a table indexed on the values in the case statements and selects and processes case labels from the switch statement values The code will branch to all the case statements with about the same speed However if case values are not used in succession an unnecessary area will be created Select the size per label of the branch table for the case labels in switch statements Label size of switch table This corresponds to the Xword_case option of the cx command This property is displayed only wh
505. re Ospeed Note O tem Ounroll Oinline Odelete_static_func Opipeline R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 509 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE b Dependencies The behavior of the following options varies depending on what other options are specified An error will occur normally if the C option is not specified However an error will not occur if any of the Xcommon V h or P options is specified The behavior may differ if the C option is specified at the same time See Xcommon for details Xpreprocess This option will be invalid if the P option is not specified at the same time At this time a warning will not be output Xalign_fill An error will occur if the Xtwo_pass_link option is not specified at the same time Xhex_fll If the Xhex_rom_less option is specified at the same time parameters start and size must be specified An error will occur if these parameters are not specified Xflash_ext_table An error will occur if the any of Xflash Xlink_output Xno_romize options one or more is not specified at the same time Xflash An error will occur if the Xflash_ext_table option is not specified at the same time An error will occur if the Xcube_suite_info option is not specified at the same time Xsfg_opt This option will be invalid if the Xsfg option is not specified at the same time Xsfg_size_tidata This option will be invalid if the Xsfg_op
506. re superior to V850E V850E V850E2 or V850E2V3 which is specified as the target device V850E2V3 which is specified as the target device v850e2 It is possible to link to the model with the instruction set architecture superior to V850E2 V850E2 or v850e2v3 It is possible to link to the model with the V850E2V3 instruction set architecture which is specified as a target device If the instruction set architecture of the target device is V850E2V3 we recommend specifying this item to get the best performance An error will occur if series is omitted If this option and the C option are specified at the same time the processing is shown below Parameter series of Device Specified by C Xcommon V850E V850E2 V850E2V3 v850e Normal processing Replaces with Replaces with Xcommon v850e2 Xcommon v850e2v3 Outputs a warning Outputs a warning v850e2 Normal processing Outputs a Normal processing Replaces with warning Xcommon v850e2v3 Outputs a warning v850e2v3 Normal processing Outputs a Normal processing Outputs a Normal processing warning warning If the instruction set architecture of the device specified by the C option is the one specified by this option both options are processed If the instruction set architecture of the device specified by the C option is inferior to the one specified by this option V850E2V3 gt V850E2 gt V850E a warning is output and both options are processed R2
507. rea o ree Co eriebiainsavesoie Note The lower 16 bits are used as the location address of the data record Start address record This indicates the entry point address SS NL R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 102 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS ltem Description Number Record mark Fixed at 04 w EA EA E S S Note The address is calculated by paragraph value lt lt 4 offset value Expanded address record This indicates the paragraph value of the entry address Note This is output if the segment is renewed at the beginning of the segment when the data record is output or when the offset value of the data record s load address exceeds the maximum value of Oxffff SS ltem Description Number Record Record mare L o Fixed at 02 Fixed a 0000 e Fred at 0 Paragraph value of segment Data record This indicates the value of the code ltem Description Number Record mark Number of byteste Fixed at 00 Code This is each byte of code expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 103 of 577 Oct 01 2010 re Location address CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Note This is limited to the range of 0x1 to Oxff the minimum value for the number of bytes of the code indicated by one data record is 1 and the maximum value is 255 Example 00 3C58E01B 6C NL Recor
508. rea is generated when the Xflash option is not specified The branch to the flash area is processed At this time the process is the branch to the branch table that is created at the address specified by this option When the load module file for the flash area is generated when the Xflash option is specified The branch table that has the branch instruction to the original branch destination is created at the address specified by this option The range that can be specified for address is 0x00000000 to OXFFFFFFFF An abort error will occur if a value outside the range is specified If the specified value is less than 8 digits the higher digits will be filled with O If an odd value is specified as address it is corrected to an even number and then a warning will be output and processing will continued An error will occur if address is omitted address must be the same as the value that is used when the load module file for the boot area and flash area is generated An operation fault will occur if a different value is specified No error checking is done address must be within the ROM for the flash area No error checking is done because it is not possible to determine which area contains the specified address By specifying this option section ext_table that has a size of maximum ID value Ne 1 entry size of branch table bytes and starts with address is automatically created when the load module file for the fl
509. rent value of the area that this dialog box is called from is reflected in this area Remark Up to 65535 lines and 65535 characters can be entered When the input violates any restriction the following message will be shown in the tooltip More than maximum number of restriction in the prop The numbers of input characters exceeds the maxi erty that called this dialog box characters cannot be mum number of restriction in the property that called specified The current number of characters is dis this dialog box played between brackets at the beginning of the line in excess of the limit Function buttons Reflects the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Cancel Does not reflect the entered text to the text box that opened this dialog box and closes this dialog box Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 240 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Path Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to edit or add the path or file name including the path Figure A 27 Path Edit Dialog Box When Editing Path Path Edit Path One path per one line ru Browse Subfolders are automatically included Figure A 28 Path Edit Dialog Box When Editing File Name Including Path Path Edit Path One path per one line l _ Browse The following items are explained here
510. responds to the option of the cx command The specified include path is displayed as the subproperty Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are not distinguished for the include paths Additional include paths number of defined items How to change Edit by the Path Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 217 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use whole include paths Select whether to assemble using the include path specified in the Additional include paths specified for build tool property in the Preprocess category from the Assemble Options tab of the build tool to be used The setting of the Compile Options tab is used when Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected When Yes in the Build simultaneously property is selected the include paths are added by the following procedure Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from this tab Paths specified in the Additional include paths property from the Compile Options tab Paths displayed in the System include paths property from the Compile Options tab When No in the Build simultaneously property is selected the include
511. riable can be referenced in the program and position of a variable position on a register or memory may be changed Breakpoints cannot be set for statements that have been deleted Transfer splitting or merging of statements may have rearranged the sequence of executable instructions so that lines between the lines which have been rearranged may be handled as a single line for which break points and step execution may no longer be possible Note The address of an executable instruction within a line of source code may be smaller than the address of an executable instruction in a previous line or may be greater than the address of an executable instruction in a subsequent line If the sequence of executable instructions for if else statements has been rearranged or if loop expansion has caused a sequence of executable instructions to be rearranged step execution may no longer be possible The entire function is regarded as the valid range scope for all automatic variables However if the variables have been allocated to registers they can be deleted or otherwise rendered invisible by optimization even when they are within the scope This can occur when the variables are being used as local variables within the scope or have been assigned as local variables as a result of optimization R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 515 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Example void f
512. riables A global variable defined in the flash area cannot be referenced from the boot area Therefore an external variable of the same name can be defined in both the boot area and flash area Each of these external variables is referenced only from the respective areas R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 518 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE d To call function in the boot area from the flash area When a function in the boot area is called from the flash area the contents of the boot area are not changed Therefore a function in the boot area can be directly called from the flash area Figure B 7 From Flash Area to Boot Area In boot area In flash area void func _boot1 void void func _flashl void void func boot void void func_flash2 void func flashi func_boot1 Branch table The function in the boot area can be Je tune flashi jr tune flash2 called from the flash area In the same manner as functions this is relevant to referencing external variables A global variable defined in the boot area cannot be referenced from the flash area 3 Realizing re link function To realize the re link function a boot area and flash area must be separately created This means that only the flash area is modified after the boot area has been created after a program has been stored in ROM When creating a project with CubeSuite therefore divide the projects a
513. riction Yes Xasm_far_jump Assumes that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and performs assembling Performs assembly as a jarl or jr instruction 5 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Object module file name Specify the name of the object module file generated after assembling The extension other than obj cannot be specified If the extension is omitted obj is automatically added If this is blank the file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by obj This corresponds to the o option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 259 characters 6 Assemble List The detailed information on the assemble list is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output assemble list file Select whether to output the assemble list file This corresponds to the Xprn_path option of the cx command Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Configuration of the compile option Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xprn_path Outputs the assemble list file Does not output the assemble list file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 220 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDI
514. ring Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 146 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Undisplayed warning Specify the warning message number to not be displayed regardless of the warning level message If multiple message numbers are specified delimit them with comma example 02042 02107 Also the range can be set using hyphen example 02222 02554 02699 02782 If the same number is specified in the Displayed warning message property and this property the number specified in the Displayed warning message property takes precedence This corresponds to the Xno_ warning option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 2048 characters 11 Build Method The detailed information on the build method is displayed and the configuration can be changed Build simultaneously Select whether to geneate the load module file by compiling assembling linking multiple files simultaneously The files with the individual build options and files to be executed prior to the build are excluded from runing a build simultaneously See 2 16 5 Compile assemble link multiple files simultaneously for details about runing a build simultaneously Default Yes
515. rmat function name total stack size additional margin Remarks 1 The underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 An appropriate frame size is added to corresponding system library functions in the stack usage tracer s database as additional margin Function buttons Adjust Size Opens the Adjust Stack Size dialog box to change the information additional margin recur sion depth and callee functions for the function selected in the Unknown Functions Adjusted Functions System Library Functions Hep Displays the help of this dialog box R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 297 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Adjust Stack Size dialog box This dialog box is used to change the information additional margin recursion depth and callee functions for the selected function Figure A 51 Adjust Stack Size Dialog Box Adjust Stack Size 1 Function Hame publ 2 g Frame Size Boo Cancel 3 y Additional Margir o 4 4 Recursion Depth o Help Callee Function List for Indirect Call Function buttons Callee Functions All Functions sub1 1 4 4 main5 6 4 stab 4 4 sub bia 424 sub 1 4 4 5 sub 28 6 4 sample cHsubl 4 4 sub 4 4 4 sube 1 42 1 40 sub 1 4 4 sub3 8 3 subs 4 4 The following items are
516. rmat default All Files All the formats Function buttons Opens the file with the specified application R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 288 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Stack Usage Tracer window This is the first window to be opened when the stack usage tracer is launched Use this window to check or modify the amount of stack used on a per function basis Figure A 49 Stack Usage Tracer Window el sample Stack Usage Tracer Seles 1 File View Option Help 2 E main Total Stack Size Additional Margin 4 i H stabi E main 576 D prajiSTK 3 E sub C stabi 4 4 DAproji STEN E subz E subi D iproj STK E subs E uhi 1 D proj STE a Kise ea TT sib 28 Dsipraj STKh E subii Ll sample c D projiSTk subiz Ld subi4 DA proj STK subz1 Reading completed C sample c subi3 Stack size specification of subl canceled 5 TH subi stagk size specification of subl1 adjusted Additional margin ts set to 8 Recursion depth is set to 3 Shack size specification of subl z adjusted Additional margin is set to 3 For Help press Fl The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Caution How to open From the Tool menu select Startup Stack Usage Tracer Description of each area 1 Menu bar This area consists of the following menu items a File menu Save Call
517. rnal instruction RAM will not be included in the rompsec section and also be deleted from the output file Example of use To include section text1 and text2 in the rompsec section describe as gt CX CF3746 Xrompsec text text1 text2 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 393 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xrompsec_ only This option generates the load module file that has only the rompsec section Specification format Xrompsec_ only Interpretation when omitted The section with the text attribute is included in the load module file to be generated Detailed description This option generates the load module file that has only the rompsec section no section with the text attribute is included in the file Example of use To generate the load module file that has only the rompsec section describe as gt cx CF3746 Xrompsec_ only main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 394 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xromize_check_ off This option omits error checking under ROMization Specification format Xromize check off string string Interpretation when omitted A peripheral allocation error of the internal ROM is not checked for the rompsec section The duplicate address of the input file and output file is checked Detailed description This option omits error che
518. rop down list Restriction Yes Only Specified Performs inline expansion at the location calling Functions None the function for which pragma inline is specified Yes Auto detect Distinguishes the function that is the target of Oinline 2 inline expansion automatically and expands it No Oinline 0 Does not specify inline expansion of the function Perform pipeline Select whether to improve the program s execution performance by reordering instructions at optimization the machine language level This corresponds to the Opipeline option of the cx command This property is displayed only when the project uses a device with the V850E2V3 architecture and when Detail Setting in the Level of optimization property in the Optimization category is selected tert iin Sort external variables Select whether to sort external variables This property is for reducing the RAM capacity This corresponds to the Xsort_var option of the cx command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xsort_var Rearranges external variables allocated to a section other than const sconst sequentially starting from the largest alignment size Does not specify sorting external variables R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 204 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Perform inline expansion Selsect whether to perform inline expansion of
519. rror output It does not execute compilation This option outputs the descriptions of the cx options to the standard error output It does not execute assembling Example of use To output the descriptions of the cx options to the standard error output describe as gt CX CF3746 h R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 427 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Output file specification The output file specification options are as follows O Xobj_path Xorn_path O This option specifies the output file name Specification format Interpretation when omitted The file is output to the current folder If this option is specified with the c option The output object module file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by obj Other than above The output load module file name is a lmf Detailed description This option specifies the output file name as file If file already exists it will be overwritten This option is valid when processing is interrupted by specifying the c option If this option is specified with the c option It is assumed that an object module file name has been specified as file Other than above It is assumed that a load module file name has been specified as file An error will occur if two or more files are output An error will occur if file is omitted This option is equivalent to t
520. rtup node categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Category Information 2 Notes Figure A 20 Property Panel Category Information Tab Property l New catego Property El Category Informabon Category name New category Hotes Category name This t the name of thie category The category name can be between 1 and 200 characters Also the category name colored in gray is fined Description of each category 1 Category Information The detailed information on the category is displayed and the configuration can be changed Category name Specify the name of the category to categorize files This property of the Files node Build tool generated files node and Startup node is displayed in gray and you cannot change the attribute Default Category name of files How to change Directly enter in the text box 1 to 200 characters 2 Notes The detailed information on notes is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category of the Files node Build tool generated files node and Startup node is not displayed Add memos to the category of files Add one item in one line The specified memo is displayed as the subproperty Default Memo number of items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items
521. rty Caution The library file can also be linked by adding it directly to the project In this case the library file is not searched from the library path because it is linked directly via the absolute path R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 47 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 Set ROMize Options To set options for the ROMize phase select the Build tool node on the project tree and select the ROMize Options tab on the Property panel You can set the various ROMize options by setting the necessary properties in this tab Caution This tab is not displayed for the library project Figure 2 55 Property Panel ROMize Options Tab Property A Le Property El Output File Output AOMized load module file Output Non ROMized load module file El Input File Use standard RUMization area reservation code file Section Others Output RO Mized load module fe Selects whether to output a load module file for RUMization This option corresponde to the no_romize option of the cx command Common Options Compile Options Link Options A ROMize Options Hex Output Options 2 8 1 Create a ROMized load module The following procedure shows how to create a ROMized load module using the ROMization area reservation code file rompcrt obj that is provided by default The ROMization processor is a tool that takes initial value information for variables in data attribute sections as well as programs
522. rvation code file at the end of input files describe as gt cx CF3746 Xrompcrt rompack obj main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 492 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE rompsec section control The rompsec section control options are as follows Xrompsec_start Xrompsec_data Xrompsec_text Xrompsec_ only Xromize_check_off Xrompsec_ start This option specifies the start address of the rompsec section Specification format xrompsec_start label Interpretation when omitted The value of label _S_romp is regarded as the start address of the rompsec section to be created Detailed description This option performs hex output only for the specified section The value of label label is regarded as the start address of the rompsec section to be created If label is not in the load module file or if this option is specified more than once the option specified last will be valid and the option specified first will be ignored An error will occur if Jabe is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the ROMize Options tab Start symbol of rompsec section in the Section category Example of use To regard the value of label romp_ start as the start address of the rompsec section to be created describe as gt CX CE3 746 Xrompsec Start romp Start main c R20UT0261EJ0100
523. s Project Tree sample Project UPD FOF 3506 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool EH Code Generator Design Tool A CX Build Tool es VESOE2M Simulator Debug Tool qb Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool ral Build tool generated Files im ample Inf La het sample hex Si c main c Remark Files displayed under the Build tool generated files node are as follows For other than the library project Load module file Imf Link map file map Hex file hex Error message file err For the library project Library file lib R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 76 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Error message file err Caution The Build tool generated files node is created during build This node will no longer appear if you reload the project after building 2 16 1 Run a build of updated files Out of build target files a build of only updated files is run hereafter referred to as build Running a build is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project see 2 15 4 Change the file build target project 1 When running a build of the entire project Click on the toolbar 2 When running a build of the active project Select the project and then select Build active project from the context menu Figure 2 102 Build active project Item
524. s ER Ascending order mi Descending order Fale Ascending order Sorts category nodes and files in order of their timestamp Descending order E Ascending order ci Descending order Displays category nodes and files in order of the user definition default You can change the display order of category nodes and files arbitrarily by dragging and dropping them j Displaying the editing file When the file added to the project is edited in the Editor pane and the file is not saved once the file name is Wa followed by Wa If the file is saved will be deleted The file that is not saved after editing c main c k Displaying the source file in boldface that the individual build option is set The source file icon whose option is different from the project general options individual compile options or individual assemble options is changed to the different one from the normal icon Highlighting the file with the read only attribute The read only file added to the project is displayed in italic m Highlighting the file that does not exist The file that is added to the project but does not exist is grayed out and its icon is dimmed The file that exists The file that does not exist G maine R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 124 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE n Highlighting the build target file lt 1 gt The file which an error occurr
525. s The types and explanations for options of the hex output phase are shown below Table B 8 Hex Output Options Hex file output This option specifies the hex file name specification Xhex_only This option executes only hex output Hex conversion Xhex_format This option specifies the format of the hex file to be output control Xhex_fill This option specifies fill processing of the hex file Xhex_section This option converts the codes in the specified section in hex for mat and outputs them Xhex_block_size This option specifies the maximum length of the block Xhex_ offset This option specifies the offset of the address to be output Xhex_null This option generates as many null characters as the size of the section of data without an initial value Xhex_symtab This option converts the symbol table and outputs it Xhex_rom_less This option does not use the information of the internal ROM area when the hex file is filled R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 498 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Hex file output specification The hex file output specification options are as follows Xhex Xhex_only Xhex This option specifies the hex file name Specification format Xhex file Interpretation when omitted The hex file is output to the same folder as the load module file under the load module file name with the extension replaced by hex t
526. s 1 The library file includes a symbol table of the symbols belonging to the object module file and the library file is repeatedly searched as long as unresolved external references remain unresolved 2 Object module file that defines the referenced symbol Reserved symbols During link processing the cx generates reserved symbols with the values of the start address of each output section the first address beyond the end of each output section 4 byte aligned address and the first address beyond the end of the executable load module file If the user defines a symbol having the same name as any of these reserved symbols the cx uses the defined symbol and does not create its own symbol A symbol having a name made by prefixing __s to the name of the output section is used as a reserved symbol that has the start address of a section as a value If this section name begins with is taken out and ___s is prefixed to make it a symbol name The reserved symbols with the values of the first address exceeding the end of a section 4 byte aligned address consist of the output section name prefaced with __e If this section name begins with is taken out and __e is prefixed to make it a symbol name ___end is used as the reserved symbol with the value of the first address beyond the end of the executable load module file that was generated 4 byte aligned address R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 529 of 577
527. s blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xprn_ path option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xprn_path in the Output assemble list file property is selected Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Browse For Folder dialog box which appears when clicking the button Restriction Up to 247 characters 10 Error Output The detailed information on the error output is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 212 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output error message Select whether to output the error message file to the Output panel file This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the cx command Default Configuration of the common option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xerror_file Outputs the error message file Does not output the error message file Specify the folder which the error message file is output Error message file output folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embed
528. s follows Project to be allocated to the boot area Project to be allocated to the flash area project that may be modified in the future In addition separately prepare a startup routine and link directive file for each area a Specify the ext_func control instruction When calling a function in the flash area from the boot area specify the name of the function to be called label name and ID number to the boot area by using the ext_func control instruction The format of the ext_func control instruction is shown below Sext func function name ID value When a function name in the flash area is specified in the boot area by using the ext_func control instruction a branch table ext_table is created Specify the address of this branch table the first symbol is __ ext_table_head using the Xflash_ext_table option when the load module file for the boot area is generated and when the load module file for the flash area is generated It is recommended that allocating the branch table to the beginning of the flash area due to the relationship with the link directive file format R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 519 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If the internal ROM is a flash area however the INT segment goes first so allocate it after this Specify the ID value in a positive number The different ID value must not be specified for the same function name or the same ID value
529. s of builds are available Build see 2 16 1 Runa build of updated files Rebuild see 2 16 2 Runa build of all files Rapid build see 2 16 3 Runa build in parallel with other operations Batch build see 2 16 4 Run builds in batch with build modes Remark _ If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process on the Property panel from the Common Options tab in the Others category set the Commands executed before build processing and Commands executed after build processing properties R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 13 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS If there are any commands you wish to run before or after the build process at the file level you can set them from the Individual Compile Options tab for a C source file and Individual Assemble Options tab for an assembler source file 7 Save the project Save the setting contents of the project to the project file Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about saving the project 2 1 2 Create a user library The procedure for creating a user library is shown below 1 Create or load a project Create a new project or load an existing one When you create a new project set a library project Remark See CubeSuite Start for details about creating a new project or loading an existing one 2 Set a build target project Set a build target project see 2 15 Make Settings for Build
530. s option specifies the optimization level or the details of each optimization items See B 1 5 Optimization function for details The items that can be specified as evel are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified nothing Optimization with debugging precedence Regards debugging as important and suppresses all optimization including default optimization default Default Performs optimization that debugging is not affected optimization of expressions and register allocation and the like size Optimization with the object size precedence Regards reducing the ROM RAM capacity as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs speed Optimization with the execution speed precedence Regards shortening the execution speed as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs If level is omitted it is assumed that size has been specified The items that can be specified as item and value are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 344 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Optimization Item Parameter Description item value unroll O to 4294967295 Loop expansion Integer value When 0 or 1 is specified the expansion is suppressed If 2 or more is specified the number of executions is converted into N lo
531. s range property is selected Default How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xhex_null Initializes the section of the data without the initial value to zero No Does not initialize the section of the data without the initial value to zero 3 Symbol Table The detailed information on the symbol table is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when Expanded Tektronix hex format Xhex_format T in the Hex file format property in the Hex Format category is selected Convert symbol table Select whether to convert the symbol table during the conversion to the hex file This corresponds to the Xhex_symtab option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Convert global Converts only global symbols symbols Xhex_symtab global Does not convert the symbol table Restriction Yes Convert global and local Converts global symbols and local symbols Xhex_symtab all symbols 4 Others Other detailed information on the hex output is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is displayed only when Yes in the Specify converted address range property in the Hex Format category is selected R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 193 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Warn internal ROM Select whether to display the warning message when the area to be converted
532. s reason if a RAM area data copy function _rcopy _rcopy1 _rcopy2 _rcopy4 is called in a C source file e g the main function an error will occur in CX A warning is therefore displayed for locations where these copy functions are referenced no conversion is performed 2 Assembler source file The conversion specification for assembler source files is shown below Table B 16 Conversion Specification for Assembler Source Files OOo ee O o eee a A Ea Ea E pe pm a a a a a a oe previous converted Information Even if the target line is deleted the section cannot be switched correctly For this reason a message to change the section is output e fa E E E E C eee O eomer e ooo Deea O eoe e ooo E R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 566 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE section pro epi runtime pro epi_runtime cseg ae text text section version comment Change ee Change section name text name cseg text name is the name of an arbitrary section section name sbss name dseg sbss Change section name cseg text Change This is the case when no allocation attribute is specified vdbstrtab Not converted Information Even if the target line is deleted the section s code cannot be deleted For this reason a message to delete the section itself is output R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 56
533. s the remainder expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal number that results from dividing total value of char acters in blocks other than SS and NL by 256 The specification differs depending on each block Newline n Note The value for each character is determined as follows 0 to 9 0 to 9 A to Z 10 to 35 36 37 38 39 ato z 40 to 65 Data block This indicates the value of the code R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 109 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS ltem Description Number 1 Header character character OO Block length Co free aaee a a a e Number of digits in the load address and the load address 2 to 17 bytes 6 Code Each byte of code expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number Example 15 6 1C 3 100 020202020202 NL Item Description Number ER Block length Type of block 6 Checksum This is the remainder expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal number that results from dividing 1 5 6 3 1 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 28 by 256 EE Number of digits in the load address is 3 and the load address is 100 Tom Each byte of code expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number Symbol block This indicates the value of the symbol XX XX XX XX XX NL Item Description 1 Header character 2 Block length 3 Fixed at 3 Number of characters of the section name and the section nam
534. s the subproperty Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Click the button to open the Path Edit dialog box gt Edit by the Specify Far Jump File dialog box which appears when clicking the Browse button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 259 characters Up to 5000 items can be specified However only the file name specified last is valid R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 210 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 8 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configuration can be changed Object module file name Specify the name of the object module file generated after compilation The extension other than obj cannot be specified If the extension is omitted obj is automatically added If this is blank the file name will be the source file name with the extension replaced by obj This corresponds to the o option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 259 characters Output assembler source Select whether to output the assembler source file of the compile result for the C source file This corresponds to the Xasm_path option of the cx command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_path Outputs the assembler source file of the compile r
535. s within the above range an error will occur if the section does not exist The range that can be specified for size is 0x01 to Ox100000000 Specify start and size in hexadecimal If start and size are omitted all the codes in the internal ROM area defined by the device file are converted in hex format and output This option can not be specified together with the Xhex_format T option When the information of the internal ROM area defined by the device file is not used specify this option together with the Xhex_rom_less option In this case parameter start and size of this option must be specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Specify converted address range in the Hex Format category From the Hex Output Options tab Filling value in the Hex Format category From the Hex Output Options tab Start address in the Hex Format category From the Hex Output Options tab Size in the Hex Format category Example of use To convert all codes in the area from address 0x1000 to size 0x2000 into hex format and outputs them describe as The unused area in the area is filled with 0x55 gt CX CF3746 Xhex fill 0x55 0x1000 0x2000 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 502 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_section This option converts the codes in the specified section in hex
536. scribe as gt cx CF3746 Xtemp path D tmp main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 454 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Source debugging control The source debugging control option is as follows g g This option outputs information for source debugging Specification format Interpretation when omitted Information for source debugging will not be output Detailed description This option outputs information for source debugging to the output file Source level debugging can be performed by specifying this option Example of use To output information for source debugging to the output file describe as gt cx CF3746 g main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 455 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device specification The device specification options are as follows C Xdev_path C This option specifies the target device Specification format cdevice Interpretation when omitted If the Xcommon option is specified the behavior is in accordance with that specification Otherwise an error will occur except when specifying the V h or P option An error will occur when linking is performed Detailed description This option specifies the target device See the user s manual of each device file about device types that can be specified as
537. sed the load module file for the boot area is generated When the boot flash re link function is not used normal link processing is performed Detailed description This option generates the load module file for the flash area when the boot flash re link function is used At this time symbol information of load module file for the boot area file is referred and link processing is performed Specify the load module file for the boot area that is generated using the boot flash re link function as file The load module file specified here must be the file before ROMization processing generated with the Xno_romize or Xlink_output option specified An error will occur if a nonexistent file is specified as file An error will occur if file is omitted This option must be specified together with the Xflash_ext_table option Example of use To generate load module file for the boot area boot Imf with 0x200 as the start address of the branch table for the flash area describe as gt cx CF3746 Xflash_ ext table 0x200 Xlink output boot 1lmf bootl asm boot2 asm Xlank darective boot dir To create the branch table at address 0x200 and generate load module file for the flash area flash Imf describe as At this time symbol information of load module file for the boot area boot Imf is referred and link processing Is performed gt cx CF3746 Xflash_ext_table 0x200 Xflash boot 1lmf oflash lmf flashl asm flas
538. selected file with Explorer Add Shows the cascading menu to add files and category nodes to the project Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file type and add to the file to the project The file is added to the same level as the selected file The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a new category node at the same level as the selected file You can rename the category Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Remove from Project Removes the selected file from the project The file itself is not deleted from the file system Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Copy Copies the selected file to the clipboard When the file name is in editing the selected characters are copied to the clipboard This menu l avaye ceablod Rename You can rename the selected file The actual file is also renamed When the selected file is added to other project that file name is also changed Property Displays the selected
539. semble list file shown below is output C source file void main void a R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 92 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Assemble list file 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 _main F2 F2 end 00000000 _main 00000000 00000000 00000002 00000002 4001 ro r10 00000004 E3CF0000 4 F2 sp lp 00000008 6444 F2 sp 0000000A 1F18 lp 0000000C 0000000C 0000000C 2440 xl 0000000E 6108 rl sp 00000010 E3DF0000 st w lp 4 F2 sp 00000014 EE8B jbr L5 00000016 FUNC_ARG 00000016 F2 Set 00000016 A2 set 00000016 Ta Set 00000016 Item Description Number 1 Section attribute This is the section attribute of the section storing the code generated for the source program of the corre sponding line The section attributes and their meanings are as follows A Section occupying the memory W Section that can be written X Section that can be executed G Section allocated to the memory area that can be referenced by using global pointer gp and 16 bit displacement Location counter value This is the location counter value for the beginning of the code generated for the source program of the corresponding line This is the code machine language instruction or data generated for the source program of the corre sponding line Each byte is expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev
540. sing the ext_func control instruction or include directive when describing in C language 2 Prepare the startup routines Prepare the startup routines for the projects for both the boot area and flash area Each startup routine must perform the following processing Setting tp gp and ep values in the boot area Calling the _rcopy function to initialize the RAM area to be used for the boot area Branching from the boot area to the startup routine of the flash area Calling the _rcopy function to initialize the RAM area to be used for the flash area Moving to the processing of the flash area Remarks 1 If tp gp and ep are not used in the boot area the values may be set in the flash area If ROMization processing is not performed the _rcopy function call is not required 2 Use the same address values in the boot area and flash area for the tp gp and ep values These values may be different but in this case the values must be set each time control has been transferred between an instruction code in the boot area and one in the flash area 3 Prepare the link directive files Prepare link directive files for the projects for both the boot area and flash area Remark You can use the same link directive file with the boot area and flash area but since the description will become complicated it is recommended that the separate link directive file for each area is used 2 12 2 Set the boot area project 1 Create the boot area
541. source file categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Common Options tab Compile Options tab and Assemble Options tab When the settings are changed from these tabs the properties are displayed in boldface as Debug Information 1 2 Preprocess 3 Character Encoding 4 Output Code 5 Output File 6 Assemble List 7 Error Output 8 Warning Message 9 Others Remark This tab is displayed only when Yes in the Set individual assemble option property in the Build category from the Build Seitings tab is selected Figure A 18 Property Panel Individual Assemble Options Tab Property asm main asm Property El Debugintormaton Add debug information esz g El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Macro definition Macro detinition O Macro undefinitiori Macro undetinitian 0 Character Encodng Output Code Output File Assemble List Error Output Warming Message Others Add debug informabon Species Whether to generate the debug information Such information is generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option comesponds t R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 216 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE
542. specified for num differs depending on the hex format The range that can be specified for num are shown below for each hex format If the specified value is less than the minimum value a warning will be output and it is corrected to the default value If the specified value exceeds the maximum value a warning will be output and it is corrected to the maximum value An error will occur if O is specified Intel expanded 1 to 255 0x01 to OxFF 32 0x20 Intel expanded 32 bit address 1 to 255 0x01 to OxFF Motorola S type standard address 1 to 251 0x01 to OxFB Motorola S type 32 bit address 1 to 250 0x01 to OxFA O 0x50 Extended Tektronix 16 to 255 0x10 to OxFF 255 OxFF An error will occur if num is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Hex Output Options tab Specify maximum length of block record in the Hex Format category From the Hex Output Options tab Maximum length of block record in the Hex Format category Example of use To specify 255 as the maximum length of the block describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex block size 255 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 504 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_ offset This option specifies the offset of the address to be output Specification format Xhex offset num Interpretation when omitted It is regarded that the address to be
543. specified together with the Xhex_fill option Besides parameter start and size of the Xhex_fill option must be specified An error will occur if the Xhex_fill option and parameter start and size is omitted A warning will not be output even if parameter start and size of the Xhex_fill option exceeds the internal ROM area Example of use Not to use the information of the internal ROM area defined by the device file when the hex file is filled describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 405 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Multi core support specification The multi core suppor specification options are as follows Xmulti Xmulti_link Xmulti This option specifies the generation of a subprogram of a multi core program Specification format Xmulti type Interpretation when omitted A single core program is generated Detailed description This option specifies the subprogram type when generating a subprogram of a multi core program If this option is specified for a target that is not a multi core CPU a warning will be output and this option will be ignored The items that can be specified as type are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified Generates a program for core n The value that can be specified for nis an integer in the range of 1 to the number of cores on the target CPU An error will occur if
544. specify the Xcube_suite_info option at the same time 3 A symbol information file cannot be generated if linking is unsuccessful because it refers link time information Remark The size of each section can be specified by the Xsfg_size_tidata Xsfg_size_tidata_byte Xsfg_size_sidata Xsfg_size_sedata and Xsfg_size_sdata options See Information file output control for details about each option b Editing the symbol information file The symbol information file is a text format Therefore you can change the allocation information change the allocated sections by editing the file with a text editor or the like Edit the symbol information file if necessary R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 512 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Remark See 3 3 Symbol Information File for the format of the symbol information file c Referencing the symbol information file Specify the generated symbol information file using the Xsymbol_file option and then execute the cx command again Compiling is performed according to the contents of the specified symbol information file Example Compiling is performed according to the contents of symbol information file symbol sfg gt cx CF3746 Xsymbol file symbol sfg file c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 513 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 1 5 Optimization function This section explains
545. sting category node 3 Categories can be nested up to 20 levels You can classify files into the created category node by dragging and dropping the file 2 3 7 Change the file display order You can change the display order of the files and category nodes by the buttons on the project tree Figure 2 23 Toolbar Project Tree Panel a Tree ha Ca Build Tool oe VES0E2M Simulator Debug Tool P Program Analyzer Analyze Tool IHE OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool E a File E ral Build tool generated Files imej sample Irn hex sample hex H Startup c_ main c Select any of the buttons below on the toolbar of the Project Tree panel Sorts category nodes and files in order of their names EM Ascending order B Descending order laa Ascending order Sorts category nodes and files in order of their timestamp Bl Descending order tc Ascending order ae Descending order Displays category nodes and files in order of the user definition default You can change the display order of category nodes and files arbitrarily by dragging and dropping them R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 29 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 8 Update file dependencies When you perform a change changing include file paths adding the include statement of the header file to the C source file and assembler source file etc that effects the file dependencies in the compile option set
546. striction Up to 1022 characters External variable assigned to the r20 register Specify the external variables symbol name excluding _ assigned to the register This corresponds to the Xr20 option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 1022 characters External variable assigned to the r21 register Specify the external variables symbol name excluding _ assigned to the register This corresponds to the Xr21 option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 1022 characters External variable assigned to the r22 register Specify the external variables symbol name excluding _ assigned to the register This corresponds to the Xr22 option of the cx command How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 1022 characters External variable assigned to the r23 register Specify the external variables symbol name excluding _ assigned to the register This corresponds to the Xr23 option of the cx command This property is not displayed when 26 register mode Xreg_mode 26 in the Register mode property in the Register Mode category from the Common Options tab is selected How to change Directly enter in the text box Restriction Up to 1022 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 164 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE
547. sub stabi 4 DAproj STEN E subz WB subi CeiprojiSTel subs Bsubii D iprojiSTE a Per LA subi 28 D proj STki E subii El sample c D projiSTk subi 2 A subi4 Diiprojt STE E subz1 Ctmp sample S50E Co sample Defaulbuild sanple s Reading completed C sample c subi3 C Program Files WEC Electronics CubeSuiteCubes uitesPluging 3 tk dateot I subi4 Wibsizes2 tet Reading C Program FilesS WEC Electronics CubeSuite CubeS uitesPluginge Stk datt5t Wibsizes2 tet Reading completed For Help press Fl To exit the stack usage tracer from the Stack Usage Tracer window select File menu gt gt Exit skcx R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 88 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 18 2 Check the call relationship You can check the function call relationship in the tree display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window Figure 2 116 Tree Display Area main C stabi subi sub2 Gy subs C sub3i subii ey subii LJ subi ze ey subzi LJ sample c subi3 E subi4 Remark The table below shows the meaning of the icon displayed to the left of the string representing the function name The display priority for icons is from High E to Low L The function directly called by a given function with the largest total stack size Information additional margin recursion depth or callee functions has been modified via the Adjust Stack Size dialo
548. symbol The following characters can be used Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Build tool node and then select Create Link Directive File from the context menu R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 248 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Segment Section list area This area displays the device memory allocation information and a list of the currently configured segments and sections a Memory Name This area displays the names of the memory area segments and sections For the memory area the name of the corresponding memory area as shown below Is displayed Internal ROM Non Mapping Internal RAM DataFlash This item can be edited directly for the segments and sections If a segment name and section name is changed the value of Name in the Segment Section detail area is also changed Caution Some segment and section names in reserved sections cannot be edited See the remark of the Segment Section detail area for details b Start Address This area displays the start addresses of the memory area segments and sections This item can be edited directly for the segments and sections If the start address is changed the value of Start Address in the Segment Section de
549. t Xrompsec_data Xrompsec_text Xrompsec_ only Xromize_check_ off Xno_romize This option suppresses ROMization processing Specification format Xno_romize Interpretation when omitted ROMization processing is performed The following are linked ROMization area reservation code file except when specifying the Xno_stdlib option Startup routine cstart obj that contains copy function _rcopy call except when specifying the Xstartup or Xno_ startup option Detailed description This option suppresses ROMization processing The ROMization area reservation code file is not linked The startup routine cstartN obj that does not contain copy function _rcopy call is linked except when specifying the Xstartup or Xno_ startup option ROMization is a process whereby data that will be expanded in RAM is copied to ROM and a routine is added to copy this data from ROM into RAM when the application first starts If this option is specified in the application that does not have data with a default value the code can be reduced Example of use To suppress ROMization processing describe as gt cx CF3746 Xno_romize main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 389 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xrompcrt This option specifies the ROMization area reservation code file Specification format Xrompert file Interpret
550. t a warning and continue link processing if the result of address calculation of an unresolved external reference is illegal during relocation processing when linking describe as gt cx CF3746 Xignore address error main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 471 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Symbol multiple definition error output specification The symbol multiple definition error output specification option is as follows Xmultiple_ symbol Xmultiple_symbol This option outputs an error message for all multi defined external symbols Specification format Xmultiple symbol Interpretation when omitted An error message is output for the first multi defined external symbol and link processing is stopped Detailed description This option outputs an error message for all multi defined external symbols and file names and stops link processing This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Check all multi defined symbols in the Others category Example of use To output an error message for all multi defined external symbols and stop link processing describe as gt cx CF3746 Xmultiple symbol main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 472 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link time check suppress specification The link time check suppress speci
551. t file s settings and the values will be reproduced when the properties are displayed again Options are changed in accordance with the following rules Information about changes is displayed in the Output panel If you change from an older version to a newer version the option settings will be inherited and converted only if necessary If you change from a newer version to an older version only identical option settings will be inherited Options that only exist in the older version will be set to the default values Figure 2 2 Output Image of Information about Changed Options Difference information about project CX Vl 00 gt V1 10 Changes Available Compile Options Sort external variables No Available Compile Options Prohihbit the operation that changes memory access size Nol Available Build Settings Target core number Common Mmulti cmn Available Individual Compile Options Perform inline expansion of library Yes Available Individual Compile Options FProhibit the operation that changes memory access size No Available Individual Compile Options So0rt external variables Nol iy All Messages lt Rapid Build R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 15 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 Set Build Target Files Before running a build you must add the build target files such as C source file assembler source file to the project This sec
552. t flash re linking property is selected 0 hexadecimal number Directly enter in the text box 0 to FFFFFFFF hexadecimal number 9 Error Output The detailed information on the error output is displayed and the configuration can be changed Output error message Select whether to output the error message file file This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the cx command Error messages are displayed on the Output panel regardless of this property s How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xerror_file Outputs the error message file Does not output the error message file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 145 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Error message file output Specify the folder which the error message file is output folder If a relative path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder If an absolute path is specified the reference point of the path is the main project or subproject folder unless the drives are different The following macro name is available as an embedded macro BuildModeName Replaces with the build mode name If this is blank it is assumed that the project folder has been specified This corresponds to the Xerror_file option of the cx command This property is displayed only when Yes Xerror_file in the Output error message file property is selected
553. t of a file name An error will occur if two or more file names are specified When two or more files are specified as input use the I option An error will occur if the specified file including a parameter of an option does not exist However an error will not occur if the file specified as the parameter of the o option does not exist If the file specified by the parameter of the option does not exist a warning will be output and the processing of that file will be skipped Uppercase characters and lowercase characters are distinguished for options If the option that is not listed in Table B 15 Source Convert Options is specified the specified option will be ignored without displaying a warning 2 Content displayed in conversion results a Outline The overview of conversion results is output to the standard error output The output format is shown below file name result file name This is the image of command line specification result One of the following is displayed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 553 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE If a location requiring conversion is detected Converted total number numberAdeleted AnumberAinserted AnumberAchanged AnumberAinformation total number The total number of converted locations number The number of converted locations for each information type deletion insertion change and informatio
554. t option is not specified at the same time Xsfg_size_tidata_byte Xsfg_size_sidata Xsfg_size_sedata Xsfg_size_sdata If the P S or c option is specified at the same time the preprocessed file assembler source file or object module file oO If the O option is specified at the same time debug information may not be correct R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 510 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE B 1 4 Symbol information file The symbol information file is a text format file that allocation information for a variable global variable static variable in a file and static variable in a function and function defined in a C source file is described 1 Function related to symbol information file The cx provides the following two functions about the symbol information file Referencing the symbol information file It is possible to specify the allocation of variables from external files change the allocated section without editing the C source file by referencing the symbol information file when compiling The symbol information file to be referred can be edited and created by the user and it can be also generated by using the cx Generating the symbol information file The symbol information file that allocation information for a variable and function defined in the C source file is described is generated automatically You can edit the generated symbol information file i
555. t the build mode to be used during a build Note that this property is not applied to Reset All to Default from the context menu Default DefaultBuild How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction DefaultBuild Runs a build with the default build mode that is set when a new project is created Build mode that is added Runs a build with the build mode that is added to to the project other than the project other than DefaultBuild DefaultBuild 2 Output File Type and Path The detailed information on output file types and paths is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 137 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output file type Select the type of the file to be generated during a build The file type set here will be the debug target For other than the library project only Execute Module Load Module File Execute Module Non ROMized Load Module File and Execute Module Hex File are displayed For the library project only Library is displayed Default For other than the library project Execute Module Load Module File For the library project Library How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Execute Module Load Generates a load module file and hex file Module File during a build The load module file will be the debug target Execute Module Non Generates a load modu
556. t the extension _pen mf The following macro name is available as an embedded macro ProjectName Replaces with the project name This corresponds to the o option of the cx command Default ProjectName Imf How to change Directly enter in the text box Up to 259 characters 6 Frequently Used Options for Hex Output The detailed information on frequently used options during hex outputting is displayed and the configuration can be changed This category is not displayed for the library project Hex file format Select the format of the hex file to be output This corresponds to the Xhex_format option of the cx command Default Intel expanded hex format None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Intel expanded hex Specifies the Intel expanded hex format format None as the format of the hex file Intel expanded hex format 32 Specifies the Intel expanded hex format bit address Xhex_format i 32 bit address as the format of the hex file Motorola S type format standard Specifies the Motorola S type format address Xhex_format S standard address as the format of the hex file Motorola S type format 32 bit Specifies the Motorola S type format address Xhex_format s 32 bit address as the format of the hex file Expanded Tektronix hex format Specifies the expanded Tektronix hex Xhex_format T format as the format of the hex file The detailed information on register modes is d
557. table that has the branch instruction to the original branch destination is created at the address specified by this option The range that can be specified for address is Ox00000000 to OXxFFFFFFFF An abort error will occur if a value outside the range is specified If the specified value is less than 8 digits the higher digits will be filled with 0 If an odd value is specified as address it is corrected to an even number and then a warning will be output and processing will continued An error will occur if address is omitted address must be the same as the value that is used when the load module file for the boot area and flash area is generated An operation fault will occur if a different value is specified No error checking is done address must be within the ROM for the flash area No error checking is done because it is not possible to determine which area contains the specified address By specifying this option section ext_table that has a size of maximum ID value Note 1 entry size of branch table bytes and starts with address is automatically created when the load module file for the flash area is generated Although this section does not require an alignment specification in the link directive file you must leave enough space for alignment R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 478 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Note This is the value specified by
558. tail area is also changed c End Address This area displays the end addresses of the memory area A dash appears in segment and section rows d Button Add segment Adds a new segment directly below the row selected in the list The segment name is NewSegment_XXxX by default XXX 0 to 255 in decimal num bers Make detailed segment settings in Segment Section detail area This button is invalid when a section row is selected or when 256 segments have been registered to the list Add section Adds a new section directly below the row selected in the list The section name is NewSection_XXxX by default XXX 0 to 255 in decimal numbers Make detailed section settings in Segment Section detail area This button is invalid when 256 sections are registered in the list Delete Deletes the segment or section that is selected in the list If a segment is deleted the section included in the segment is also deleted This area has the following functions Expand collapse a row view You can expand collapse each low view by double clicking the row or clicking or at the beginning of the row R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 249 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Move a segment or section row You can move segment or section rows by dragging and dropping them Remark If a segment is moved the section included in the segment is also moved Copy a seg
559. te Inserts the contents of the clipboard directly below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project This menu is always disabled Property Displays this node s property on the Property panel 5 When a file is selected Compile Compiles the selected C source file Note that this menu is only displayed when a C source file except a non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 129 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Assemble Assembles the selected assembler source file Note that this menu is only displayed when an assembler source file except a non build target file is selected Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Open Opens the selected file with the application corresponds to the file extension see s Running the editor Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open with Internal Editor Opens the selected file with the Editor panel Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open with Selected Opens the Open with Program dialog box to open the selected file with the designated Application application Note that this menu is disabled when multiple files are selected Open Folder with Explorer Opens the folder that contains the
560. te Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 68 Message Dialog Box Question Q0 70300 7 Are you sure you want to set the curent assemble options to the individual assemble options Click Yes in the dialog box The Individual Assemble Options tab will be displayed Figure 2 69 Property Panel Individual Assemble Options Tab Property Sem man asm Property El Debug Informabon Add debug information fes g El Preprocess Additional include paths Additional include paths 0 Use whole include paths specified for build tool Yes Macro definition Macro detinition O Macro undefinitiori Macro undefinitiorn 0 Character Encoding Output Code Output File Assemble List Error Qutput arming Message Others Add debug informabon Species Whether to generate the debug information Such information i generated when debugging a program just like the case of wishing to perform source debugging with debugger This option comespornds t You can set assemble options for the assembler source file by setting the necessary properties in this tab Note that this tab takes over the settings of the Common Options tab and Compile Options tab Assemble Options tab by default except the properties shown below Additional include paths and Use whole include paths specified for build tool in the Preprocess category Object module file name in the Output File category R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENE
561. ted If a file name is specified on the command line the file will be regarded as the input file However in this case the o option must be specified If a file name is not specified on the command line nothing will be performed Detailed description This option specifies file as the list file that input file names and output file names are described The format of the list file is shown below tA cA input file nameAoutput file name The input and output file names that can be specified are the same as those that can be specified on the com mand line The rules for specification are also the same as for the command line If the input file does not exist a warning will be output and the processing of that file will be skipped If the c option is specified in the list file then if it differs from the c option and the parameter specified on the command line a warning will be displayed and the specification in the list file will be enabled Japanese character code is only allowed in the list file if it is encoded as UTF 8 with BOM Only CR LF is a valid line break code An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted If this option is specified the input file name specified on the command line will be ignored with displaying a warn Ing Example of use To specify list file io lst describe as gt cnv850 l io lst R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS
562. ted after assemble processing in the Others category From the Link Options tab Using libraries in the Library category and Commands executed before link processing Commands executed after link processing in the Others category From the ROMize Options tab Data sections included in rompsec section Text sections included in rompsec section in the Section category From the Hex Output Options tab Converted sections in the Hex Format category From the Create Library Options tab Commands executed before library generate processing Commands executed after library generate processing in the Others category From the Individual Compile Options tab Macro definition Macro undefinition in the Preprocess cate gory and Commands executed before compile processing Commands executed after compile processing in the Others category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Macro definition in the Preprocess category and Commands executed before assemble processing Commands executed after assemble processing in the Others cate gory From the File Information tab Memo in the Notes category From the Category Information tab Memo in the Notes category R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 239 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Text area Edit texts in multiple lines By default the cur
563. ted file type and add to the file to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file exten sion Add New Category Adds a new category node to the root of the File node This allows the category name to be changed The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as an existing category node Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 117 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Sets selected project or sub Sets the selected project or subproject to an active project project to an active project Close Project Closes the current project If the currently open project or file has been modified but it has not been saved yet a confirmation message is displayed to ask you whether you want to save it Save Project Saves the setting information of the current project to the project file Save Project As Opens the Save Project As dialog box to save the setting information of the cur rent project to the project file with another name Remove from Project Removes the selected project or subproject from the project The subproject files or the file themselves are not deleted from the file system Save Project and CubeSuite as Saves a set of the CubeSuite and the project by copying them in a folder Package b Build The Buil
564. tem Description Number Start of section allocation information of variable The compiler refers the section allocation information of variables described on the following line and beyond Section name and section size The name and size of the variable allocation section is output in the following format section name Size_decimal byte sizebytes This is output only when the Xsfg_opt option is specified Variable name This is the name of the global variable lf the number of references is 0 is prepended indicating that it is the unused variable Number of references This is the number of references of the global variable This is the byte size of the global variable Variable name This is the name of the static variable in the file If the number of references is 0 is prepended indicating that it is the unused variable Number of references This is the number of references of the static variable in the file This is the byte size of the static variable in the file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 98 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Number File name The name of the file in which the static variable is defined is output with its path Variable name This is the name of the static variable in the function If the number of references is 0 is prepended indicating that it is the unused variable Number of references This
565. termediate file output folder in the Output File Type and Path category Output folder in the Frequently Used Options for Link category Error message file output folder in the Error Output category and Temporary folder in the Others category From the Compile Options tab Output folder for assembler source file in the Output File category and Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category From the Link Options tab Output folder in the Output File category Output folder for link map file in the Link Map category and Output folder for symbol information file in the Symbol Information category From the Hex Output Options tab Output folder for hex file in the Output File category From the Create Library Options tab Output folder in the Output File category From the Individual Compile Options tab Output folder for assembler source file in the Output File category Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category and Error message file output folder in the Error Output category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Error message file output folder in the Error Output category R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 277 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Message area This area displays the message related to the folder to be selected in this dialog box
566. tes The frequency of function use is calculated as the number of references per byte from the number of references in the C source file and the size in bytes 2 See Information file output control for details about each option R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 511 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 3 How to use the symbol information file You must execute the cx command two times to generate a symbol information file using the cx and refer that file On the first execution a symbol information file is generated and on the second execution the symbol information file is referred Figure B 3 Flow of Processing Using Symbol Information File C source file OF Xsymbol_file specified b Symbol information file a Load module file etc The method for manipulating on the command line is shown below Remark See 2 13 Allocate Variables to Optimum Section for the method manipulating in CubeSuite a Generating the symbol information file Execute the cx command with the Xsfg option to generate the symbol information file Example Symbol information file symbol sfg is generated Cautions 1 Specify the Xsfg_opt option to output optimum allocation information for variables at the section level 2 The symbol information file is generated based on the static analysis result of the C source file Therefore when the Xsfg option is specified you need to
567. that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation Update Dependencies of active Updates the dependency of a file in the active project to build project Stop Build Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation Build Mode Settings Opens the Build Mode Settings dialog box to modify and add to the build mode Batch Build Opens the Batch Build dialog box to run a batch build Build Option List Lists the currently set build options in the Output panel R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 118 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Toolbar The buttons used in build process are displayed a Build toolbar Build tooloar shows buttons used in build process Runs a build of the project A build of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Runs a rebuild of the project A rebuild of a subproject is also run when it is added in the project Note that this button is disabled when the build tool is in operation Cancels the build rebuild batch build and clean operation 3 Panel display area The following panels are displayed in this area Project Tree panel Property panel Editor panel Output panel See the each panel section for details of the contents of the display R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 119 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 A
568. that this option is specified identically for all source files in the given application Example of use To output the CubeSuite information file as file name info cref describe as SCX CES746 Xcube suite anfo inio crer main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 410 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xno_cube_suite_info This option suppresses the output of the CubeSuite information file Specification format Xno_ cube suite info Interpretation when omitted If the Xcube_suite_info option is specified then the CubeSuite information file will be output If the Xcube_suite_info option is not specified then the CubeSuite information file will not be output Detailed description If this option and the Xcube_suite_info option are specified at the same time the Xcube_suite_info option will be invalid regardless of the order in which they are specified If the file specified by the Xcube_suite_info option exists then it will be deleted The Xcube_suite_info option is always added when started from CubeSuite Specify this option if you want to suppress the addition e g to soeed up compilation If this option is specified then some of the CubeSuite functions will not be available Example of use To suppress the output of the CubeSuite information file describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 411 of 577 Oct 01 2010 Cu
569. the boot area is an offset from ___ext_table_head and obtains the address of _func_flashO and jumps to the function body by the jarl instruction b Prepare the startup routines Prepare startup routines for both the boot area and flash area Each startup routine must perform the following processing Setting tp gp and ep values in the boot area Calling the _rcopy function to initialize the RAM area to be used for the boot area R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 521 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Branching from the boot area to the startup routine of the flash area Calling the _rcopy function to initialize the RAM area to be used for the flash area Moving to the processing of the flash area Remarks 1 If tp gp and ep are not used in the boot area the values may be set in the flash area If ROMization processing is not performed the _rcopy function call is not required 2 Use the same address values in the boot area and flash area for the tp gp and ep values These values may be different but in this case the values must be set each time control has been transferred between an instruction code in the boot area and one in the flash area c Prepare the link directive files Prepare link directive files for the projects for both the boot area and flash area The following points should be noted when describing a link directive file Even if the address of a section placed
570. the optimization function that the cx executes The target of optimization is a C source file 1 Outline The cx performs optimization for the following two purposes Faster execution speed speeding code generation Reduction of the object size reducing the ROM RAM capacity that the generated codes use Although most optimization items improve both of the above some optimizations improve one at the expense of the other e g it might increase execution speed while increasing ROM size Additionally some optimizations will complicate the correspondence between C source lines and machine language instructions This will make debugging harder because it could prevent break points from being set or cause a variable s value to be referred or set in a location different from the location in the C source Therefore the cx provides the following four optimization levels Table B 9 Optimization Level Debug precedence Regards debugging as important and suppresses all optimization including default optimization Default Performs optimization that debugging is not affected optimization of expressions and register allocation and the like Object size precedence Regards reducing the ROM RAM capacity as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general programs Execution speed precedence Regards shortening the execution speed as important and performs the maximum optimization that is effective for general pr
571. the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after assemble processing after assemble The following macro names are available as embedded macros processing ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be assembled AssembledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under assembling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of the assemble option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the assemble option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the assemble options group Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of
572. ther than const or sconst sequentially starting from the largest alignment size describe as gt cx CF3746 Xsort var main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 347 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xinline_strcpy This option performs inline expansion of standard library functions strcpy strcmp memcpy and memset calls Specification format Xinline_strcpy Interpretation when omitted Inline expansion of standard library functions strcpy stremp memcpy and memset calls is not performed Detailed description This option performs inline expansion of standard library functions strcpy strcmp memcpy and memset calls This option can not be specified together with the Xpack option Inline expansion of strcpy is performed only when the second argument is a character string If this option is specified arrays and character strings are allocated automatically to 4 byte boundary area This improves the execution speed of the program to be generated but it increases the code size This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Perform inline expansion of strcpy stremp memcpy memset in the Optimization Details category From the Individual Compile Options tab Perform inline expansion of strcpy stremp memcpy memsel in the Optimization Details category Example of use
573. this file File Information Description of each category 1 Build The detailed information on the build is displayed and the configuration can be changed Set as build target Select whether to run a build of the selected file Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Runs a build of the selected file Does not run a build of the selected file CENESAS Page 199 of 577 Oct 01 2010 R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Set individual compile Select whether to set the compile option that differs from the project settings to the selected C option source file This property is displayed only when a C source file is selected on the project tree and Yes in the Set as build target property from this tab is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Sets the option that differs from the project settings to the selected C source file Does not set the option that differs from the project settings to the selected C source file Set individual assemble Select whether to set the assemble option that differs from the project settings to the selected option assembler source file This property is displayed only when the assembler source file is selected on the project tree and Yes in the Set as build target property from this tab is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes
574. tings or assemble option settings you must update the dependencies of the relevant files Updating file dependencies is performed for the entire project main project and subprojects or active project 1 For the entire project From the Build menu select Update Dependencies Figure 2 24 Update Dependencies Item fq Build Project F7 Ge Rebuild Project Shift F7 Td Clean Project El Build sample t Rebuild sample sa Clean sample my Update Dependencies of sample A fy Ly Build Mode Settings El Batch Build Li Build option List 2 For the active project From the Build menu select Update Dependencies of active project R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 30 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark saved Cautions 1 Figure 2 25 Update Dependencies of active project Item T Build Project i Rebuild Project td Clean Project Rapid Build 22 Update Dependencies E Build sample t Rebuild sample a Clean sample mH Update Dependencies of sample amp oe Le Build Mode Settings EL Batch Build DP Build Option List Fy Shift F7 If there are files being edited with the Editor panel when updating file dependencies then all these files are During checking of dependence relationships of include files with CubeSuite condition statements such as if and comments are ignored Therefore include files not required
575. tion registered to the project it is passed during link library processing STDLIBS Relative paths from the project of standard Passed to link and library processing commands e g I option library files it is passed during link library processing Used in cases that cannot be expressed by LIBS only via the command line format Remark If simultaneous build is enabled then the OBJS and OBJS_ core number macros will also include the sources that are the targets of simultaneous compilation assembly R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 87 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 18 Using Stack Usage Tracer The stack usage tracer performs a static analysis and displays the functions called by a function in a tree format as well as stack information for each function function name total stack size frame size additional margin and file name in list format 2 18 1 Starting and exiting To start the stack usage tracer from the Main window select the Tool menu gt gt Startup Stack Usage Tracer After the stack usage tracer finishes starting up it will display the function call relationship and stack information for each function in the tree display area list display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window Figure 2 115 Starting Up Stack Usage Tracer el sample Stack Usage Tracer File View Option Help P E main Total Stack Size Additional Margin 4 i H stabi i main D proji STKE E
576. tion that changes memory access size Select whether to prohibit replacing the load and store instructions with 1 bit manipulation instructions set1 clr1 tst1 and not1 This corresponds to the Xkeep_access_ size option of the cx command Default Configuration of the compile option How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Prohibits replacing the load and store Xkeep_access_ size instructions with 1 bit manipulation instructions 1 bit manipulation instructions may be generated instead of load and store instructions Perform inline expansion of library Specify whether to perform inline expansion at the location calling library functions This corresponds to the Xcall_ lib option of the cx command This property is displayed only for the project using a device with the V850E2V3 architecture How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Y Generates a sqrtf s instruction instead of a call to the sartf function es No Xcall_ lib Always generates a call to the sqrtf function R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 205 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Preprocess The detailed information on preprocessing is displayed and the configuration can be changed Additional include paths Use whole include paths specified for build tool Macro definition Specify the additional include paths during compiling The fo
577. tion List 2 When running a clean of the active project Select the project and then select Clean active project from the context menu Figure 2 113 Clean active project Item a Lis EENE JE upo7oFa504 l Build sample A Pin Configur Rebuild sample cals mals p Clean sample 4 A850 Build cas YESOEZM Si Open Folder with Explorer ey Program Ana a OB Prograr a File FE Save Project and CubeSuite as Package Add E ob Rename R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 85 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 Output Information to Create a Makefile You can obtain information for creating a Makefile from the current project and output it to a file You can also use the output file as a Makefile by customizing it On the project tree select the Build tool node and then select Output Makefile Information File from the context menu The Output Makefile Information File dialog box opens Figure 2 114 Output Makefile Information File Dialog Box Output Makefile Information File Save in CO sample er CO Def aultBuild My Recent Documents me Ey Desktop Mu Documents My Computer amp File name Makefile bat hal Miu Metwork Save as lype Test file txt In the dialog box specify the file to be output and then click the Save button Remarks 1 The file is output into the project folder with name Makefile txt by default
578. tion explains operations on setting files in the project 2 3 1 Set a startup routine 1 Using the standard startup routine Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel To use the standard startup routine object module file provided with CX select Yes in the Use standard startup routine property in the Input File category Figure 2 3 Use standard startup routine Property El Input File Remark In the Output ROMized load module file property in the Output File category from the ROMize Options tab cstart obj is linked when Yes is selected and cstartN obj is linked when No Xno_romize is selected 2 Using other than the standard startup routine Select the build tool node on the project tree and select the Link Options tab on the Property panel To use other than the standard startup routine select No Xno_startup in the Use standard startup routine property in the Input File category default Yes Figure 2 4 Use standard startup routine Property El Input File Use standard startup routine Hol Ano_ startup Next add the startup file the file that the startup routine is described to the Startup node on the project tree Remark See 2 3 3 Add a file to a project for the method of adding the file to the project tree R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CE NESAS Page 16 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 5
579. tion name 2 Ifthe callee function is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name 3 Ifthe callee function includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an amper sand amp is appended to the end of the function name 4 Ifthe callee function is a static function then file name is appended to the end of the func tion name 5 Functions added intentionally from All Functions by clicking the Add button are shown with a plus sign appended to the end of the function name R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 299 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b All Functions Display a list of functions that can be added as functions called by the selected function callee functions This area generally displays functions that can be added in the following format function name total stack size frame size additional margin Remarks 1 If the function that can be added is written in assembly language or it is a system library func tion then the underscore _ pre appended to the symbol name is deleted and the name is surrounded by square brackets this is displayed as the function name 2 Ifthe function that can be added is a recursive function then an asterisk is appended to the end of the function name 3 Ifthe function that can be added includes functions called indirectly using function pointers then an
580. tion size 0x4 The start address of the programmable peripheral I O register area which is the BPC value shifted a preset number of bits is stored in the bpc section Example Ifthe BPC value is specified as 0x1234 when using the V850E IA1 the start address of the programmable peripheral I O register area is the value shifted 14 bits to the left or 0x48d0000 In this case the information in the bpc section is as follows bpe Address 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 ox00000000 00 00 8d The processing above is performed without question when generating a relocatable object module file and when generating an executable object module file The bpc section is a special reserved section for information and is never loaded into memory Therefore it need not be specified in a link directive like a normal section R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 531 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE 8 Debug information When displaying debug information for types specified with a different name via typedef the original type may not match the type described in the source file it will be a different type with the same size and signed unsigned specification If the original type is unsigned or unsigned int then it will be unsigned long Example typedef unsigned int UI In the debug information the original type in UI will be unsigned long If the original type is signed signed
581. tions tab on the Property panel Select the file type in the Output file type property in the Output File Type and Path category Figure 2 26 Output file type Property Intermediate file output folder ZB uUildM ode anes 1 When Execute Module Load Module File is selected Default The load module file non ROMized and hex file are generated The load module file will be the debug target The ROMized load module file will be the debug target when Yes in the Output ROMized load module file property in the Output File category from the ROMize Options tab category is selected 2 When Execute Module Non ROMized Load Module File is selected The load module file non ROMized ROMized load module file and hex file are generated The load module file non ROMized will be the debug target Remark This item is displayed only when Yes in the Output ROMized load module file property and Yes in the Output Non ROMized load module file property in the Output File category from the ROMize Options tab is selected 3 When Execute Module Hex File is selected The load module file non ROMized and hex file are generated The hex file will be the debug target Caution For the library project this property is always Library and cannot be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 33 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 1 Change the output file name The names of t
582. to Each enumerated type is treated as the smallest integer type capable of expressing all the enumerators in that type An error will occur if string is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Enumeration type in the C Language category Example of use To treat each enumerated type as the smallest integer type capable of expressing all the enumerators in that type describe as gt cx CF3746 Xenum_type schar main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 340 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xdef_var This option handles tentative definition of variables as definition Specification format Interpretation when omitted Tentative definition of variables is not handled as definition Detailed description This option handles tentative definition of variables as definition This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab Treat tentative definition as definition in the C Language category Example of use To handle tentative definition of variables as definition describe as gt CX CF3746 Xdel Var main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 341 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Variable information specification The variable information specification option is as follows
583. to change Select from the drop down list O Restriction Yes Xdiv Generates the div and divu instructions for division Generates the divq and divqu instructions for division R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 160 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Use 32 bit branch Select whether to use the far jump function for the jarl and jr instructions instruction By using the far jump function it is assumed that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and assembling is performed This corresponds to the Xasm_far_jump V850E2 V850E2V3 option of the cx command This property is displayed only when the project uses a device with the V850E2 core and V850E2V3 architecture and when Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xasm_far_jump Assumes that the jarl and jr instructions are jarl32 and jr32 instructions and performs assembling Performs assembly as a jarl or jr instruction Far Jump file names Specify the Far Jump file name The Far Jump file outputs the code that uses the jmp instruction V850E ES core or jarl32 and jr32 instruction V850E2 core or V850E2V3 architecture for branch instructions of functions described in the file The cx command outputs an error if the function is in a range that cannot be branch
584. to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Check register mode in the Others category Example of use To output detailed information when different register modes are mixed for all input object module files describe as gt cx CF3746 xXregmode into filel obj file2 obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 467 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Specify checking for mixing of device common objects The option specifies checking for mixing of device common objects is as follows Xcommon Xcommon This option checks for mixing of the device common object module file to be generated and the device specified by the C option Specification format Xcommon series Interpretation when omitted Linking is performed in accordance with the specification of the C option Detailed description This option checks whether common magic number series specified as the compile option or assemble option and the series number of the device specified by the C option are mixed The items that can be specified as series are shown below An error will occur if any other item is specified It is possible to link to the model with the instruction set architecture superior to V850E V850E V850E2 or V850E2V3 which is specified as the target device v850e2 It is possible to link to the model with the instruction set architecture superior to V
585. to the hex file overflow overflows from the internal ROM area This corresponds to the Xhex_rom_less option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Displays the warning message when the area to be converted to the hex file overflows from the internal ROM area No Does not display the warning message when the area to be converted to the hex file overflows from the internal ROM area If this item is specified the Start address property and Size property must be specified Xhex_rom_less R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 194 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Create Library Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on the create library phase categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 Output File 2 Message 3 Others Caution This tab is displayed for the library project Figure A 10 Property Panel Create Library Options Tab Property A Le Property El Output File Output folder 2B UildModeN amez Output file name lb FrojectN ame lib Message Others Output folder Specifies the folder to which the generated library are sawed This option corresponds to the q key of the lb cornmand Common Options Compile Options Description of each category 1 Output File The detailed information on output files is displayed and the configur
586. to the project and the property of the project component are changed the project name is followed by and is displayed in boldface The boldface is canceled when the project is saved The project that has not been changed E sample Project The project that has been changed E sample Project R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 125 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE r Highlighting the active project The active project is underlined Non active project E sample Project Active project E sample Project s Running the editor The file with the specific extension is opened in the Editor panel When an external editor is set to be used in the Option dialog box the file is opened with the external editor that has been set Other files are opened with the applications associated by the host OS Caution The file with the extension that is not associated with the host OS is not displayed You can open the editor by one of the following procedures Double click the file Select a file and then select Open from the context menu Select a file and then press the Enter key The files that can be opened with the Editor panel are shown below C source file c Assembler source file asm s Header file h inc Symbol information file sfg Link directive file dir dr Link map file map Hex file hex Text file txt Remark You
587. tree b Run a build of the project Run a build of the project The symbol information file is generated And then it is inputted into CX automatically and a rebuild is executed again Remarks 1 The symbol information file in a Set the generation of the symbol information file is overwritten by running a build 2 Since the objects are generated anew using the symbol information file the second build will be a rebuild If the build completes successfully the load module file is generated with the variables allocated R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 62 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 79 Project Tree Panel After Generating Load Module File Project Tree sample Proecty MS uPDFOFS506 Microcontroller A Pin Configurator Design Tool H H Code Generator Design Tool A CX Build Tool ce YESOESM Simulator Debug Tool ey Program Analyzer Analyze Tool JME OB Programmer Flash Programming Tool lh File tl Build tool generated files mi cample Inf i hex sample hex zi Startup c main c 5f sample stg LLEI 2 Editing and using the auto generated symbol information file Users can edit the symbol information file Below is the procedure for editing the generated symbol information file in 1 Generating the symbol information file automatically and relocating the variables by the user and referring that file to allocate variables a
588. ts files and category nodes to the project Add Subproject Opens the Add Existing Subproject dialog box to add the selected subproject to the project The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add New Subproject Opens the Create Project dialog box to add the created subproject to the project The subproject cannot be added to another subproject Add File Opens the Add Existing File dialog box to add the selected file to the project Add New File Opens the Add File dialog box to create a file with the selected file tyoe and add to the file to the project The added file can be opened with the application corresponds to the file extension Add New Category Adds a category node directly below the File node This allows the category name to be changed Up to 200 characters can be specified The default category name is New category You can also add a category node with the same name as the existing category node This menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation and when categories are nested 20 levels Set selected subproject as Sets the selected subproject to the active project Active Project Remove from Project Removes the selected subproject from the project The subproject file itself is not deleted from the file system When the selected subproject is the active project it cannot be removed from the project Note that this menu is disabled when the build tool is in operation
589. ttons How to open In the Link Directive File Generation dialog box select a section in the Segment Section list area and then click the button on Object file name in the Segment Section detail area Description of each area 1 Object file list area This area displays a list of object files and library files added to the project that opened the Link Directive File Gen eration dialog box and the sections that specify them in the Link Directive File Generation dialog box a Object File This area displays the following file name list Select files to set to Object file name in the Segment Section detail area in the Link Directive File Genera tion dialog box that opened this dialog box via check boxes The object module files generated from the source files added to the project The object module files added directly to the project tree The library files added directly to the project tree Remarks 1 Move the mouse cursor over a file name to display a tooltip with the absolute path of that file R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 257 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Inthe Link Directive File Generation dialog box that opened this dialog box in the Segment Section detail area if an object file is already set in Object file name the check box for that object file will be selected by default b Section This area displays the section th
590. ty in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Add debug information in the Debug Information category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Add debug information in the Debug Information category Example of use To output information for source debugging to the output file describe as gt cx CF3746 g main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 431 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Device specification The device specification options are as follows C Xcommon Xdev_path C This option specifies the target device Specification format Interpretation when omitted If the Xcommon option is specified the behavior is in accordance with that specification Otherwise an error will occur except when specifying the V h or P option An error will occur when linking is performed Detailed description This option specifies the target device See the user s manual of each device file about device types that can be specified as device If device does not exist the corresponding device file does not exist an error will occur An error will occur if device is omitted This option cannot be omitted when linking is performed Example of use To specify UPD70F3746 as the target device describe as gt cx CF3746 main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 432 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 4
591. type format 32 address Xhex_format s Expanded Tektronix hex format Xhex_format T bit address as the format of the hex file Specifies the expanded Tektronix hex format as the format of the hex file Specify converted address range Select whether to specify the address range to be converted to the hex file This corresponds to the Xhex_fill option of the cx command This property is not displayed when Expanded Tektronix hex format Xhex_format T in the Hex file format property is selected How to change Select from the drop down list Yes Xhex_fill Specifies the address range to be converted to the hex file No Does not specify the address range to be converted to the hex file Filling value Specify the filling value of the unused areas under the case of converting to the hex file If this is blank it is assumed that FF hexadecimal number has been specified This corresponds to the Xhex_fill option of the cx command This property is not displayed when Expanded Tektronix hex format Xhex_format T in the Hex file format property is selected and No in the Specify converted address range property is selected Default FFFF hexadecimal number How to change Directly enter in the text box 00 to FFFF 2 or 4 digit hexadecimal number Specify the start address of the area to be converted to the hex file Start address If this property is specified the Size property must be speci
592. ub1 1 4 4 main5 6 4 stab 4 4 sub 52 424 sub1 1 4 4 sub 28 5 4 sample cHsubl 4 4 sub 44 4 sube 1 42 1 40 subs 1 4 4 sub3 8 3 subs 4 4 After setting Additional Margin Recursion Depth and Callee Functions click the OK button 2 Using a stack size specification file Below is the procedure for using a stack size specification file Create a stack size specification file Write the functions in the stack size specification file that you would like to set dynamically using the following format function name ADD additional margin RECTIME recursion depth CALL callee function Set the frame size of function flib written in assembly language to 50 flib ADD 50 Set the frame size of function sub2 written in C to 100 sub2 ADD 100 Set the recursion depth of recursive function sub3 written in C to 123 sub3 RECTIME 123 From the Stack Usage Tracer window select File menu gt gt Load Stack Size Specification File The Open dialog box opens Specify the stack size specification file then click Open R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 91 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS This chapter explains the format and other aspects of files output by a build via CX 3 1 Assemble List File This section explains the assemble list file The assemble list is the list form
593. ue value of align holes between sections of the load module file to be generated The range that can be specified for value is Ox0000 to OxFFFF An abort error will occur if a value outside the range is specified If the specified value is less than 4 digits the higher digits will be filled with 0 An error will occur if value is omitted When this option is specified linking must be performed in the 2 pass mode by specifying the Xtwo_path_link option An error will occur if the Xtwo_path_link option is not specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Filling value of holes in the Others category Example of use To specify OxFFFF as the filling value of align holes between sections of the load module file to be generated describe as gt cx CF3746 Xalign fill OxFFFF Xtwo_path_ link main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 475 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Library file rescan specification The library file rescan specification option is as follows Xrescan Xrescan This option rescans the library file specified by the lI option Specification format Xrescan Interpretation when omitted The library file specified by the I option is not rescanned Detailed description This option rescans the library file specified by the l option When this option is specified
594. uite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xrompsec_text This option specifies the text section included in the rompsec section Specification format Xrompsec_text section section Interpretation when omitted Each section allocated to the internal instruction RAM is included in the rompsec section Detailed description This option specifies the text section included in the rompsec section The contents of section section and the corresponding address and size information are included in the rompsec section This option is related to the section with the text or const attribute The section that can be specified as section is the section with the text or const attribute If the section that has any other attribute is specified a warning will be output and processing will be stopped If section does not exist in the load module file an error will be output and processing will be stopped section cannot include a space An error will occur if section is omitted If this option is specified more than once the section will be included in the rompsec section in the order which they are specified If the particular section is specified by using this option for the input file linked specifying the device file with the internal instruction RAM the section that is not specified and is allocated to internal instruction RAM will not be included in the rompsec section and also be deleted from the output
595. uivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Additional library paths in the Frequently Used Options for Link category From the Link Options tab Additional library paths in the Library category From the Link Options tab System library paths in the Library category Note CubeSuite install folderCubesuite CX V x xx lib 850e Example of use To search libraries from folder lib the standard folder in that order describe as gt cx CF3746 Llib main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 459 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xno_stdlib This option suppresses linking the standard library Specification format Interpretation when omitted The standard library is linked Detailed description This option does not link the standard library This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Link standard library in the Library category Example of use Not to link the standard library describe as gt CX CF3746 xXno stdlib main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 460 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Link directive file specification The link directive file specification option is as follows Xlink_ directive Xlink_directive This option specifies the link directive file
596. umber information and global pointer table have been removed describe as gt cx CF3746 Xstrip main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 477 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Boot flash re link function control The boot flash re link function control options are as follows Xflash_ext_table Xflash Xflash_ext_table This option specifies the start address value of the branch table for the boot flash re link function Specification format Xflash_ext_table address Interpretation when omitted The load module file for the boot flash re link function is not generated and normal link processing is performed Detailed description This option generates the load module file for the boot flash re link function using address address as the start address value of the branch table See B 1 6 Booi flash re link function for details about the boot flash re link function Specify generating the load module file for the boot area or flash area depending on whether the Xflash option is specified When the load module file for the boot area is generated when the Xflash option is not specified The branch to the flash area is processed At this time the process is the branch to the branch table that is created at the address specified by this option When the load module file for the flash area is generated when the Xflash option is specified The branch
597. umbers as num num1 and num2 If the error number that does not exist it will be ignored An error will occur if num or num1 and num7 is omitted If num1 num2 is specified it is assumed that error numbers within the range have been specified The error number specified by this option is the rightmost 5 digits of the 7 digit number following the W See CubeSuite Message for error numbers Example of use To suppress outputting warning message W0566002 describe as gt cx CF3746 Xno_ waning 66002 main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 487 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Phase individual option specification The phase individual option specification option is as follows Xlk_option Xlk_option This option specifies the file to be linked Specification format Xlk option filei file2 Interpretation when omitted Only obj lib and Imf are recognized as the link target Detailed description This option specifies so that a file that is not recognized as a link target a file other than obj lib and Imf is the link target Specify the file to be linked as file An error will occur if file does not exist An error will occur if file is omitted Example of use To link file link test describe as gt cx CF3746 Xlk option link test R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 488 of 577 Oct
598. umerators in that type Treat tentative definition Select whether to treat tentative definitions of variables as definitions as definition This corresponds to the Xdef_var option of the cx command How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction Yes Xdef_var Handles tentative definition of variables as definition No Does not handle tentative definition of variables as definition 6 Character Encoding The detailed information on character encoding is displayed and the configuration can be changed R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 157 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Character encoding Select the character code to be used for Japanese Chinese comments and character strings in the source file This corresponds to the Xcharacter_set option of the cx command Default SJIS None How to change Select from the drop down list Restriction SJIS None Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as SJIS EUC Xcharacter_set euc_jp Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as EUC UF T 8 Xcharacter_set utf8 Interprets the Japanese character code in the source file as UFT 8 Big5 Xcharacter_set big5 Interprets the Chinese character code in the source file as Traditional Chinese GB2312 Interprets the Chinese character code in Xcharacter_set gb2312 the source file as Simplified Chinese No process Does not process t
599. urce file is specified as input If another type of file is specified then if a necessary file is not specified and there are remaining unresolved gp ep or tp relative symbol references then an error will occur during linking If this option is specified together with the Xmulti option an error will occur Example of use To link multi core subprograms pe1 Imf pe2 lmf and cmn mf describe as scx CF3515 xAmulti link pel lmft pe2 lmf cmn lmf otarget lmf lmulti lib R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 484 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error output control The error output control option is as follows Xerror_file Xerror_file This option outputs error messages to a file Specification format Xerror file file Interpretation when omitted Error messages are output to only the standard error output Detailed description This option outputs error messages to the standard error output and file file If file already exists it will be overwritten An error will occur if file is omitted Example of use To output error messages to the standard error output and file err describe as gt cx CF3746 Xerror file err main obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 485 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Warning message output control The warning message output control options are as fol
600. use To save the object module file generated during compilation with sample obj as a file name describe as scx CF3746 Xob path sample ob main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 318 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xasm_path This option specifies where an assembler source file generated during compilation is to be saved Specification format Xasm_path path Interpretation when omitted An assembler source file will not be output except when specifying the S option Detailed description This option saves the assembler source file generated during compilation to path If an existing file is specified as path If one assembler source file is output it will be saved with path as the file name lf two or more assembler source files are output an error will occur If an existing folder is specified as path The assembler source file is saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by asm to path If the specified folder or file as path does not exist An error will occur If path is omitted The assembler source file is saved under the C source file name with the extension replaced by asm to the current folder If two or more files with the same name even if they are in different folders are specified as source files then a warning is output and an assembler source file is only saved for the last source file to be spe
601. ute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lInputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of the compile option How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Other additional options Input the compile option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the compile options group Default When Yes in the Build simultaneously property in the Build Method category from the Common Options tab is selected Blank Other than above Configuration of the compile option How to change Directly enter in the text box or edit by the Character String Input dialog box which appears when clicking the button Up to 259 characters R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 215 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Individual Assemble Options tab This tab shows the detailed information on an assemble
602. utomatically Therefore you need to assign the value as sym explicitly by using an assignment statement or set the value to rsym in the startup routine This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Compile Options tab External variable assigned to the r15 register in the External Variable Register category From the Compile Options tab External variable assigned to the r16 register in the External Variable Register category From the Compile Options tab External variable assigned to the r17 register in the External Variable Register category From the Compile Options tab External variable assigned to the r18 register in the External Variable Register category From the Compile Options tab External variable assigned to the r19 register in the External Variable Register category R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 355 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE From the Compile Options tab External variable assigned to the r20 register in the External Variable Register category From the Compile Options tab External variable assigned to the r21 register in the External Variable Register category From the Compile Options tab External variable assigned to the r22 register in the External Variable Register category From the Compile Options tab External variable assigned to the r23 register in the External Vari
603. value with one macro name per line The defined value part can be omitted and in this case 1 is used as the defined value This corresponds to the D option of the cx command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro definition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2010 CENESAS Page 168 of 577 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Macro undefinition Specify the macro name to be undefined Specify in the format of macro name with one macro name per line This corresponds to the U option of the cx command The specified macro is displayed as the subproperty Default Macro undefinition number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 256 characters Up to 256 items can be specified 3 Character Encoding The detailed information on character encoding is displayed and the configuration can be changed Character encoding Select the character code to be used for Japanese comments and character strings in the source file This corresponds to the Xcharacte
604. void int a Valid within function addressl a is used only within the range from addressl to address2 address2 In the above example the scope of a is the entire function f However use of a is limited to section between address1 and address2 In this case if a is allocated to a register and optimization causes it to be deleted from the stack frame a will become invisible outside of the section between address1 and address2 This phenomenon occurs in order to make more efficient use of registers by making the register where a has been allocated except for the section between address1 and address2 available for the allocation of other variables During compilation the processing of debug information uses a large amount of memory and therefore can cause an out of memory condition to occur Sections that have been performed inline expansion are treated as a single unit and cannot be stepped into When a variable value is referenced a temporary value from an ongoing calculation may be obtained instead of the correct value If part of an array structure elements or pointer variables of user defined types is allocated to registers then variable display and editing on the Watch panel and the like of the debug tool will be illegal 3 Caution about optimization The Caution about optimization is shown below Optimization and register allocation are not performed across assemble
605. when linking is performed Detailed description This option specifies the target device See the user s manual of each device file about device types that can be specified as device If device does not exist the corresponding device file does not exist an error will occur An error will occur if device is omitted This option cannot be omitted when linking is performed Example of use To specify UPD70F3746 as the target device describe as gt cx CF3746 main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 325 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xcommon This option specifies that an object module file common to the various devices is generated Specification format Xcommon series Interpretation when omitted If the C option is specified the behavior is in accordance with that specification Otherwise an error will occur Detailed description This option specifies that an object module file common to the various devices is generated When this option is specified only instructions are used in the instruction set architecture of the target and common magic number series that supports the instruction set architecture is embed into the object module file The items that can be specified as series are shown below An abort error will occur if any other item is specified v850e It is possible to link to the model with the instruction set architectu
606. will occur if num is omitted This option is valid only when the Xsfg_opt option is specified If the Xsfg_opt option is not specified this option will be ignored This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Size of sdata section in the Symbol Information category Example of use To calculate the frequency of variable use limiting the size of variables allocated to the sdata section to 32768 bytes describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 418 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Error output control The error output control options are as follows Xerror_file Xerror_file This option outputs error messages to a file Specification format Xerror file file Interpretation when omitted Error messages are output to only the standard error output Detailed description This option outputs error messages to the standard error output and file file If file already exists it will be overwritten An error will occur if file is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Output error message file in the Error Output category From the Common Options tab Error message file output folder in the Error Output category From the Common Options tab Error message file name in the Error Output category From the
607. wing property and then click the button From the Common Options tab Boot area load module file name in the Flash Correspondence category Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 279 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Select the name of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from Boot area load module file Imf Boot area load module file default All Files All the formats Function buttons Sets the designated file to the area that this dialog box is called from R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 280 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify Far Jump File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the Far Jump file and set it to the area that this dialog box is called from Figure A 45 Specify Far Jump File Dialog Box Specify Far Jump File 0 ikin 20 e m My Recent Documents My Documenta 95 My Computer 4 iho Hetero iles of t
608. with the same name even if they are in different folders are specified as source files then a warning is output and an assemble list file is only saved for the last source file to be specified This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Assemble Options tab Output assemble list file in the Assemble List category From the Assemble Options tab Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Output assemble list file in the Assemble List category From the Individual Assemble Options tab Output folder for assemble list file in the Assemble List category Example of use To save the assemble list file that is output when assembling with sample prn as a file name describe as gt cx CF3746 Xprn_ path sample prn main asm R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 430 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Source debugging control The source debugging control options are as follows g g This option outputs information for source debugging Specification format Interpretation when omitted Information for source debugging will not be output Detailed description This option outputs information for source debugging to the output file Source debugging can be performed by specifying this option This option is equivalent to the following proper
609. ws Detailed description This option outputs a warning and continues link processing when the internal ROM RAM overflows The output file is not generated The excess of the size is output to the standard error output Example of use To output a warning and continue link processing when the internal ROM RAM overflows describe as gt ox CF3746 xXforce link main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS Page 377 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xsdata_info This option outputs information that can be used as a yardstick for the parameter of the Xsdata option to the standard output Specification format Xsdata_info Interpretation when omitted Information that can be used as a yardstick for the parameter of the Xsdata option is not output to the standard output Detailed description This option outputs information that can be used as a yardstick for the parameter of the Xsdata option it specifies the maximum size of data allocated to the sdata sbss section to the standard output When using the numerical value indicated by OK data with a size less than that value is allocated to the sdata sbss area Example of use To output information that can be used as a yardstick for the parameter of the Xsdata option to the standard output describe as gt cx CF3746 Xsdata_info main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 378 of 577
610. x format up to 4 GB An error will occur if format is omitted This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Common Options tab Hex file format in the Frequently Used Options for Hex Output category From the Hex Output Options tab Hex file format in the Hex Format category Example of use To regard the format of the hex file to be output as the Motorola S type hex format standard address describe as gt cx CF3746 Xhex format S main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 501 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xhex_fill This option specifies fill processing of the hex file Specification format Xhex fill Xhex fill value Xhex fill value start size Xhex fill starct size Interpretation when omitted Fill processing is not performed Detailed description This option converts all codes in the area from address start to size size into hex format and outputs them The unused area in the specified area is filled with value The range that can be specified for value is 0x00 to OxFFFF Specify value in hexadecimal value can be specified in 1 byte or 2 byte units If the specified value is less than 2 or 4 digits the higher bits will be filled with O If value is omitted it is assumed that OxFF has been specified The range that can be specified for start is 0x00 to OxFFFFFFFF Even if start i
611. xpanded Hex Format Start address record Expanded address recorde Data recordNote Data record Expanded address record Data record Data record End record Note The expanded address record and data record are repeated Each record consists of the following fields Item Description Number 2 Number of bytes This is the number of bytes expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number of 5 3 4 5 Record type 05 Start linear address record 04 Expanded linear address record 03 Start address record 02 Expanded address record 00 Data record 01 End record l This is each byte of code expressed as 2 digit hexadecimal number R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2 CENESAS Page 101 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS Item Description Number Checksum This is the value expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal number in the record other than SS and NL sequentially subtracted from initial value 0 and that lower 1 byte expressed as a 2 digit hexadecimal number Start linear address record 32 bit address This indicates the linear address 05 XXXXXXXX SS NL ltem Description Number 1 Record mar mark ao oo Fixed ar04 Feed at 0000 EE Fixed at 05 Linear address value Expanded linear address record 32 bit address This indicates the upper 16 bit address at bits 32 to 16 SS ltem Description Number Record mark Co eee Te ree o
612. xpressed is 20 bits or 1 M byte 0x100000 W0562022 The start address of convert area exceeds the maximum value of the address that can be expressed in the Intel expanded hex format If the message W0562022 is output the start address of the area to be converted into the hex format exceeds 1 M byte W0562020 The address of convert area exceeds the maximum value of the address that can be expressed in the Intel expanded hex format If the message W0562020 is output the address to be converted into the hex format exceeds 1 M byte 20 bits The above error will be occur in the following cases even if 1 M byte is not exceeded Examples 1 The offset that starts from the address specified by the Xhex_offset option is not used gt The absolute address is stored in the hex format 2 The section is allocated in the vicinity of the upper limit of the address that can be expressed by 20 bits gt The start address fits in 20 bits but 20 bits are exceeded in the middle of the section If these two patterns are satisfied the message W0562020 is output even if the area to be converted is as small as 4 bytes R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 105 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 3 BUILD OUTPUT LISTS 3 4 2 Motorola S type hex format The Motorola S type hex format file consists of five records 1 So record as the header record S2 S3 records as the data record and S8 S7 record as the end records 2 Not
613. y below this node However this menu is disabled when the contents of the clipboard exist in the same project When the category name is in editing the contents of the clipboard are inserted Rename You can rename the selected category node R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 131 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property Displays the selected category node s property on the Property panel R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 132 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property panel This panel is used to display the detailed information on the Build tool node file or category node that is selected on the Project Tree panel by every category and change the seitings of the information Figure A 3 Property Panel Property E El a A Le Property Build Hode Build mode Output File Type andPath Output file type Intermediate file output folder El Frequently Used Options for Compie Ae Oe H Level of optimization Additional include paths Sistem mclude paths Macro definition Frequently Used O ptrons for Link Using libraries Additional library paths Output folder Output file name El Frequently Used Options for Hex 0 uput HAA ee A Hex file format Register Hode Flash Correspondence Error Qutput Warning Message Build Method Version Select Hotes Others Build mode Selects the build mode name to
614. y file libmain lib to the position immediately before member main obj describe as gt lb mb main obj libmain 1lib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 540 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Member add specification The member add specification key is as follows q This key adds the specified object module file to the end of the specified library file Specification format C Interpretation when omitted None Detailed description This key adds the specified object module file to the end of the specified library file If the specified library file does not exist a new library file that contains the specified object module file will be cre ated There is no checking as to whether or not the member with the same name as the specified object module file exists If the member with the same name exists the library file contains multiple members with the same name and the oldest member will be selected during linking Be sure to delete the old library file in order to prevent mixing the members with the same name when a new library file is created Otherwise it is recommended to use the r key Use the r key to replace the member with the member having the same name Example of use To add object module file sub obj to the end of library file libmain lib describe as gt lb q libmain 1ib sub obj R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 sQENESAS P
615. y file specified by this option cannot be found a message will not output and link processing will be continued If two or more library files are specified they are searched in the order which they are specified The cx links the standard library libc lib and standard startup routine cstart ob as well as the library specified by this option automatically When the Xno_romize option is not specified the ROMization area reservation code file rompcrt obj is also Note linked automatically Use the Xno_stdlib and Xno_ startup option to suppress this Note CubeSuite install foldernCubesuite CX V x xx lib 850e Example of use To specify library file libsmp lib to be used during linking describe as gt cx CF3746 lsmp main c R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 366 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE L This option specifies the folder to search library files Specification format Lpath path Interpretation when omitted The library file is searched from the standard library file folder Detailed description This option searches libraries from folder path the standard folderN in that order If path does not exist a warning will be output An error will occur if path is omitted Note CubeSuite install foldenCubesuite CX V x xx lib 850e Example of use To search libraries from folder lib the standard folder in that order d
616. y the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified Commands executed Specify the command to be executed after compile processing after compile processing Use the call instruction to specify a batch file example call a bat The following macro names are available as embedded macros ProjectFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the project folder OutputFolder Replaces with the absolute path of the output folder OutputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file lnputFile Replaces with the absolute path of the file to be compiled CompiledFile Replaces with the absolute path of the output file under compiling The specified command is displayed as the subproperty Default Commands executed after compile processing number of defined items How to change Edit by the Text Edit dialog box which appears when clicking the button For the subproperty you can enter directly in the text box Restriction Up to 1023 characters Up to 64 items can be specified R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 165 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Other additional options Input the compile option to be added additionally The options set here are added at the end of the compile options group How to change Dir
617. ype Far Jump file fip s Function buttons The following items are explained here How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Property panel from the Compile Options tab in the Output Code category after selecting the Far Jump file names property open the Path Edit dialog box by clicking the button And then click the Browse button in the dialog box Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder where the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from exists The project folder is selected by default 2 File list area This area displays the list of the files which match to the selections in the Look in and Files of type R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 281 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 File name area Select the name of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be set to the area that this dialog box is called from Far Jump file fjp Far Jump file Function buttons Sets the designated file to the area that this dialog box is called from R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 282 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify ROMization Area Reservation Code File dialog box This dialog box is used to select the ROMization ar
618. ze Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Dialog Box Stack Size Unknown Adjusted Function Lists Unknown Functions Adjusted Functions subl1 4 4 sub 28 8 4 System Library Functions Remark Functions will appear under Unknown Functions in the following circumstances The frame size could not be measured A recursive function for which the recursion depth has not been set in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box The function includes indirect function calls which are not set as callee functions in the Adjust Stack Size dialog box 2 18 5 Change the frame size You can dynamically change the frame size of functions for which the stack usage tracer was not able to obtain stack information or for functions that you intentionally want to modify using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box or a stack size specification file 1 Using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box The procedure for using the Adjust Stack Size dialog box is as follows Select the desired item in the tree display area of the Stack Usage Tracer window then click toolbar gt gt The Adjust Stack Size dialog box opens R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2rCENESAS Page 90 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 119 Adjust Stack Size Dialog Box Adjust Stack Size Function Mame sub11 Frame Size Cancel Additional Margir Recursion Depth Callee Function List for Indirect Call Callee Functions All Functions s
619. ze of tidata section in the Symbol Information category Example of use To calculate the frequency of variable use limiting the size of variables allocated to the tidata section to 128 bytes describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 414 of 577 Oct 01 2010 CubeSuite Ver 1 40 APPENDIX B COMMAND REFERENCE Xsfg_size_tidata_byte This option specifies the size of tidata byte section Specification format Xsfg_ size tidata_byte num Interpretation when omitted The frequency of variable use is calculated limiting the size of variables allocated to the tidata byte section to 128 bytes Detailed description This option calculates the frequency of variable use limiting the size of variables allocated to the tidata byte section to num bytes Specify 0 to 128 as num An error will occur if a value outside the range is specified An error will occur if num is omitted This option is valid only when the Xsfg_opt option is specified If the Xsfg_opt option is not specified this option will be ignored This option is equivalent to the following property in CubeSuite From the Link Options tab Size of tidata byte section in the Symbol Information category Example of use To calculate the frequency of variable use limiting the size of variables allocated to the tidata byte section to 64 bytes describe as R20UT0261EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 415 of 577 O

CubeSuite Ver.1.40 Integrated Development Environment User`s

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents